Reb5 E

1MRB520259-Uen Edition June 2000
Numerical Busbar and Breaker Failure Protection Type REB 500 (BU02)
Operating Instructions
Home
2000 ABB Power Automation Ltd Baden/Switzerland 1st Edition Applies for software version V5.0
All rights with respect to this document, including applications for patent and registration of other industrial property rights, are reserved. Unauthorised use, in particular reproduction or making available to third parties, is prohibited. This document has been carefully prepared and reviewed. Should in spite of this the reader find an error, he is requested to inform us at his earliest convenience. The data contained herein purport solely to describe the product and are not a warranty of performance or characteristic. It is with the best interest of our customers in mind that we constantly strive to improve our products and keep them abreast of advances in technology. This may, however, lead to discrepancies between a product and its "Technical Description" or "Operating Instructions".
Version 5.0
1. Introduction
2. Safety instructions
3. Structure, function and technical specification
4. External operator program (REBWIN)
5. Configuration and settings
6. Errection and installation
7. Commissioning
8. Operation and maintenance
9. Fault-finding
10. Storage, decommissioning and disposal
11. Options
12. Glossary
REB 500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A
ABB Power Automation Ltd
June 2000
1.
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5.
INTRODUCTION
REB500....................................................................................1-2 Application................................................................................1-2 Main features ...........................................................................1-3 Options.....................................................................................1-4 Using these operating instructions ...........................................1-4
1-1
1.
1.1.
INTRODUCTION
REB500 The digital busbar protection REB 500 belongs to the generation of fully digital protection devices, i.e. the analogue-to-digital conversion of the input variables takes place immediately after the input transformers and all further processing of the resulting digital signals is performed by programmable microprocessors. Its development was based on the established analogue electronic busbar protection schemes INX 2 and INX 5. The main features which enable the REB 500 to fully satisfy the demands placed on a modern protective device with respect to cost-effectiveness and functionality are compact design, only a few different types of hardware units, modular software and continuous self-supervision and diagnosis. The structure of the protection system is bay-oriented. The bay units may be located close to the switchgear in control and protection cubicles or in a central relay room. Distributed bay units are connected to the central unit by an optical fibre process bus. The central unit collects all the data and executes the protection algorithms and auxiliary functions at station level.
1.2.
Application The digital busbar protection REB500 has been designed for the high-speed selective protection of MV, HV and EHV busbars in 50 and 60 Hz power systems. Because of the flexible and modular structure of both hardware and software, the protection can be simply configured to suit the particular busbar arrangement. It is thus able to protect all busbar layouts, whether a single set of busbars or quadruple busbars with a transfer busbar. It is similarly applicable to ring busbars and 1 breaker schemes. The maximum capacity for a quadruple busbar system is 59 feeders (59 bay units) with a maximum of 7 longitudinal breakers, 8 sections of busbars and 32 protection zones. The protection detects phase and ground faults in solidly grounded and impedance grounded power systems. As with the INX 2 and INX 5 busbar protection schemes, the digital REB500 scheme only evaluates the primary system currents. The main c.ts do not have to fulfil any special requirements as is the case,
1-2
for example, with a high-impedance scheme. Even in the event of saturation of the main c.ts, the protection is still able to discriminate correctly between internal and external faults. 1.3. Main features Higher reliability due to the evaluation of two independent criteria: - differential current with restraint feature - directional current comparison Independent evaluation of each phase Minimum c.t. performance requirements High through-fault stability even when c.ts saturate Solid-state busbar replica No switching of c.t. circuits A single version for rated currents of 1A and 5A A single version for auxiliary supply voltages between 48 and 250 V Short operating time irrespective of station size and configuration Centralised system: Hardware accommodated in one or several cubicles Distributed system: Bay units located close to the switchgear with short connections to c.ts, isolators, circuit-breakers etc. Signals transferred between bay units and central unit in both centralised and distributed schemes via optical fibre cables (max. distance approx. 1200 m) Optical fibre communication is immune to electrical interference even in the immediate vicinity of HV cables Unrestricted replacement of existing busbar protection schemes (centralised system). Combined centralised and distributed systems are possible when adding feeders etc. Simple addition of new feeders User-friendly human/machine interface (HMI) Fully digital signal processing Comprehensive self-monitoring Integrated event recorder Integrated disturbance recorder for power system currents
1-3
Reduced stocks of spares due to modular design and only few different units 1.4. Options Breaker failure protection End zone fault protection Time-overcurrent protection Disturbance recorder for power system currents Separate I0 measurement for impedance grounded systems Communication with station control and supervision systems (LON/IEC) Internal user-friendly human/machine interface (HMI) with display on the bay units Redundant power supplies for central and/or bay units Overcurrent check feature for tripping commands Low-voltage check feature for tripping commands 1.5. Using these operating instructions The structure of these Operating Instructions is as follows: The introduction in Section 1 is followed by safety instructions and the significance of the corresponding symbols in Section 2. Sections 3 to 10 explain the basic functions and the operating principle of the REB500 busbar protection. Optional functions are dealt with in Section 11. Section 3 contains a detailed description of the hardware and software design, the functions, the blocking signals, other signals and the technical data. Section 4 describes the REBWIN operator program which provides facility for: controlling and setting REB500 using a PC querying system status (isolator and circuit-breaker positions etc.) viewing and changing settings assignment of inputs and outputs viewing measured variables, event list etc.
1-4
Section 5 explains the procedure for configuring the signals and calculating the pick-up values. Should it become necessary to change any settings, it is advisable to read this section carefully. Section 6 contains instructions for transporting, storing and installing REB500 and should be read before commencing installation work. The conditions that have to be fulfilled before commissioning REB500 and the commissioning procedure are to be found in Section 7. Most functions of REB500 are continuously supervised, but nevertheless, some maintenance is necessary. The checks that should be made periodically are explained in Section 8. Consult Section 9 in the event of any error messages which are displayed in normal operation, while starting the system or when working with REBWIN. The precautions to be taken when decommissioning REB500 are given in Section 10. IMPORTANT: Optional functions are explained in Section 11. Reference is made to this section in Sections 3 to 7. Virtually all the information on options is to be found in Section 11. The meanings of special terms and abbreviations, a list of all the signals, wiring examples and the recommended test reports to be used in the test bay and during commissioning are contained in the appendices (Section 12).
1-5
REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A
June 2000
2.
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Safety instruction flags .............................................................2-2 General rules............................................................................2-2 General safety instructions.......................................................2-3 Instructions for the specific product..........................................2-4
2-1
2.
2.1.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Safety instruction flags Safety instructions in these Operating Instructions are marked as follows: Danger: Immediate danger due to a mechanical or general cause. Non-observance can cause serious injury or a fatality.
Danger: Immediate danger because of high-voltage. Nonobservance can cause serious injury or a fatality.
Caution: This symbol draws attention to a dangerous situation. Non-observance can cause serious injury to persons or damage to plant.
Note: This symbol draws attention to a potentially damaging situation.
2.2.
General rules The busbar protection system REB500 corresponds to the latest practices and guidelines and complies with the recognised safety rules. Nevertheless, care must always be taken to avoid danger. Only use the busbar protection system REB500 when it is in perfect working order and in strict accordance with these Operating Instructions. Dangerous situations can arise if the equipment is used improperly, especially if the user changes the configuration.
2-2
2.3.
General safety instructions Danger: Live electrical equipment is always in the vicinity of REB500. Before working on the system, always ensure that it is impossible to come into contact with, or even close to live parts.
Danger: The busbar protection system REB500 can initiate operation of items of electrical plant (circuit-breakers and isolators). Before working on the equipment, always ensure that unwanted operation is inhibited or has no effect on persons or plant.
Danger: Strictly observe all safety precautions (interlocks, locks and blocking devices), especially those issued for the specific station.
Caution: Only properly authorised, professionally qualified and correspondingly trained personnel, who have also read and understood the operating instructions, may work on the REB500 system.
2-3
2.4.
Instructions for the specific product Caution: The REB500 is only designed to protect busbar configurations up to quadruple busbars including bypass busbar. It can protect 1 breaker schemes up to a total of 32 busbar sections. A REB500 system can accommodate a maximum of 59 bay units.
Danger: Take care never to open the secondary circuits of c.ts conducting current.
Danger: There is a danger of contact with live parts when opening REB500 cubicle doors.
Note: Electrostatic discharge can destroy components in the equipment.
Note: Other safety instructions pertaining to particular operations are contained in the respective sections of the operating instructions.
2-4
June 2000
3.
STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (BASIC FUNCTIONS AND BUSBAR PROTECTION)
System structure ......................................................................3-3 Components of the protection system......................................3-3 Central unit...............................................................................3-3 Bay unit ....................................................................................3-3 Protection system configuration ...............................................3-5 Central installation....................................................................3-5 Distributed installation ..............................................................3-6 Operating principle of the protection system............................3-8 Measurement of primary system currents ................................3-8 Signal detection (binary inputs)................................................3-8 Signal outputs (binary) .............................................................3-9 Signal designations ................................................................3-10 Self-supervision......................................................................3-14 Diagnostic program ................................................................3-15 Software supervision..............................................................3-16 Hardware supervision ............................................................3-18 Independent bay unit operation .............................................3-19 Hardware modules .................................................................3-19 Block diagram of the REB500 ................................................3-19 Central unit modules ..............................................................3-20 Bay unit 500BU02 ..................................................................3-27 Local control unit (HMI) ..........................................................3-33 High level control systems .....................................................3-35 Software.................................................................................3-37 Local control unit (HMI) ..........................................................3-37 REBWIN operator program....................................................3-38 Operating principle of the busbar protection ..........................3-40 Busbar sections and protection zones ...................................3-40 Busbar configurations ............................................................3-40 Division into protection zones ................................................3-42 Measuring principle ................................................................3-42 Restrained amplitude comparison algorithm..........................3-44 Phase comparison .................................................................3-47 Differential current alarm........................................................3-48 Neutral current alarm .............................................................3-49
3-1
3.1. 3.1.1. 3.1.1.1. 3.1.1.2. 3.1.2. 3.1.2.1. 3.1.2.2. 3.2. 3.2.1. 3.2.2. 3.2.3. 3.2.4. 3.2.5. 3.2.5.1. 3.2.5.2. 3.2.5.3. 3.2.5.4. 3.2.6. 3.2.6.1. 3.2.6.2. 3.2.6.3. 3.2.6.4. 3.2.6.5. 3.2.7. 3.2.7.1. 3.2.7.2. 3.3. 3.3.1. 3.3.1.1. 3.3.1.2. 3.3.2. 3.3.2.1. 3.3.2.2. 3.3.2.3. 3.3.2.4.
3.3.2.5. 3.3.2.6. 3.3.3. 3.3.3.1. 3.3.3.2. 3.3.4. 3.3.4.1. 3.3.5. 3.3.6. 3.4. 3.4.1. 3.4.1.1. 3.4.1.2. 3.4.1.3. 3.4.1.4. 3.4.1.5. 3.4.1.6. 3.4.1.7. 3.5. 3.5.1.
Operating times......................................................................3-50 Enabling the tripping command..............................................3-51 ITT (intertripping)....................................................................3-52 Busbar image .........................................................................3-53 Supervising isolator positions.................................................3-58 Bus-tie breaker functions .......................................................3-63 Bus-tie breaker.......................................................................3-63 REB500 system signals .........................................................3-67 REB500 blocking scheme ......................................................3-71 Ancillary REB500 functions....................................................3-75 Ancillary function descriptions................................................3-75 Event memory........................................................................3-75 Test mode ..............................................................................3-75 Installation mode....................................................................3-76 Masking and unmasking devices ...........................................3-76 Inspection and maintenance ..................................................3-77 Time synchronisation .............................................................3-79 Options...................................................................................3-80 Technical specification ...........................................................3-80 Data Sheet .............................................................................3-80
3-2
3.
STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (BASIC FUNCTIONS AND BUSBAR PROTECTION)
System structure Components of the protection system The digital busbar protection REB500 is divided into several hardware units. Bay units measure the line and bus-tie breaker currents and may be installed close to the respective c.ts. They communicate with the central unit via an optical fibre bus. The central unit processes the current signals measured by the bay units and distributes the tripping signals back to the bay units in the event of an internal fault.
3.1. 3.1.1.
3.1.1.1.
Central unit A central unit is housed in a 19" casing (up to 3 casings in large stations) containing a interconnecting bus plane (see Section 3.2.6.2), a local control unit and several hardware modules.
ABB Power Automation Ltd REB500
C E
Central Unit
Figure 3.1
Front view of a central unit
Depending on the busbar configuration, up to 20 hardware modules are inserted into a central unit. 3.1.1.2. Bay unit A bay unit is housed in a 1/3 size 19" casing and has the following main features: Single self-contained unit 2 basic versions: - 4 x I (current measurements) + 16 in/out (binary inputs and outputs)
3-3
- 4 x I (current measurements) + 4 x U (voltage measurements) + 16 in/out (binary inputs and outputs) + redundant auxiliary supplies Different semi-flush mounted versions: - Basic version with or without local HMI - Version for conventional switchpanel mounting Basic version Basic version with HMI Version for conventional switchpanel mounting
Figure 3.2
Bay units for alternative types of semi-flush mounting
Figure 3.3
Rear view of bay unit (example for I and U measurements and redundant supplies)
3-4
3.1.2.
Protection system configuration The protection system comprises a central unit and as many bay units as there are switchgear bays in the station. The bay units can be either installed in the control and protection cubicles associated with the individual bays or collectively in the central relay room. Communication between the bay units and the central unit is via an optical process bus. The central unit collects all the data and executes the protection algorithms and auxiliary functions. The process bus connecting the bay units to the central unit is divided into segments. Up to 10 bay units can be connected to a segment. (Only nine can be connected to the first segment, because the central units binary input/output module 500BI001 occupies the tenth.) Each bus segment has its own CPU master or slave processor, a master or slave bus administrator and up to two star-couplers. The busbar protection has capacity for up to 59 bay units, i.e. up to six bus segments. The central and bay units used for centralised and distributed configurations are basically the same.
3.1.2.1.
Central installation Depending on the size of the busbar system, the protection is accommodated in one or several cubicles. In this case, the bay units are fitted into mounting plates. Both central and bay units are mounted in hinged frames in the cubicles for ease of access.
Figure 3.4
Basic layout of a centralised REB500 protection system
3-5
Advantages of centralised installation Modernisation of old stations. The REB500 is installed in place of the existing busbar protection scheme.
Centralised system with 1 to 12 BU02
DC terminal block
DC terminal block
Central unit (CU)
DC terminal block
DC terminal block
Air vent
DC terminal block
Aux. supply unit
AC terminal block
AC terminal block
AC terminal block
AC terminal block
AC terminal block
Aux. supply unit
Equipment fitted from the front
Equipment fitted from the rear
Figure 3.5 3.1.2.2.
Example of the equipment cubicles in a centralised busbar protection system
Distributed installation The bay units are installed in the control and protection cubicles associated with the individual switchgear bays and the central unit is located on its own normally in a relay equipment room.
3-6
Figure 3.6
Basic layout of a REB500 protection system with distributed bay units Control and protection cubicles close to the switchgear bays
Control unit REC REB500 central unit REL
Control unit REC
REL
REB500 bay unit Feeder protection
REB500 bay unit Feeder protection
Central unit Figure 3.7
Bay unit 1
Bay unit 2
Equipment cubicles for a busbar protection system with distributed bay units
Advantages of distributed installation Short cables runs between the primary process and the bay units All control and protection equipment close to the associated bay
3-7
3.2. 3.2.1.
Short channels of communication between the devices Simple maintenance and testing
Operating principle of the protection system Measurement of primary system currents The current parameters are processed digitally by the REB500 busbar protection system. To this end, the feeder currents are sampled 48 times per period. At a power system frequencies of 50 Hz and 60 Hz, this corresponds to sampling rates of 2.4 kHz and 2.88 kHz respectively. Fourier transformation of the current signal samples takes place in the bay units so that only the fundamentals are subsequently processed. The real and apparent components of the fundamental are then derived and transferred to the central unit.
3.2.2.
Signal detection (binary inputs) Opto-couplers electrically insulate all the binary inputs. They pick up when the input voltage remains above 80 % of the rated auxiliary voltage for at least 20 ms and reset when it is below 65 % for longer than 20 ms. The standard binary inputs are all equipped with anti-bounce filters. The software anti-bounce filter has no influence on a signals time stamp, i.e. the time stamp is determined by the first occurrence of the signal at the input of the opto-coupler.
Time stamp Opto-coupler input signal Internal REB500 signal after the anti-bounce filter Anti-bounce filter time
The anti-bounce time for the special signals below is set to the minimum of 2 ms instead of the standard time (normally 20 ms) set generally for the system: All disturbance recorder input signals 167nn_Start DR_x and 36705_General Start DR
3-8
Breaker failure input signals 137nn_Start BFP_Lx and 13705_External Start BFP 31805_External release BB zone and 11605_External release Trip The signals 1151011525_Supervison aux. voltage_x are set to a fixed anti-bounce time of 10 ms.
Caution: Should several signals be configured for a common opto-coupler input and one of them have a minimum antibounce time of 2 ms, then 2 ms applies for all the signals. This kind of configuration should be avoided wherever possible. A distinction is made between input signals with a slow response and those with a fast response. Internally, REB500 processes the process bus signals in fast and slow cycles according to their priority. Signal response: slow: These signals must be maintained at the binary input for at least 128 ms plus the anti-bounce time and are processed by the slow cycle. These signals must be maintained at the binary input for at least 8 ms plus the anti-bounce time and are processed by the fast cycle.
fast:
3.2.3.
Signal outputs (binary) The bay units generate two kinds of binary output signals, tripping commands and logic signals. The central unit only generates logic signals. This takes place in accordance with the logic configured in the processors of central and bay units. To distinguish between tripping commands and logic signals, the names of tripping commands are written in upper case characters. Output signals can be assigned to auxiliary output relays to actuate either a tripping or signalling circuit. As a safety precaution, it is impossible to assign tripping commands and logic signals to the same output relay, i.e. tripping commands can only be combined with other tripping commands and logic signals with other logic signals. For example, the signals 21305_Trip and 21105_EXTERNAL TRIP cannot be configured to operate the same output contact.
3-9
With regard to the rating of their contacts, the bay unit outputs CR09 to CR16 are designed to be used as tripping channels while outputs CR11 to CR16 are rated to directly operate circuitbreaker tripping coils. Output CR01 to CR08 are suitable for relaying logic signals. The intertripping output 21110_TRIP is always configured and is used by the following protection functions: Busbar protection tripping Breaker failure tripping t2 End zone fault tripping (c.ts on the busbar side) External tripping of the protection zone
Signal 21805_In service is configured to operate from CR01. Refer to Section 12 for the recommended configuration. 3.2.4. Signal designations The REB500 configuration assigns the signals to predefined inputs and outputs. The designations of the signals are determined according to the following convention:
3-10
Abbreviation categories BBP_ BFP_ BU_ CU_ DR_ EFP_ I O OCDT_ PDF_ SYS_ SYS_INT UV_ Busbar protection signal Breaker failure signal Bay unit Central unit Disturbance recorder signal End fault protection signal Input Output Time-overcurrent protection signal Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection signal General signal Internal system signal Low voltage check feature
Table 3.1
Abbreviations used for the different signal categories
Function abbreviations Busbar protection Breaker failure protection End fault protection Time-overcurrent protection Disturbance recorder BBP BFP EFP OCDT DR
Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection PDF Low voltage check feature UV
Table 3.2
Abbreviations used for the various functions
3-11
Category number 1
Name category Signal
Upper and lower case rules First letter upper case, other letters of the first word lower case. Subsequent words conform to national upper and lower case conventions. Functions such as BBP are always in upper case letters. Statuses such as Open have an upper case first letter and the remainder written in lower case characters. Phase designations are written in upper case letters, e.g. L1. Parameters such as t1 are lower case.
Input signals that can initiate tripping Direct tripping signals Output signals used for transfer tripping
The same rules as for category 1. Secondary effects are in upper case letters, e.g. TRIP. All words and letters in upper case characters As for category 1, in addition the effect is written completely in upper case characters.
3 4
Table 3.3
Relationship between category numbers and signal names
3-12
Syntax rules for signal names (examples) Input Start BFP L1_1 Name category 1
1. Effect Output
2. Function BFP Trip L1
3. Phase
4. Order
Name category 1
1. Function Input
2. Effect External TRIP BB zone
3. Phase (target) Name category 2
1. Effect Output BFP TRIP
2. Location (e.g. zone) Name category 3
1. Function Output BBP remote TRIP
2. Effect Name category 4
1. Function
2. Target
3. Effect
Table 3.4
Signal name syntax
3-13
Category 1 2 3 4 5 BU_I BU_O CU_I CU_O SYS
Protection function 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 INT SYS BBP BFP EFP OCDT DR PDF UV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signal function TRIP Block command Tripping signal Blocking signal Bus image Control Start General alarm
Sequential number 05 10 15 20 etc.
Example of a signal number:
2 3 3 05 = BFP Trip t1
Table 3.5 3.2.5.
Significance of the signal number digits
Self-supervision To ensure the maximum possible reliability, the REB500 is equipped with a self-supervision function which enables it to respond quickly to any hardware (HW) or software (SW) errors. Some, such as an error in transmission via the process bus, only affect a single data set and are generally of a transient nature. A serious error would mean, for example, that an essential function could no longer be guaranteed. It is especially important to detect errors of this kind and to take the corresponding precautions, which can include blocking the protection functions and tripping outputs. The self-supervision and diagnostic function ensures the high availability of the busbar protection. Errors and defects are immediately detected and signalled so that corrective action can be taken without delay.
3-14
3.2.5.1.
Diagnostic program The diagnostic program is an important part of the busbar protection software. Its task is to manage (start and stop) all the other applications (e.g. protection functions and binary inputs and outputs) and process the data of the self-supervision function. The system SW is object oriented, i.e. it is divided into subsystems that perform specific applications (protection functions, binary inputs and outputs, database controller etc.). The structure of the diagnostic program reflects the structure and distributed architecture of the protection system, i.e. it is also distributed between every module of the central unit and bay units having a microprocessor.
Higher levels Enabling signal Status
Enabling signal
Intermediate level of diagnostic program Status Enabling signal
Application status
Status
Lower level (1)
...
Lower level (n)
Figure 3.8
Structure of the self-supervision function
Each level in the structure of the diagnostic program reports the status of the applications at the same or lower levels to the next level up. Enabling (release) signals are distributed from top to bottom. As soon as the diagnostic program detects a critical fault, the corresponding status is reported upwards and the downwards distribution of the enabling signal blocked. The protection system thus propagates the blocking of the enabling signal to block all tripping outputs. In the case of critical faults, the protection system is shut down and restarted.
3-15
3.2.5.2.
Software supervision Programming language in safety systems The choice of program development method and programming language is extremely important for digital protection systems. The digital busbar protection REB500 was developed using the programming language Ada which was especially written for real-time and safety applications. Apart from special features that enhance the reliability of the resulting program (e.g. abstraction principle and strict data type rules), Ada facilitates exception processing which means that critical situations which occur while the system is busy with normal program execution are detected and immediately processed. Supervising the applications The diagnostic program can control applications by detecting status changes (e.g. initialisation and stopping at the right instant). The applications report their statuses (e.g. initialisation finished, processing finished or error detected). Using status changes to supervise the applications means that an application that has been started must report back to the diagnostic program within a given time. A hard-wired watchdog per microprocessor which the programs have to reset at regular intervals supervises the entire SW. Should a watchdog not be reset, the watchdog timer times out and initiates a hardware reset. Supervision of data transfer via the process bus A number of supervised criteria ensure the integrity of the data transferred via the process bus. All data transferred via the process bus are subject to a cyclic redundancy check according to the TC57 telecontrol algorithm. Thus in a block of up to 64 Bit, five Bit errors can be detected. Data are also processed using the Manchester code which further raises the standard of security. Supervision of the protection functions The operation of every application is synchronised and a time stamp is attached to all analogue signal samples and binary signals. Before determining a differential current, a check is performed to make sure the samples have the same time stamp. Should this not be the case, the samples concerned are not evaluated.
3-16
Processing and supervising the binary inputs Every binary input is equipped with its own anti-bounce software. As a rule, the status of a signal is considered valid for processing if it persists 20 ms after its first incidence. The binary inputs are also supervised with respect to oscillations. If the status of an input changes five times in 100 ms, the input is marked as invalid. In this case, the signal is processed such that the reliability of the system is assured, i.e. invalid blocking inputs are assumed to be active. Enabling binary outputs To achieve the maximum reliability of the system, every tripping command has an associated enabling signal and should the diagnostics program detect an HW or SW error, it suppresses the enabling signals for the binary outputs, i.e. the tripping outputs are inhibited. Error messages in the event list All errors and defects detected by the self-supervision function are processed by the diagnostics program and recorded as events. These are classified as major errors if the proper operation of the protection functions can no longer be guaranteed. In such cases, the system is automatically restarted. All the output channels are blocked, the protection devices are no longer standing by and the green LEDs on the local control units flash. Table 4-1 Error messages generated by the operator program REBWIN in Section 4.6. Error messages lists the possible events recorded by the diagnostics program. Errors that do not endanger the proper operation of the protection functions are classified as minor errors.
Error messages generated by the REBWIN operator program
The protection system errors that are displayed in a REBWIN window are described in Table 4.1 Error messages generated by the operator program REBWIN in Section 4.6. Error messages. Some can be rectified by restarting either the operator program or the protection system. Starting or restarting the system When the self-supervision function or the diagnostics program restarts the system or a part of it, the procedure is signalled on the local control unit. The blocked status of the system is signalled by the flashing yellow LED on all the units and on the HMI.
3-17
While the system is starting, all the LEDs flash and the SW applications are indicated by a designation (e.g. MPL, TIM etc.). The successful start-up of the system can be seen from the fact that the main menu is displayed on all the units and that the signal 41810_In service is set. 3.2.5.3. Hardware supervision Supervising the auxiliary supply The power supply units in the central and bay units are designed for an input voltage in the range 36 VDC to 312 VDC. The three output voltages (rated +5 V and 12 V) are supervised with respect to their permissible variations. An auxiliary supply voltage that is out of tolerance counts as a major error, i.e. the protection system is shut down and restarted. Supervision of the analogue circuits The analogue circuits between the secondaries of the input transformers for current signals and voltage signals where configured and the A/D converters are duplicated and the two circuits supervise each other. A discrepancy between them is detected by the analogue circuit supervision function which then blocks the respective bay unit. A/D (analogue-to-digital) converters To supervise the accuracy of the A/D converters and the associated components, they are also made to convert reference voltages (7.5 V and 0 V) each time they convert the analogue signals. The resulting digital values of the reference voltages are then compared with respect to permissible upper and lower limits. Microprocessor program and main memories All main memories are tested by writing and then reading a test pattern. Supervision of the tripping relay coils The circuits controlling the six bay unit tripping relays CR11 to CR16 are arranged such as to supervise the integrity of the tripping relay coil. Parts not covered by the self-supervision function It is impossible to supervise all parts of the protection chain, e.g. the binary input circuits. It is also advisable to install an external trip circuit supervision system.
3-18
3.2.5.4.
Independent bay unit operation In the event of failure of the central unit or the optical process bus, the bay units continue to perform the local protection functions breaker failure, end zone fault and time-overcurrent and also to maintain the disturbance recorder function. This, however, is an emergency operating mode subject to limitations: As the bay units cannot communicate with the central unit, no intertripping is possible. The REBWIN operator program and local HMI are severely restricted and response can be extremely slow. Events and disturbance recorder records can be read, but none of the binary inputs and outputs function and currents and voltages can only be displayed on the local control unit (LMI).
The bay units automatically restart themselves as soon as communication is restored. The independent operation of the bay units is an emergency operating mode and not intended to enable them to be used as protection devices without a central unit. It only serves to bridge the time until the central unit or the communication bus is restored to operation. 3.2.6. 3.2.6.1.
Bay unit (BU02)
Optical interface Local HMI Local HMI
C E
C E
Hardware modules Block diagram of the REB500

Central unit (CU)
DC DC DC DC DC Real-time clock SCS/SMS interface RS 232 interface
CPU CPU module
DP DSP mem Binary I/O register A/D
CIM
CPU module Filter
CPU module
Filter
Starcoupler
Binary I/O
Starcoupler
Binary I/O
Electrical insulation
HEST 005026 C
Figure 3.9
Block diagrams of bay and central units
3-19
3.2.6.2.
Central unit modules The following modules can be fitted in a central unit:
Module Master CPU Type 500CMP04 Function Processor module for up to 9 bay units with a process bus interface, RAM, local control unit interface and non-volatile memory (flash) Extension processor required per 10 additional bay units I/O module with 12 opto-coupler inputs and 9 relay outputs Module with 5 transmit/receive optical pairs. Communication processor for LON or IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces (optional) Transition module for CMP and CSP processors Transition module for CIM communication processors (optional) Manages and controls the transfer of data via the respective process bus segment Auxiliary supply
Slave CPU Binary I/O module Optical star-coupler Communication interface (communication CPU) Transition module Transition module Bus controller
500CSP04 500BIO01 500SCM01 500CIM04
500TRM02 500TRM03 500MBA01
Power supply unit
500PSM03
Table 3.6
Central unit modules
Power supply unit 500PSM03 The power supply unit is a DC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input and output and an output power of 100 W. It has an input voltage range of 36 VDC to 312 VDC (i.e. 48 V -25 %...250 V +25 %) without any switching of ranges. The standard output voltages are +5 VDC and 12 VDC. The tolerances of the output voltages are continuously monitored. The input of the power supply unit 500PSM03 is protected by a 6.3 A/250 V slow fuse. The current surge when energising the PSM03 is limited to 10 A. The use of an external miniature circuit-breaker (m.c.b.) Type S282 UC-K 6 is recommended. There is an on/off switch on the front of the power supply unit 500PSM03 which must be in the on position when the protection is in operation. In the off position, the PSU is on standby.
3-20
Caution: A power supply unit may only be withdrawn or inserted when the power supply is switched off. To withdraw a unit, turn off the switch on the power supply unit and disconnect the green power supply cable connector. It is not sufficient to simply switch the unit off at the switch. Other modules may only be withdrawn or inserted when the power supply unit 500PSM03 is switched off. The power supply unit 500PSM03 has three LEDs: Green LED: lights providing all the output voltages are within tolerance and extinguishes in the event of a short-circuit or overload of one or several output voltages. Yellow LED: lights when one of a pair of redundant power supply units has failed (corresponds to operation of the Warning signalling relay). Red LED: lights when one of the modules in the respective rack (including power supply unit) has failed (corresponds to operation of the Alarm relay).
Contacts: 1 2 3 Alarm: 1-3: Normal operation 1-2: Alarm or not in operation 4 5 6 Warning: 4-6: Normal operation 4-5: Warning or not in operation
Normally only the Alarm contact is connected. Redundancy: When two 500PSM03 power supply units are operating in parallel, their outputs are connected via diodes such that the supply to the protection modules is maintained should one supply unit fail. A power supply unit 500PSM03 does not require any maintenance.
3-21
Front plane bus 500CUB02 (standard) The sockets for the plug-in modules are mounted and interconnected on the front plane bus. The maximum capacity of the front plane is: 2 power supply units 4 processor units 12 modules of other types 10 RS485 process bus (MVB) interfaces are provided. Front plane bus 500CUB01 The front plane bus 500CUB01 is only used when the number of bay units exceeds 29. The sockets for the plug-in modules are mounted and interconnected on it. The maximum capacity of the front plane 500CUB01 is: 2 power supply units 6 processor units 10 modules of other types 10 RS485 process bus (MVB) interfaces are provided. Processor module 500CPU04 There are two 25 pin Sub-D serial interfaces, two pushbuttons and eight LEDs on the front of the module. The Sub-D interfaces and the pushbuttons are not used during normal operation and are covered. The LEDs serve the following purposes: FAIL (red) RUN (green) signals a hardware fault. lights when the program is running. STAT (yellow) only lights when the program is not running. SCON (green) indicates the master processor module and can only be lit on one module in the protection system. LAN (green) SCSI (green) VME (green) Not applicable to REB500. Not applicable to REB500. signals data transfer via the VME bus. FUSE (green) Not applicable to REB500.
Apart from the microprocessor and the main and program memories, the module has four sockets for industry pack de3-22
vices. An industry pack is a small sub-module measuring approximately 80 x 35 mm that is mounted directly on a processor module to expand its functionality for a specific application. The industry pack interface has standardised mechanical and electrical characteristics. The following two types of industry packs are used in the REB500 busbar protection. 500HPBI01 Every plug-in unit requires a special interface module and communication memory (RAM) to enable it to transfer data via the process bus. The interface function is performed by an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC). The communication memory is basically a register for process bus data. 500IPS01 This module includes primarily the serial interface for the local control unit. Part of engineering a project is determining the components to be fitted in the processor module. There are a number of alternatives depending on the size of the system. One processor module with one or several sub-module functions as CPU. It performs the protection functions at station level. Where a busbar scheme only has a single communication bus segment, only one master CPU is used (CPU master processor = CMP). Schemes with several communication bus segments have one master CPU and several slave CPUs (CPU slave processor = CSP). Only one processor per rack may be configured as CMP, i.e. jumper J1 is inserted in only one processor).
3-23
Alternative CPU arrangements Sub-module sockets and jumpers

J1
CMP
500IPS01
CSP
500PBI01
500PBI01
J22
Figure 3.10 CMP:
Alternative CPU arrangements
CPU master processor (500CPU04) Jumper J1 inserted (VME bus master) Jumper inserted in J22 1-3, 2-4 (VME bus +5 V STDBY) CPU slave processor (500CPU04) Jumper J1 not inserted Jumper J22 inserted in 3-5, 4-6 (SRAM on-board)
CSP:
When jumper J22 on the CMP module is inserted in 1-3, 2-4, the event memory supply is supported by the condensers on the 500CUB02 front plane. These condensers are not fitted on the 500CUB01 front plane and the alternatives are either to operate without buffering of the event memory supply or to use the battery on the CMP board by inserting jumper J20 into 3-5, 4-6 (see paragraph Failure of the auxiliary supply batteries below). Bus controller (standard version) The transfer of data via the process bus segments is controlled by bus controller processor. As is the case with the CPU processors, there can be master (MBA) and slave (SBA) bus controllers. Generally, a 500MBA01 is used.
3-24
The bus controller 500MBA01 is connected by an optical fibre cable to the process bus.
MBA SBA
no sub-modules
no sub-modules
Figure 3.11 MBA: SBA:
Bus controllers (standard version)
Master bus controller (500MBA01) Slave bus controller (500MBA01)
Bus controller (Version 2, scarcely used) The combination of modules 500CPU01, 500TRM02 and 500PBI01 can be used as bus controller instead of a 500MBA01.
MBA J1
no sub-modules
SBA
500PBI01 500PBI01
J20
Figure 3.12 MBA:
Bus controllers (alternative 2)
Master bus controller (500CPU01) Jumper J1 inserted Jumper J20 inserted in 3-5, 4-6 (SRAM on-board) 500MBA01
SBA:
3-25
Failure of the auxiliary supply, batteries Maintenance-free condensers are fitted in the bay unit and the 500CUB02 central unit which supply the disturbance recorder and event memories for 24 hours in the event of a auxiliary supply failure. A lithium battery is mounted on each of the 500CPU04 units (CMP and CSP) for supplying the memory modules which, however, is not used, and there is also a system clock with integrated lithium battery. The clock on the CSP boards is not used, but the one on the CMP provides the date and time for REB500 in the event of an auxiliary supply failure. The level of charge left in the lithium batteries cannot be measured and their life depends on a number of factors such as ambient temperature and how long they are switched on, but is typically more than 10 years. The clock is only used to provide the date and time for initialising the time tagging of REB500 events when switching the central unit on. The only consequence of the lithium battery being unable to maintain the clock supply should the auxiliary supply fail would be that the absolute date and time would be incorrect the next time REB500 was started. 500TRM02 transition module The sub-modules on a 500CPU04 processor module are connected by ribbon cables to the transition module (500TRM02) and the bus board. Every 500CPU04 processor module has a transition module next to it. Note: A 500CPU04 processor module and its associated 500TRM02 transition module must be withdrawn from the casing together.
Star-coupler module 500SCM01 The star-coupler module 500SCM01 converts the electrical process bus signals into optical signals and vice versa. Each one provides five optical transmit/receive pairs which are connected to five bay units by optical fibre cables. The transfer of data is signalled by a yellow LED for transmit and a yellow LED for receive. Both must light when the protection is in operation.
3-26
Binary I/O module 500BIO01 The binary I/O module 500BIO01 provides opto-coupler inputs for signals from the primary system process and auxiliary relays for sending signals and commands to it. It has a complement of 12 opto-coupler inputs and 9 auxiliary relay outputs. Both inputs and outputs electrically insulate the internal electronics from the external circuits. The number of I/O modules installed in the central unit is determined when engineering the specific project. A maximum of two input/output modules can be configured. 3.2.6.3. Bay unit 500BU02 A 500BU02 bay unit is designed as a single self-contained unit. Two basic versions are available: 500BU02-1: 16 binary inputs 16 binary outputs 4 c.t. inputs (IL1, IL2, IL3, IL0) 16 binary inputs 16 binary outputs 4 c.t. inputs (IL1, IL2, IL3, IL0) 4 v.t. inputs (UL1, UL2, UL3, UL0) Redundant power supplies
500BU02-2:
3-27
Bay units 500 BU02_1 (4 I, 16 I/O) 500 BU02_2 (4 I, 4 U*, 16 I/O)

* with redundant power supply
Inputs and outputs provided
Prozess bus
V.t.s
U 1 UL1 2
0
C.t.s
I 1 2 3
1 5 0 1
IL1
Binary inputs
A
Binary outputs
Prozess bus
4 UL2 5 7 UL3 8 10 UL0 11

0 0 0
1 2 3
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5 0 1 5 0 1 5 0
IL2
IL3
IL0
redundant power supply

B D
HMI interface Power supply

P 1 2
+ -
1 2
+ -
HEST 005028 C
Figure 3.13
3-28
Bay units 500BU02-1 and 500BU02-2
Two versions of the bay unit for semi-flush mounting are available. Version for conventional switchpanel mounting: This version of the bay unit has a frontplate and a local HMI and is designed for fitting into switchpanel cut-outs. It is used primarily for distributed REB500 systems. Basic version with or without local HMI: The basic version does not have a frontplate. A connector is provided for a separately mounted HMI. This version is used primarily for centralised REB500 systems, because the bay units are generally installed in a cubicle and are not visible from outside. Basic version Basic version with HMI Version for conventional switchpanel mounting
Figure 3.14
Bay units for alternative types of semi-flush mounting
Bay unit power supply: The auxiliary power supply is provided by a DC/DC converter with electrically insulated input and outputs and a rated output power of 9 W. The input voltage range is 36 VDC to 312 VDC (i.e. 48 V 25% to 250 V +25%) without the need for switching or adjustment. Protecting the input of each 500BU02 by an external miniature circuit-breaker (m.c.b.) Type S282 UC-K (2 A) is recommended. An on/off switch is located on the front of the unit and a green LED lights continuously providing the output voltages are within tolerance. The LED extinguishes in the event of a short-circuit or overload. Redundant auxiliary supply units are possible (optional).
3-29
Caution: The on/off switch on the power supply unit does not isolate the unit from the input supply. Switch off the m.c.b. to do this.
Binary inputs and outputs on the bay unit 500BU02 Inputs: Signal voltage 48250 VDC, 8 groups of 2 inputs. The effective pick-up voltage is set by configuring the software. Auxiliary relay outputs (rupture current) CR01CR08 Signalling contacts max. 0.5 A at U 50 VDC max. 0.1 A at U 120 VDC max. 0.04 A at U 250 VDC Tripping contacts max. 1.5 A at U 50 VDC max. 0.3 A at U 120 VDC max. 0.1 A at U 250 VDC
CR09CR16
The rupturing currents given below can be achieved by externally wiring two contacts in series. CR09CR16 Two tripping contacts in series max. 5 A at U 50 VDC max. 1 A at U 120 VDC max. 0.3 A at U 250 VDC
3-30
Process bus
E Tx OL01 Rx
Binary outputs
1 C
CR01
2 3 4
Binary inputs
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CR02
5 6 7
OC01 OC02 CR03 CR04 OC03 OC04 CR05 CR06 OC05 OC06 CR07 CR08 OC07 OC08 CR09 CR10
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OC09 OC10
OC11 OC12
CR11 CR12 CR13
7 8 9 10 11 12
OC13 OC14 CR14 OC15 OC16

500BAP01
13 14 15
CR15 CR16
500BOR01
HEST 005050 C
Figure 3.15
Binary inputs and outputs
C.t and v.t. terminals on the 500BU02

A bay unit has terminals for connecting 4 c.ts. The primaries of the input transformers have tappings for rated currents of 1 and 5 A. There are thus three screw terminals per c.t. Only version 500BU02-2 of the bay unit is equipped with screw terminals for v.ts.
3-31
The rated voltage of the v.t. inputs is 200 V. The effective input voltage is set by configuring the software. Therefore there are only two screw terminals per v.t.
1 A terminal 5 A terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
C.t.s
1 5 0 1 5 0 1 5 0 1 5 0
V.t.s
U IL1 2 4 IL2 5 7 IL3 8 10 IL0 11
0 0 0 0
1 UL1
UL2
UL3
UL0
Power supply P 1 2
+ -
1 2
Redundant power supply

-
500PTM01
500UTM01
Optional
HEST 005029 C
Figure 3.16
C.t and v.t. terminals
Process bus connectors on the 500BU02 The process bus input and output connectors are located above the binary inputs on the rear of the bay unit. Analogue section of the 500BU02 The main task performed by the analogue section is to process 8 analogue input signals. The A/D converters have a range of 16 Bit and a sampling rate of 2'400 Hz per channel at a system frequency of 50 Hz (2'880 Hz at 60 Hz). The module comprises a microprocessor, a main memory, a flash program memory and a watchdog. A digital signal processor (DSP) is also included for signal pre-processing. Note: A bay unit is a single closed unit. In case of failure, individual modules are not replaced, but the entire bay unit.
3-32
3.2.6.4.
Local control unit (HMI) The local control unit, which forms part of every central unit and can optionally be installed in the bay units as well, is equipped with a four-line LCD, 3 LEDs and 6 pushbuttons. It permits all the operations that are necessary to be carried out locally and includes an optical interface for a PC. The optical interface electrically insulates the PC from the REB500 devices and prevents electrical interference between the two. The local control units in both central and bay units indicate the following: Current and voltage measurements Input and output statuses Alarms (generated by the respective bay unit) System (or bay unit) settings Protection settings for the particular bay
LEDs: green yellow
red
Optical PC interface Figure 3.17 Local control unit (HMI)
3-33
LEDs A LED can be in one of three states: not lit, flashing or continuously lit. All LEDs flash while the system is being initialised. Green Once the protection has been initialised and is standing by, the green LED lights continuously in normal operation. If it is not lit or flashing, the unit is either not switched on or defective. Yellow The yellow LED is lit while an alarm is active. When an alarm (e.g. differential current or isolator alarm) is first generated, the yellow LED flashes and then lights continuously after it is either acknowledged by pressing a button or tripping takes place. Red A red LED indicates that the protection has tripped. This LED remains lit until reset by a signal applied to the corresponding binary input or via the submenu Reset latching. LCD When an alarm or a trip occurs, the functions of the three LEDs are displayed on the first line and the event is described in more detail on the remaining three lines. The lines show information according to the actual level in the menu structure. The background illumination of the LCD on the local control unit switches off if no buttons are pressed for about 10 minutes. It switches on again as soon as a button is pressed. This first operation of a button does not delete any information on the display. Pushbuttons The six pushbuttons serve mainly to navigate through the menu structure. If the background illumination of the LCD is switched off, pressing any button switches it on again. If it is already lit, pressing a button acknowledges the information being displayed on the local control unit. Button E Press button E to go to the next menu down.
3-34
Button C Press button C to return to the main menu. If Reset latching is the current menu, pressing this button resets any relays that are latched. Arrow buttons The buttons marked and are for scrolling through displays of information needing more than four lines. The buttons marked and are for moving through the menus item by item. Entering a bay unit ID See Section 8.3.2. 3.2.6.5. High level control systems Station automation system By means of communication module 500CIM04, the REB500 busbar protection can be integrated in a station automation system (SCS) or a station monitoring system (SMS). The system supports two station bus protocols LON and IEC 60870-5-103 (see Section 11.8 Interbay bus (IBB) connection). Optical interface An optical serial interface is provided on the local control unit of both central and bay units for connecting a PC. Using the PC and the operator program REBWIN running under Mocrosoft WINDOWS 98 or NT, the entire protection system can be configured, settings made or changed and its correct operation tested. 2 electrical-to-optical converters and 2 optical fibre cables are needed for the connection between REB500 and the PC. The cables have either plastic or glass cores depending on the distance. Optical fibre cables Distances 30 m Optical fibre cables with plastic cores are permissible for distances up to 30 m. Complete cable kits (2 converters and cables) can be ordered as accessories under the following numbers:
3-35
Type
Order No.
Part No.
YX216a-1 (4 m) YX216a-1 (10 m) YX216a-1 (30 m)
7433 1640 AA 7433 1640 BA 7433 1640 CA
HESG448522 R1 HESG448522 R2 HESG448522 R3
Distances 30 m Optical fibre cables with 62.5/125 mm glass cores and appropriate converters such as Hirschmann OZDV 2451 G (Hirschmann Order No. 943 299-021) are recommended for distances greater than 30 m. The converter at the REB500 end should be configured as DCE and the one at the PC end (with 25 to 9 pin adapter) as DTE. Modem link The PC and REBWIN can also be coupled to the REB500 protection system over long distances using a modem (see Section 11.9.3 Modem link). Serial interface In addition to the optical connectors on the control unit on the front, the PC can also be connected to the serial interface at the rear of the REB500 central unit. This should be used for long distance communication via either optical fibre cables or a modem. For reasons of safety, only one of the two connectors may be in operation at any one time, either the local connection on the front of the units (HMI) or the remote communication connector CMP at the rear. When REB500 is started, both interfaces are standing by. As soon as REBWIN is started on the PC, it establishes communication via the interface it is connected to and the other one is disabled and remains so until the first connection is shut down (REBWIN is closed on the PC). Both interfaces are then once again standing by and waiting for REBWIN to establish a new connection. Both modem and optical fibre cable links are connected to the connector (25 pin Sub-D) marked SERIAL PORT 2 on the CMP. The port is configured for 9600 Baud, 8 Bit, no parity and 1 stop Bit and cannot be changed (see Section 11.9.1 Serial interface (RS232)).
3-36
3.2.7. 3.2.7.1.
Software Local control unit (HMI) The information regarding the current and voltage measurements, the statuses of inputs and outputs, alarms, system settings (central unit only) and the settings of the protection functions that have been configured can be viewed on the local control unit on either central or bay units, but not changed. The corresponding data are organised in menus and submenus. The desired menu item is accessed and selected using the left and right arrow buttons. If there is room for only a part of a menu on the display, use the arrow buttons marked and to see the parts that are not visible. The menu structure of central and bay units is basically the same with additions on the central unit for general system settings and on the bay units for the menu items of specific bay unit functions. Menu structure of the central unit
Alarms Trips Reset latching Central unit Meas. var. Bus zones Bus zone 1 Diff. cur. alarm Bus zone 2 Diff. cur. alarm ... (other bus zones as configured) Inputs Slot 19 (where fitted) Slot 20 (where fitted) Outputs Slot 19 (where fitted) Slot 20 (where fitted) Global values Settings System response Busbar protection Phases Neutral Bay units Bay unit 1 Meas. var. Currents Voltages Inputs Slot 5 Slot 4 (where configured) Outputs
3-37
Slot 5 Slot 4 (where configured) Circuit-breakers Breaker designation ... (where configured) Settings BBP BFP (where configured) OCDT (where configured) EFP (where configured) PDF (where configured) Bay unit 2 See bay unit 1 ... (other bay units as configured)
Menu structure of the bay unit

Alarms Trips Reset latching Settings Global values System response BBP Phases Neutral current Overcurrent enable BFP (where configured) OCDT (where configured) EFP (where configured) PDF (where configured) Measured variables Currents Voltages Inputs Slot 1 Outputs Slot 1 Circuit-breakers Breaker designation ... (where configured)
3.2.7.2.
REBWIN operator program The REBWIN operator program running on a PC and connected via the optical serial interface on the central unit or a bay unit is much more convenient to use than the buttons on the local control unit. It also permits parameters and settings to be changed. The corresponding menu items are also arranged in menus and submenus. The items of the main menu are:
Figure 3.18
3-38
Main menu of the REBWIN operator program
File
The menu item File permits databases to be opened and saved and a database to be uploaded from the protection or downloaded to it.
View The menu item View contains menu items for viewing the plant diagram, the measurements of each protection zone, inputs and outputs, switchgear statuses, the event list and any tripping that has taken place. Settings The menu item Settings provides facility for setting the system parameters and the operating values for the various protection functions (busbar, breaker failure, time-overcurrent, end zone etc.). Configuration The menu item Configuration concerns the layout of the primary system, i.e. the activation/deactivation (masking/ unmasking) of circuit-breakers, isolators, c.ts and v.ts, the configuration of inputs, outputs and the disturbance recorder and the planning of maintenance. Testing The menu item Test is for enabling/disabling either the test or installation mode. Tools Functions for producing reports, changing passwords and setting the system time are available under the menu item Tools. Clicking on a menu item opens a dialogue for entering the configuration data for the particular item or reading the values of the respective parameters.
3-39
Figure 3.19
Example of settings dialogue for busbar protection
For further details, see Section 4 REBWIN PC operator program and Section 5 Configuration and setting.
3.3.
Operating principle of the busbar protection The REB500 busbar protection detects and trips phase and earth faults in MV, HV and EHV power systems. The main demands the busbar protection has to fulfil are: fast and discriminative isolation of the faulted section of busbar high through-fault stability
3.3.1. 3.3.1.1.
Busbar sections and protection zones Busbar configurations The REB500 busbar protection is applicable to virtually all busbar configurations. A few of the most common examples of the many possible busbar configurations are given below:
3-40
Figure 3.20
Single busbars
I II
Figure 3.21
Double busbars and bus-tie breaker
I II
Bypass
Figure 3.22
Double busbars and bypass busbar
3-41
II Figure 3.23 1 breaker scheme
Figure 3.24 3.3.1.2.
Ring busbars
Division into protection zones The REB500 busbar protection protects all busbar configurations from single busbars to quadruple busbars and a bypass busbar, 1 breaker schemes and ring main busbars. The maximum capacity is 59 bay units (a bay unit per feeder or in the case of a bus-tie breaker a bay unit per set of c.ts; longitudinal isolators can be equipped either with bay units of their own or they can jointly use and existing bay unit). Faults on up to 32 busbar sections (protection zones) can be discriminatively detected and tripped.
3.3.2.
Measuring principle The busbar protection (BBP) operates according to the principle of a combined differential current measurement with operation and restraint features and a phase comparison function. In a healthy condition, all the current flowing towards a busbar section must leave it again. The busbar protection scheme is based on a measurement algorithm which compares the amplitudes of the feeder currents and
3-42
derives a restraint criterion. The algorithm is executed independently for every protection zone and phase. In addition to amplitude comparison, their phase relationship is also compared as a second criterion (see Section 3.3.2.2. Phase comparison). The neutral current has to be separately monitored in power systems with impedance grounding (see Section 3.3.2.4. Neutral current measurement).
Phase L1 measuring system
Neutral current measuring system (impedance grounded systems)
Restrained amplitude comparison Internal fault? Yes
No
No
No
Inclusion of neutral current permissible? Yes
No
Restrained amplitude comparison Internal fault?
No
Phase comparison Internal fault?
No
No
Yes No Phase comparison Internal fault? No fault detected Yes
No
Yes No fault detected
Yes No fault detected
Yes
Internal fault on phase L1
Internal ground fault
Intertripping command
No fault detected
Figure 3.25
REB500 protection functions
The logic linking the protection functions (Figure 3.25 REB500 protection functions) shows that the REB500 protection can only trip when both protection functions (restrained amplitude and phase comparisons) detect a fault on the same busbar section and phase. If the user wishes, the neutral current is also evaluated independently of the phase measurements in impedance grounded systems.
3-43
3.3.2.1.
Restrained amplitude comparison algorithm The restrained amplitude comparison function is basically a differential current measurement with the sum of all the current amplitudes Irstnt acting in a restraining sense. Amplitude comparison The differential current Idiff is the geometric sum of all the currents flowing towards and away from the busbar. The data transfer capacity from the bay units to the central unit is not unlimited and for this reason, only the real and apparent components of the fundamental are transferred to the central unit for evaluation. Thus only the complex components of the fundamental are processed by the digital protection REB500, the harmonics being suppressed by Fourier filters. The differential current Idiff is calculated from the fundamental components of the currents Re(ILn ) + j Im(ILn ) conducted by the feeders and the bus-tie breakers. Idiff =
N n=1
[Re (ILn )] + j [Im (ILn )]

n=1
per protection zone
Restraint current The stability factor k is derived from the restraint current Irstnt which is the sum of the currents of the various feeders. The following is an example for the determination of the restraint current Irstnt for phase L{L1, L2 L3}:
Irstnt =
N n=1
Re(ILn ) + j Im(ILn )
per protection zone
The stability factor k thus becomes:

N
k=
Idiff = Irstnt
n=1
[Re(ILn )] + j [Im(ILn )]
n=1 N n=1
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
per protection zone
where k stability factor
ILn N
fundamental component after the Fourier filter in phase L of feeder n total number of feeders and bus-tie breakers per protection zone
3-44
The scheme detects and internal fault on the busbar when the stability factor k exceeds the setting (typically 0.80) and the differential current Idiff is greater than the setting for the restraint current IKmin. The differential current in normal operation or during a through-fault is close to zero. By including the restraint current in the denominator the range for the stability factor k becomes 0 k 1. Simplified example:
I k = diff = Irstnt
n=1
n=1 N n=1
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
I1 = 5 kA
I2 = 5 kA I3 = 10 kA
k= 5 + 5 10 5 + 5 + 10 =0
Figure 3.26
Through-fault
I k = diff = Irstnt
n=1
n=1 N n=1
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
I1 = 5 kA
I2 = 5 kA
I3 = 0 kA
k=
5+5+0 5 + 5 + 0
=1
Figure 3.27
Internal fault
I k = diff = Irstnt
n=1
n=1 N n=1
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
I 1 + I2 I3
I1 = 5 kA
I2 = 5 kA I3 = -2 kA
k= 5+52 5 + 5 + 2 = 0.67
Idiff
Figure 3.28
Through-fault with c.t. saturation
Evaluation by the restrained amplitude comparison function is divided between the bay units and the central unit. Every bay unit continuously monitors the currents of its feeder, performs the Fourier filter function and transfers the corresponding values to the central unit at intervals of 8 ms. The central unit adds the
3-45
currents received from the bay units and monitors the resulting differential current. High through-fault currents can cause one or more c.ts to saturate and could give rise to a false differential current which, if no precautions were taken against it, might be interpreted as an internal fault. In REB500, the current signals are pre-processed by a maximum prolongation function patented by the supplier, and this maintains protection stability and discrimination in the presence of c.t. saturation. The principle involves detecting and holding the maximum amplitude in the sampling window. The phase-angle and amplitude of the fundamental component at the output of the Fourier filter are corrected by the maximal prolongation function such that a close approximation to the phase and amplitude of the unsaturated fundamental is obtained.
60 IN 40 I 20 0 -20 -40 0 10 20 ta 30 th to 40 ms t
Undistorted current signal (main c.t. primary)

Distorted current signal (main c.t. secondary) current signal
Corrected current signal
Figure 3.29
Maximum prolongation to compensate c.t. saturation
The time t0 is the interval between the zero-crossing preceding the maximum amplitude and the end of the prolongation of the maximum amplitude. This time is 12.5 ms in a 50 Hz system and 10.4 ms in a 60 Hz system. The rise time between the preceding zero-crossing and the maximum amplitude sample is designated ta. The difference between t0 and ta is the time th and equals how long the maximum amplitude is prolonged. The higher ta, the shorter the maximum amplitude is prolonged.
3-46
3.3.2.2.
Phase comparison
High stability in the presence of severe c.t. saturation is characteristic of busbar protection schemes that compare the phaseangles of the currents. This still applies when re-energising a system and adding to the residual flux stored in the c.t. cores. It is for this reason that phase comparison was chosen as the principle for the second criterion of the REB500 busbar protection system. The function compares the phase-angles of the fundamental components of the feeder currents.
Case 1: external fault = 139 Diagram of busbar
12 = 139 I1 I2 I1 Im
I2 Re
Operating characteristic
180 Phase-shift
Case 2: internal fault = 40

Im
operates
74 max = 74 I1 I2 Re 12 = 40
internal fault
1 2
Case
Figure 3.30
Principle of the phase comparison function
Assuming an internal fault on a section of a busbar, the currents of all the feeders connected to it have the same phase-angle. In normal operation or during a through-fault, on the other hand, at least one of the currents is 180 out of phase with the others. The phase comparison function therefore compares the phaseangles of all the currents of each phase individually for each zone of protection. The phase difference for tripping is 0 to 74, i.e. if the phase-angles of all the feeder currents of a protection zone lie within a band of 74, the phase comparison function decides that there is an internal fault. The pick-up angle max of 74 is a fixed setting.
3-47
For proper operation, it is necessary to exclude feeders conducting very little or no current from the comparison to prevent noise generated by them or balancing currents during a fault from disturbing the measurement. A minimum current is therefore determined when engineering the scheme for a particular application below which a feeder is excluded from the phase comparison. Typical settings are 0.8 IN for the phase currents and 0.25 IN for the neutral current.
Tripping
Tripping only takes place if the differential current and the stability factor are both above their pick-up settings and the phase difference between the currents is less than setting.
Idiff > Idiff set

k= Idiff > k set Irestr
Trip
< set
Figure 3.31
3.3.2.3.
Busbar protection tripping logic
Differential current alarm
The differential current alarm is activated on the HMI of the central unit and signalled externally by the binary output 41815_Diff. current alarm, if a differential current lasting longer than the corresponding timer setting is detected. The alarm only resets when the spurious differential current has disappeared. According to the users wishes, the differential current alarm is configured to either completely block the protection, only block the zone concerned or simply give alarm and the protection remains in operation. Spurious differential currents can occur due to faults in the c.t. secondary circuits (short or open-circuit or reversed polarity).
3-48
3.3.2.4.
Neutral current alarm
The operation of the neutral current alarm depends on the different methods of grounding a power system:
System grounding Consequences for the protection
Solidly grounded Ungrounded Impedance grounded
Fault current IKmin to Ikmax All faults detected by the busbar protection. Capacitive fault current Ground faults detected by other protection devices. Limited ground fault current Ground faults detected by busbar protection (neutral current monitor) Only residual ground fault current Faults generally not detected, because the fault arc is extinguished.
Petersen coil
Table 3.7
Ground fault current for the different methods of power system grounding
Note: The neutral current alarm is only enabled for impedance grounded power systems and at the users specific request (see Section 11).
3-49
3.3.2.5.
Operating times
Depending on the ratio between the actual differential current Idiff and the setting IKmin, the system trips 20 to 28 ms after the incidence of a fault. The curve below shows typical operating times for different values of the quotient Idiff/IKmin.
Operating time max. 28 ms min. 20 ms
Idiff IK min Figure 3.32 Typical operating times of the REB500 busbar protection system
The total operating time is determined by a number of individual operating times as listed in the table below:
Time t Diagram Definition Time
t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7
t
Fault detection time (Idiff/IKmin = 10) Polling dialogue (1 bus cycle) Bay unit preparations Transfer and processing by the CU Trip signal enable in the BU Operation of the protection trip relay Safety margin
Total operating time
3 ms 0-(8) ms 4 ms 8 ms 1.5 ms 5 ms 0.4 ms

21.9 ms
Table 3.8
Times contributing to the total operating time
The individual functions contributing to the total operating time are partly in the central unit and partly in the bay units. A graphic representation of the operating time is given below. Note that the time from 21.9 to 29.9 ms is caused by the fact that the central unit processes cyclically, i.e. if a fault occurs at the end of a
3-50
processing cycle, the waiting time until the start of the next processing cycle is only short, but if it occurs near the beginning of a cycle, the waiting time until it can be processed is relatively long.
t =21.9 - 29.9 ms 4 ms 4 ms Central unit t4=8 ms
IDiff =10 IKmin
Bay unit t2=8 ms t1=3 ms t3=4 ms t6=5 ms t5=1.5 ms t7=0.4 ms
Start of fault
Protection trip
HEST 005033 C
Figure 3.33
3.3.2.6.
Contributions of the central and bay units to the total operating time
Enabling the tripping command
As mentioned previously, the principle of the busbar protection is based on the measurement of three criteria: current amplitude comparison, a stability factor and a directional (phase) comparison. Tripping of the zone concerned can only take place when all three criteria are fulfilled at the same time. In exceptional cases, it may be necessary to add an enabling criterion before tripping is permitted. Two examples of such situations are:
The specification for the station stipulates that only those circuit-breakers of a zone should be tripped that are actually conducting current and those that are not contributing to the fault current should not. This response can be obtained by adding an overcurrent enabling criterion to each of the bay units (see Section 11.6.3 Overcurrent check feature for enabling the tripping command).
In stations where the maximum load current of certain feeders exceeds the minimum fault current (e.g. ground faults in impedance grounded systems), a spurious differential current due to
3-51
an open-circuit c.t. can occur which is higher than the amplitude comparison setting. In this case, the internal REB500 low voltage check feature or an external input (external undervoltage relay) can be configured as an enabling criterion for each zone (see Section 11.6.1 Lowvoltage check for enabling tripping and also the following paragraph External enabling signal).
External enabling signal
An external enabling signal can be configured for either a bay unit or a busbar zone. The signals 11605_External release Trip and 31805_External release BB zone are provided for this purpose for the bay unit and bus zone respectively (see Section 3.3.3. ITT (intertripping)).
3.3.3. ITT (intertripping)
REB500 includes an intertripping function which performs two main tasks:
Maintains an image of the busbar layout and assigns the analogue measurements to the protection zones: Slow part (approx. every 128 ms) General assignment of feeders to protection zones (according to the isolator positions) The connection of protection zones via isolators and detection of the circuit-breaker positions Fast part (approx. every 8 ms) Detection of advanced circuit-breaker closing commands (bus-tie breakers, end zone faults) Assignment of analogue measurements to protection zones
Tripping logic (generation of tripping commands for each zone for the following protection functions): External trip Busbar protection (of the faulted zone) End zone protection (the protection zone in which the end zone fault is detected) Breaker failure protection (the protection zone in which the defective circuit-breaker is detected)
3-52
3.3.3.1.
Tripping enabling signals (external enabling signals and low-voltage check function)
Busbar image
The busbar image is based on a topological principle, i.e. REB500 only includes topological items that are necessary from the point of view of protection. It starts with a busbar section and checks all its electrical connections and constructs a protection zone bounded by the following items:

circuit-breaker/c.t. pairs bus-tie breakers c.t./feeder pairs feeder
This procedure is repeated until all the section of the busbar have been determined. Topological items are:

busbars isolators and longitudinal isolators circuit-breakers c.ts bus-tie breaker c.ts bus-tie breakers feeders connections
3-53
Figure 3.34
Example of double busbars with longitudinal isolators
In order to determine in which section of the busbars a differential current has occurred, the protection has to have an image of the actual busbar configuration at the time. Therefore auxiliary contacts on the isolators and bus-tie breakers signal to the protection whether the respective item is open or closed. Using a configuration tool when engineering the system, a database file called the configuration file is created in which the layout of the specific station is stored.
3-54
Figure 3.35
Station diagram used by REB500
The following complex example illustrates the possibilities and advantages of busbar images and intertripping logics based on the topological principle.
Example for a 1 breaker scheme
Diameter
A
Q01 T1 a
D
Q02 T2 a b b T3 Q03 c
Feeder 2
HEST 005035 C
c c
Feeder 1
Figure 3.36
Protection zones in 1 breaker scheme
T zone configurations
a b T5 c Variante 1 c Variante 2 a b Q6 c Variante 3 a b
Figure 3.37
Alternative T zone configurations

3-55
The busbar protection always detects faults in the two main zones A and D, but if REB500 is configured solely as a busbar protection, its busbar image will not model the T zones and looks upon the scheme as two single busbars (A and D). The T zone configurations of Versions 2 and 3 are, however, an exception: Version 2: Assuming there is a c.t. T5 on the line side, which is, together with the centre c.t. T3, included in the busbar image (i.e. connected to bay units), the busbar protection protects the T zone discriminatively. Version 3: Providing the isolator Q6 on the line side and the centre c.t. T3 are included in the REB500 busbar image (i.e. connected to bay units), the T zones are protected as long as the isolator Q6 is open. REB500 automatically disables the measurement of the respective T zone when the isolator Q6 is closed, because the feeder current is not detected by the busbar protection and therefore no measurement can be made for the zone. This version is an ideal complement for a feeder protection scheme. When the isolator Q6 is closed, the feeder protection (line or transformer protection) also protects the T zone, and when the isolator Q6 is open, the T zone is protected by REB500. If REB500 also performs other protection functions such as breaker failure or end zone protection in addition to busbar protection, then the entire 1 breaker scheme has to be modelled by the busbar image regardless of T zone configuration (Versions 1 to 3). Even in cases when the busbar protection cannot protect the T zones (Version 1 and Version 3 with Q6 closed), they are included in the intertripping logics of the breaker failure and end zone protection functions. The remote tripping signals (tripping signals to the remote ends of feeders 1 and 2) are transferred via the T zone intertripping logics (21115_REMOTE TRIP). Conversely, tripping signals received from the remote stations (feeders 1 and 2) go to the bay units of the respective feeders (11105_External TRIP). An active External TRIP input causes REB500 to trip both circuit-breakers limiting the T zone and internally enables the breaker failure function for the T zone. The number of bay units required can be determined by a simple rule of thumb:
3-56
n bay units = whichever is the greater of the total number of circuit-breakers or the total number of c.ts included in the busbar image. The single-line diagram of a complete 1 breaker scheme is modelled in REB500 as follows:
Single-line diagram
Figure 3.38
Typical single-line diagram of a complete 1 breaker scheme in REB500
Figure 3.39 shows the assignment of REB500 bay units to the bays of a 1 breaker scheme. Where a feeder bay includes a c.t. that is used for the REB500 measurement (Version 2), each of the two feeders must has to have its own bay unit.
3-57
Single-line diagram
Feeder 1
Feeder 2
Figure 3.39
3.3.3.2.
Assignment of bay units in a 1 breaker scheme
Supervising isolator positions
Auxiliary contacts on the isolators and bus-tie breakers indicate the OPEN and CLOSED positions. They apply a voltage to their respective inputs on the busbar protection. The busbar replica is refreshed every 128 ms. An algorithm supervises the steady-state statuses of the isolator signal voltages and checks that only one of the two for each isolator is present, i.e. either the voltage from the CLOSED contact or the voltage from the OPEN contact. Alarm is given if either both signals are missing or both are present at the same time. Every isolator and bus-tie breaker must have a potentially-free normally-open and a potentially-free normally-closed contact, the N/O contact signalling that the isolator or bus-tie breaker is CLOSED and the N/C contact that it is OPEN. When closing an isolator or bus-tie breaker, the N/O contact must close a certain time (approx. 0.15 s) before the gap between the main contacts has reduced to the breakdown level.
3-58
When opening an isolator or bus-tie breaker, the N/O contact must not open before the gap between the main contacts exceeds the breakdown level so that an arc cannot be ignited. Should this not be the case, i.e. the N/O contact signals NOT CLOSED before the voltage withstand between the main contacts has been established, then on no account may the N/C contact signal that the main contact is OPEN before the main contacts reach their voltage withstand.
End position: Isolator/bus-tie breaker open End position: Isolator/bus-tie breaker closed
Isolator/bus-tie breaker closing Isolator/bus-tie breaker opening Isolator/bus-tie breaker main contact Flashover gap N/O aux.contact signalling main contact CLOSED N/O aux.contact signalling main contact OPEN
Aux. contact must be closed Aux. contact may be closed Aux. contact must be open
HEST 005036 C
Figure 3.40
Switching sequence of isolator/bus-tie breaker main and auxiliary contacts
The protection system checks that only one signal is present (either CLOSED or OPEN) and gives alarm should this not be the case. In the event of an isolator alarm, there are two possible blocking modes that can be configured:

Blocking of the entire protection system Discriminative blocking of just the zone concerned
Due to the differing operating times of the auxiliary contacts, the signals applied to the busbar image while an isolator is moving may be briefly incorrect. The supervision function should not therefore give alarm while an isolator is in motion and has to be delayed. The protection system interprets the isolator and bustie breaker position signals as follows:
3-59
Isolator/bus-tie breaker CLOSED contact
Isolator/bus-tie breaker OPEN contact
Isolator/bus-tie position in busbar replica
open
open
Last position stored + Isolator alarm after delay + No switching permitted OPEN CLOSED CLOSED + Isolator alarm after delay + No switching permitted
open closed closed
closed open closed
Table 3.9
Interpretation of the isolator/bus-tie breaker auxiliary contacts by the protection system
After the set time delay, operation of the alarm is signalled on the local control unit and by the output signal Isolator alarm. If the alarm was generated by an isolator or bus-tie breaker that at the time designates the limit of a protection zone, the signal No switching permitted is also set. This signal is not set, however, if the isolator or bus-tie breaker concerned is not critical for determining the limit of a protection zone. Figure 3.41 shows an example of a bus-tie breaker which can be switched without taking special precautions, because all the isolators Q1, Q2, Q10 and Q20 are open and the bus-tie breaker Q0 is not assigned to a protection zone and therefore of no consequence for the busbar image.
Q11 Q21
Q2
Q1 Q0
Q20 Q10
Figure 3.41
Bus-tie breaker of no consequence for the busbar image when all the isolators are open
3-60
Isolator alarm and No switching permitted
Figure 3.42 shows a timing diagram for the response of the isolator alarm and for inhibiting switching. The signal Isolator alarm is reset by applying a signal to the Reset isolator alarm input on the central unit and tripping can once again take place. If the Isolator alarm signal is not reset, it resets on its own as soon as all the isolators are in valid positions. The possibility of acknowledging an existing isolator alarm was included for feeders undergoing maintenance (i.e. inactive feeders). While a feeder is being maintained, it can occur that the supply to the auxiliary contacts on the isolators is interrupted and the appropriate signals are not applied to the REB500 busbar image. No attention need be paid to the resulting isolator alarm because a feeder that is being maintained cannot be assigned to an active protection zone.
Caution: Operating isolators while the No switching permitted signal is active is not recommended. On no account may an isolator in the busbar section concerned by operated. The positions of the isolators that were valid last are stored and the current of a feeder that was subsequently switched would remain assigned to the original protection zone. This may cause a differential current alarm and, if the isolator alarm is not configured just to block the protection, also false tripping.
The No switching permitted signal is only reset when all the isolators are in valid positions.
3-61
Delay Busbar image supervision Isolator alarm No switching permitted Protection blocked (if selected) Isolator alarm acknowledge defined undefined defined
Figure 3.42
Response of the Isolator alarm and No switching permitted signals
Blocking by the differential current or isolator alarms
What happens in the event of a differential or an isolator alarm has to be determined when engineering the scheme. By appropriately setting parameters the protection can be disabled or enabled when an alarm occurs. What is disabled and what enabled can be set independently for differential and isolator alarms. The corresponding logics are explained at the end of this section. The isolator alarm blocks the intertripping logic and therefore intertripping by the busbar, time-overcurrent and breaker failure protections etc., is no longer possible. A differential current alarm only blocks the busbar protection; the other protection functions can still initiate intertripping.
Notes on isolators and circuit-breakers
If an isolator or circuit-breaker is not assigned to a binary input (but is included in the REB500 single-line diagram), the protection assumes it to be closed. This only applies to unmasked bays. In the case of feeders with the c.ts on the line side of the circuitbreaker, the assignment of the feeder current in the protection is dependent on whether the circuit-breaker is open or not, but if the c.ts are on the busbar side, the position of the circuitbreaker is of no consequence for the busbar protection. In combined busbar and breaker failure protection systems the positions of the feeder circuit-breakers are not taken into account, but are assumed to be always closed. Their positions and also the generation of closing commands have to be taken into account, however, in systems including an end zone protection.
3-62
3.3.4. 3.3.4.1.
Bus-tie breaker functions Bus-tie breaker Excluding the bus-tie breaker measurement
The measurement of the current flowing through the bus-tie breaker has to be excluded from the evaluation in certain situations, e.g. in order to detect and trip a fault between the c.ts and the bus-tie breaker when it is open. The reclaim timer is started when the busbar protection has tripped or the OPEN auxiliary contact on the bus-tie breaker is closed and there is no close command. This ensures that when the bus-tie breaker is tripped, any arcing or re-ignition is correctly measured by the protection before the busbar image is rearranged to take account of the open bus-tie breaker. The bus-tie breaker is excluded from the measurement after the reclaim time. In order to be prepared for closing the breaker onto an existing fault (e.g. closed grounding isolator), the bus-tie breaker measurement has to be reinstated before the breaker is actually closed. To this end, the bus-tie breaker close command goes to the busbar protection as well and forces the busbar image into the configuration as if the bus-tie breaker were already closed. As soon as the breaker is closed, this function is performed by the CLOSED auxiliary contact on the bus-tie breaker. The close command to the bus-tie breaker must be maintained until the auxiliary contact on the breaker has definitely closed (overlaps with the auxiliary contact that is opening). The second case when the bus-tie measurement has to be excluded is when the bus-tie breaker connecting two sections of busbar is bypassed by isolators. The exclusion in this case is performed by a logic on the basis of the relative positions of the bus-tie breaker and the corresponding isolators.
3-63
HEST 985033 C
Figure 3.43
Bus-tie breaker bridged by isolators
The exclusion of the bus-tie breaker measurement relies on the fact that the positions of the auxiliary contacts reflect the true position of the bus-tie breaker. This is not always the case unless the auxiliary contacts are mechanically coupled to the circuit-breaker.
Bus-tie breaker with one set of c.ts
C.ts Bus zone I Protection zone I
Bus-tie breaker Bus zone II Protection zone II

HEST 985 001 FL
Figure 3.44
Bus-tie breaker (closed) and one set of c.ts
Where a bus-tie breaker is equipped with only one set of c.ts, it has to be used for the measurement of the bus zones on both sides of the bus-tie breaker (the c.ts are assigned to the zones automatically when the system is configured). Faults in bus zone II are tripped selectively and without delay by protection zone II and faults in bus zone I to the left of the c.ts in Figure 3.44, i.e. in protection zone I, are tripped selectively and without delay by protection zone I. For a fault between the c.ts and the bus-tie breaker (i.e. in bus zone I), zone II trips first without delay (including the bus-tie breaker) although zone II is the healthy zone. Zone I trips to finally clear the fault after the reclaim time. The reclaim time must be set longer than the maximum tripping time (including arc extinction time) of the bus-tie breaker.
3-64
Cancelling the exclusion of the bus-tie breaker with one set of c.ts
When a bus-tie breaker is only equipped with one set of c.ts, the exclusion of the bus-tie breaker from the measurement applies for both zones. Station layouts, however, are possible in which a switchgear bay is sometimes used as a bus-tie breaker and sometimes as a feeder circuit-breaker.
Figure 3.45
Example of a bus-tie breaker that can also be used as a feeder circuit-breaker
Q1, Q0 and Q20 closed Q2 and Q7 open bus-tie breaker Q1 or Q2, Q0 and Q7 closed Q20 open feeder circuit-breaker In such cases, the exclusion of the bus-tie breaker measurement is selectively disabled for one of the two protection zones while engineering the system, i.e. the measurement of the bus-tie breaker remains active.
3-65
Bus-tie breaker with two sets of c.ts

Bus-tie breaker C.ts 1 Bus zone I Protection zone I Protection zone II
HEST 985 002 FL
C.ts 2 Bus zone II
Figure 3.46
Bus-tie breaker (closed) and two sets of c.ts
If there are c.ts on both sides of the bus-tie breaker, they are assigned to the busbar zones as shown in Figure 3.46, i.e. c.ts 2 are the limit of protection zone I and c.ts 1 the limit of protection zone II. A bay unit is required for each set of c.ts. It is not absolutely essential to use both sets of c.ts and if only one is used, the arrangement is as described above for bus-tie breakers with one set of c.ts. Faults between the sets of c.ts trip both faulted and healthy bus zones without delay. When the bus-tie breaker is open, the c.ts are assigned to none of the zones and the protection zones extend to the bus-tie breaker. Thus a fault between the c.ts and the bus-tie breaker is detected and tripped in the correct zone.
Bus-tie breaker C.ts 1 Bus zone I Protection zone I C.ts 2 Bus zone II Protection zone II
HEST 985 003 FL
Figure 3.47
Bus-tie breaker (open) and two sets of c.ts
3-66
3.3.5.
REB500 system signals
R EB5 00 System
General Function GEN
Disturbance recorder Busbar Protection BBP Time-overcurrent O/C End Zone Protection EFP Low-voltage Check Feature UV DR
Breaker Failure Protection BFP
CB Pole Discrepancy Protection CBPD
Principle of the REB500 System Signals

ITT system, selfsupervision, operation Busbar protection Options GEN BBP BFP EFP O/C CBPD DR UV
HEST 005038 C
Figure 3.48
Principle of the REB500 system signals
3-67
Device_Function _Input/Output
Caption
OCDT
CBPD
SYS
BBP
BFP
EFP
11105_External TRIP 11110_External TRIP BB zone 11205_Block all 11210_Block output relays 11215_Ext. Measurement disturbed 11505_Close command CB 11510_Supervision aux. Voltage_1 11515_Supervision aux. Voltage_2 11520_Supervision aux. Voltage_3 11525_Supervision aux. Voltage_4 11530_Circuit breaker/isolator position 11530_Circuit breaker-off 11530_Circuit breaker-on 11530_Isolator-off 11530_Isolator-on 11605_External release Trip 11610_External reset 11615_Inspection_1-Off 11620_Inspection_1-On 11625_Inspection_2-Off 11630_Inspection_2-On 11635_Inspection_3-Off 11640_Inspection_3-On 11645_Inspection_4-Off 11650_Inspection_4-On 11655_Maintenance-Off 11660_Maintenance-On 1765_General Start DR 13205_Block BFP 13605_Trip transferred 13705_External Start BFP 13710_Start BFP L1_1 13715_Start BFP L1_2 13720_Start BFP L2_1 13725_Start BFP L2_2 13730_Start BFP L3_1 13735_Start BFP L3_2 13740_Start BFP L1L2L3_1 13745_Start BFP L1L2L3_2 13750_Start BFP L1L2L3_3 13755_Start BFP L1L2L3_4 13760_Start BFP L1L2L3_5 13765_Start BFP L1L2L3_6 14205_Block EFP 15210_Block OCDT
BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_BBP_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_SYS_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_BFP_E BU_EFP_E BU_OCDT_E
Table 3.10
REB500 signal list, Part 1
3-68
DR
UV
Device_Function _Input/Output
Caption
OCDT
SYS
BBP
PDF
BFP
EFP
16705_Start DR_1 16710_Start DR_2 16715_Start DR_3 16720_Start DR_4 16725_Start DR_5 16730_Start DR_6 16735_Start DR_7 16740_Start DR_8 16745_Start DR_9 16750_Start DR_10 17205_Block PDF 17210_Start PDF 18205_Fuse failure superv. UV 21105_EXTERNAL TRIP 21110_TRIP 21305_Auslsung 21305_Trip 21410_Output relays blocked 21805_In service 21810_Loss of supply voltage 21815_Inspection/m aintenance 21115_Rem ote TRIP 22405_BBP blocked 23105_BFP TRIP 23110_BFP rem ote TRIP 23305_BFP trip t1 23310_BFP trip t2 23315_BFP trip L1 23320_BFP trip L2 23325_BFP trip L3 23330_Trip transferred 23335_Trip by BFP 23405_BFP blocked 24105_EFP rem ote TRIP 24305_EFP trip 24405_EFP blocked 25105_OCDT TRIP 25305_OCDT Trip 25405_OCDT blocked 26805_DR ready 26810_DR m em ory full 26815_DR recording 26820_DR record available 27105_PDF TRIP 27305_PDF Trip 27405_PDF blocked 28805_UV undervoltage
BU_DR_E BU_DR_E BU_DR_E BU_DR_E BU_DR_E BU_DR_E BU_DR_E BU_DR_E BU_DR_E BU_DR_E BU_PDF_E BU_PDF_E BU_LV_E BU_SYS_A BU_SYS_A BU_SYS_A BU_SYS_A BU_SYS_A BU_SYS_A BU_SYS_A BU_SYS_A BU_SYS_A BU_SSS_A BU_BFP_A BU_BFP_A BU_BFP_A BU_BFP_A BU_BFP_A BU_BFP_A BU_BFP_A BU_BFP_A BU_BFP_A BU_BFP_A BU_EFP_A BU_EFP_A BU_EFP_A BU_OCDT_A BU_OCDT_A BU_OCDT_A BU_DR_A BU_DR_A BU_DR_A BU_DR_A BU_PDF_A BU_PDF_A BU_PDF_A BU_LV_A
Table 3.11
3-69
UV
DR
Device_Functio n_Input/Output
Caption
OCDT
SYS
BBP
PDF
BFP
EFP
31505_Accept bus image alarm 31805_External release BB zone 31810_External reset 31815_Ext. Superv. In service_1 31820_Ext. Superv. In service_2 31825_Time synchronisation 31105_External TRIP BB zone 31205_Block all 31210_Block output relays 31215_Block IEC master direction 32205_Block BBP 33210_Block BFP 34215_Block EFP 35220_Block OCDT 36705_General tart DR 37205_Block PDF 41305_Trip BB zone 41310_Trip transferred 41405_All blocked 4410_Output relays blocked 41505_Isolator alarm 41805_Alarm 41810_In service 41815_Diff. Current alarm 41820_Loss of supply voltage 41825_Inspection/maintenance 41830_Switch inhibit 41835_Test generator active 42305_BBP trip 42310_BBP trip L0 42315_BBP trip L1 42320_BBP trip L2 42325_BBP trip L3 42405_BBP blocked 43305_BFP trip t1 43310_BFP trip t12 43405_BFP blocked 44305_EFP trip 44405_EFP blocked 45305_OCDT trip 45405_OCDT blocked 45805_OCDT start 47305_PDF trip 47405_PDF blocked 48805_UV undervoltage
CU_SYS_E CU_SYS_E CU_SYS_E CU_SYS_E CU_SYS_E CU_SYS_E CU_SYS_E CU_SYS_E CU_SYS_E CU_SYS_E CU_BBP_E CU_BFP_E CU_EFP_E CU_OCDT_E CU_DR_E CU_PDF_E CU_SYS_A CU_SYS_A CU_SYS_A CU_SYS_A CU_SYS_A CU_SYS_A CU_SYS_A CU_SYS_A CU_SYS_A CU_SYS_A CU_SYS_A CU_SYS_A CU_BBP_A CU_BBP_A CU_BBP_A CU_BBP_A CU_BBP_A CU_BBP_A CU_BFP_A CU_BFP_A CU_BFP_A CU_EFP_A CU_EFP_A CU_OCDT_A CU_OCDT_A CU_OCDT_A CU_PDF_A CU_PDF_A CU_LV_A
Table 3.12
Note: A complete list of all the signals and descriptions of their functions is included in Section 12 Appendices.
3-70
UV
DR
3.3.6.
REB500 blocking scheme
Some central and bay unit input signals can directly influence output signals. The REB500 blocking scheme is illustrated in the following diagram:
Bay Unit
13205_Block BFP BFP
23405_BFP blocked 23335_Trip by BFP 23105_BFP Trip 23110_BFP remote TRIP
24405_EFP blocked 14205_Block EFP
EFP
24105_EFP remote TRIP
25405_OCDT blocked 15210_Block OCDT OCDT
25105_OCDT TRIP
27405_PDF blocked 17205_Block PDF
PDF
27105_PDF TRIP
22405_BBP blocked
I > Imin
21110_TRIP
11205_Block all
BBP
11105_External TRIP 21105_EXTERNAL TRIP
33210_Block BFP 34215_Block EFP 35220_Block OCDT 32205_Block BBP 31205_Block all
BBP
intertripping
currents
ITT
Central Unit
HEST 985017 C
Figure 3.49
Blocking signals
Note: When signal 31210_Block output relays is active, the statuses of the protection function outputs remain fixed.
3-71
Legend for Figure 3.49 Blocking signals: 1) The default value is 1 if the input or the function has not been configured yet. 2) The output is blocked when the signal 31210_Block output relays is active and signal 2) was configured using REBWIN to block. 3) Blocked by either the isolator or differential current alarms (providing they were correspondingly configured using REBWIN). 4) Protection function deactivated. 5) Transfer tripping signal issued when the c.ts are on the line side. Busbar intertripped when the c.ts are on the busbar side. 6) Detected automatically be the software, e.g. when the circuit-breaker is bypassed. The influences of input signals on outputs are given in Figure 3.50 Central unit blocking scheme and Figure 3.51 Bay unit blocking scheme. Legend for Figure 3.50 and Figure 3.51:
B E F K M P
Signal does not change providing it has been configured to block. Signal does not change. Signal enable (interlocking of enabling and tripping signals. Blocking providing this was configured via REBWIN. Signal (indication) Partial blocking, i.e. The busbar protection function does not generate signals or tripping commands. Blocking has no influence on other functions (BFP, EFP) that act on this output. The signal is set. The signal is either reset and blocked or just blocked providing it was not set at the time of blocking.
S Z
3-72
Input
31805_External release BB zone
Output
Alarms Enable CU BU CU
11605_External release Trip
Blocking inputs BU
11210_Block output relays
CU
CU
41815_Diff. current alarm
41505_Isolator alarm
15210_Block OCDT
35220_Block OCDT
17205_Block PDF
37205_Block PDF
12205_Block BBP
32205_Block BBP
13205_Block BFP
14205_Block EFP
33210_Block BFP
34215_Block EFP
11205_Block all
31205_Block all
E B B S B B B B B E B B B B E B E B E B E B E B S B Z B Z B S S B Z B S S B Z B S S B Z B Z B S S B B
41305_Trip BB zone 41310_Trip transferred 41405_All blocked 41410_Output relays blocked
41505_Isolator alarm 41805_Alarm 41810_In service
E S E E E E E S Z Z S Z S Z S Z Z S
41815_Diff. current alarm 41825_Inspection/maintenance 41830_Switch inhibit 41835_Test generator active
F F F F F K K F F F F F F F F F F
42305_BBP trip 42310_Trip L0 42315_Trip L1 42320_Trip L2 42325_Trip L3 42405_BBP blocked 43305_BFP Trip t1 43310_BFP Trip t2 43405_BFP blocked 44305_EFP Trip 44405_EFP blocked 45305_OCDT Trip 45405_OCDT blocked 45805_OCDT start 47305_PDF trip 47405_PDF blocked 48805_UV undervoltage
Figure 3.50
Central unit blocking scheme
3-73
Input
Blocking inputs BU CU Alarms Enable CU BU CU
31805_External release BB zone 11605_External release Trip
Output
BU
41815_Diff. current alarm
41505_Isolator alarm
15210_Block OCDT
35220_Block OCDT
17205_Block PDF
37205_Block PDF
12205_Block BBP
32205_Block BBP
13205_Block BFP
14205_Block EFP
33210_Block BFP
34215_Block EFP
11205_Block all
31205_Block all
Z Z Z Z S
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z S Z Z S Z Z S
Z Z S
B B B B B S B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
Z Z Z Z S
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z S Z Z S Z Z S
S Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z S Z Z S Z Z S
Z Z Z Z S S
B B B B B S B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
21105_EXTERNAL TRIP
P P P
P F Z Z P F Z P F Z
21110_TRIP 21115_Remote TRIP 21305_Trip 21405_All blocked 21410_Output relays blocked 21805_In service 21815_Inspection/maintenance
S Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z S Z Z S Z Z S
22405_BBP blocked 23105_BFP TRIP 23110_BFP remote TRIP 23305_BFP trip t1 23310_BFP trip t2 23315_BFP trip L1 23320_BFP trip L2 23325_BFP trip L3 23330_Trip transferred 23335_Trip by BFP 23405_BFP blocked 24105_EFP remote TRIP 24305_EFP Trip 24405_EFP blocked 25105_OCDT TRIP 25305_OCDT trip 25405_OCDT blocked 26805_DR ready 26810_DR memory full 26815_DR recording 26820_DR record available
Z Z Z
27105_PDF TRIP 27305_PDF trip 27405_PDF blocked 28805_UV undervoltage
Figure 3.51
Bay unit blocking scheme
3-74
3.4. 3.4.1. 3.4.1.1.
Ancillary REB500 functions Ancillary function descriptions Event memory
The busbar protection includes an event memory for each individual unit (central unit and bay units) in which changes in the statuses of binary signal are recorded. The event memories have a capacity for 100 events in bay units and 1000 events in the central unit. The user can select whether the oldest event should be overwritten (ring register) or no further events recorded when the memory is full. A time stamp (date and time with an accuracy of 1 ms), a text defined using the operator program and a status (set or reset) are attached to every event. Individual texts can be entered for each status. Generally, one event is configured for every input and output, but events can also be assigned to opto-coupler inputs or relay outputs. When a PC running the REBWIN operator program is connected, the events can be uploaded from the protection to the PC. The events stored in the central unit can only be read when connected to the central unit and the events stored in bay units when connected to either the central unit or the respective bay unit. Events that are no longer needed in the PC can be deleted either individually or collectively in marked groups.
3.4.1.2. Test mode
Provision is made in the REBWIN operator program for switching the protection to the test mode. The test tool includes functions for setting up certain protection operating conditions for maintenance and commissioning purposes. For example, certain statuses can be impressed on the inputs and outputs (i.e. they can be set and reset via the operator program). This enables the output relays and the wiring to be checked or the busbar image to be changed to a different configuration. The tripping relays (excepting 42405_BBP blocked, 41835_Test generator active and 41810_In service) are automatically blocked when the test mode is activated, i.e. changes made to any output relays have no effect on the primary system. The operator program also permits the remaining output signals to be
3-75
blocked, all outputs to be enabled again and the changes made in the test mode to be cancelled. If a bay unit is switched off and back on again while it is in the test mode, the test mode is no longer active, i.e. the outputs are no longer blocked.
3.4.1.3. Installation mode
Provision is made in the operator program for switching the protection to the installation mode. This is necessary for setting up a new protection system.
3.4.1.4. Masking and unmasking devices
Both individual items of plant (circuit-breakers, isolators or c.ts) and complete bays can be masked or unmasked (activated or deactivated). When masked, they can be set to the status Masked open or Masked closed.
Feeder 1
Bus-tie breaker
Feeder 2
Feeder 3
Figure 3.52
Example of engineering future development in advance and provisionally masking the corresponding items of plant
Masking individual items of plant: Bus-tie breaker Q2: Masked open Q10 Q1 Q20 Q11 Q21 Masked open Masked bypassed Masked bypassed Masked bypassed Masked bypassed
3-76
Masked bays: Feeder 2: Masked all items open A defective bay or bay unit that is removed from operation can also be masked in the configuration. Once an engineered and masked bay has actually been built and commissioned, it has to be unmasked in the protection using the operator program. Every time an item is masked or unmasked, the system database changes and therefore the one in the protection has to be deleted and the changed one downloaded to it. The system then has to be started in the installation mode.
Caution: Masking items of plant or complete bays influences the REB500 busbar image. Always check after making such changes that the REB500 busbar image agrees with the actual status of the primary system. It is advisable to consult the supplier before carrying out changes of this kind.
3.4.1.5.
Inspection and maintenance
During the routine inspection of a bay, the protection and control devices and the local protection functions in the REB500 bay unit are also generally checked. Opening the isolators of a bay undergoing maintenance avoids any risk of test trips in the bay from intertripping other bay units or an injection current from affecting the differential current measurement of the busbar protection. It may also be the case that the bay under test is not generating any isolator position signals or the signals are disconnected because engineers are working on them. To prevent REB500 from operating with an incorrect busbar image in such situations, provision is made for applying a maintenance signal to a bay unit which enables one or several isolators or bus-tie breakers to be set to OPEN. When all the isolators belonging to a bay are set to OPEN, the bay current is not assigned to a protection zone and the current of the corresponding feeder is not included when the busbar protection algorithm is executed.
3-77
A REB500 bay unit has four binary inputs for controlling the inspection mode. These are assigned when engineering the system to particular isolators or bus-tie breakers. When a inspection input is set, the output signals 21815_Maintenance on the bay unit concerned and 41825_Maintenance on the central unit signal the maintenance status.
Caution: The maintenance input on a bay unit may only be activated after the bay has been completely isolated from the primary system, i.e. the respective isolators are in the OPEN position. The use of a key-switch in series with the maintenance signal is recommended.
The input signal 11660_Maintenance-On prevents the isolator positions from changing, signals the status to the central unit and suppresses the Isolator alarm and No switching permitted signals. The protection uses the last set of valid isolator positions and remains active. A busbar protection trip to the circuitbreaker concerned will still trip it in spite of it being in the maintenance mode.
Feeder
Figure 3.53
Bay configuration when a maintenance signal is being applied
The REB500 maintenance signal forces isolators Q1, Q2, Q0 and Q6 into the OPEN position, but keeps isolator Q7 closed while the bay is being maintained to supply the feeder via an auxiliary busbar.
3-78
Caution: If the bay unit is switched off or reset in this situation, the information pertaining to the isolator positions is lost and the actual positions are used when it starts up again. This is signalled by the isolator alarm until the maintenance signal is removed. Thus when the maintenance signal is active, the isolator alarm means that the isolator positions may have changed.
3.4.1.6.
Time synchronisation
The clocks in the various units are synchronised by what is referred to as minute impulse. The corresponding impulse can be configured on the BIO of the central unit as a binary input. Each minute impulse (31825_Time synchronization signal) increments the time by a minute. The accuracy of the time function is not monitored. Should the impulses fail, the internal clock continues to run. When the impulses are restored, however, the first impulse increments the time as it was prior to the failure of the impulses by one minute. This means that the internal time can jump backwards. The time therefore has to be readjusted after a failure. On the other hand, this system permits, for example, the change from standard to summer time to be made by controlling the time synchronisation function, 60 impulses adjusting the clocks by one hour.
Setting the time
The time is set using REBWIN. The first minute impulse after adjustment rounds the time to the next full minute.
Example
Time set at: Time at the next impulse:
12 h 37 min 13 s 12 h 38 min 00 s
The time can be set at any time using REBWIN. The time between two setting impulses must be at least one second and their pulsewidth at least 20 ms for them to be registered as two impulses. The system only supports minute impulses. If an interbay bus interface (LON or IEC 60870-5-103) is in use, the master (SCS/SMS) takes over the job of synchronising the
3-79
clocks in the bay units via the bus (see Section 11.8. Interbay bus (IBB) connection).
3.4.1.7. Options
All the bay units in the standard version of REB500 include a disturbance recorder which records the current measurements and up to 32 binary inputs and outputs during a period of 1.5 s. The central unit and optionally the bay units can be fitted with a local control unit (HMI) with LEDs for alarm, tripping and standby, a four-line text LCD and buttons for communicating with the system. For greater convenience and flexibility, a PC running the REBWIN operator program can be connected to an optical interface. The current measurements can also be used for other protection functions. Optional ancillaries for the REB500 system are a breaker failure protection (BFP), an end zone fault protection (EFP), a time-overcurrent function (OCDT) and a circuit-breaker pole discrimination function (PDF). There are also additional disturbance recorder functions (including power system voltage measurement) which are optionally available. It is possible to apply the REB500 system without the basic busbar protection function in cases where only the ancillary functions are required (e.g. an independent breaker failure or end zone fault protection). Details of the various options are given in Section 11.
3.5. 3.5.1. Technical specification Data Sheet
The technical data and wiring diagrams are contained in the Data Sheet for the REB500 system included at the end of this section.
3-80
Numerical busbar and breaker-failure protection
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 1 Issued: March 2000 Changed since: October 1999 Data subject to change without notice
REB500 busbar protection for distributed installation
Main features
High reliability due to two independent measurement criteria: - stabilized differential current algorithm - directional current comparison algorithm Phase-by-phase measurement Reduced c.t. performance requirements High through-fault stability even in case of c.t. saturation Full solid-state busbar replica No switching of c.t. circuits and therefore no check zone required One version for c.ts of 1 and 5 A One version for all battery voltages between 48 and 250 V Short tripping time regardless of the size or configuration of the station Centralized layout: Installation of hardware in one or several cubicles Distributed layout: Bay units distributed and - in the case of location close to the feeders - with short connections to c.t's, isolators, circuit breakers, etc. Connections between bay units and central unit by fibre optic cables - maximum permissible length 1200 m - for distributed and centralized layout Fibre optic connections mean interferenceproof data transfer even close to HV power cables
Replacement of existing busbar protection schemes can be accomplished without restrictions (centralized layout). In the case of substation extensions e.g. by a mixture of centralized and distributed layout. Easily extensible Remote and external user-friendly human machine interface Full digital signal processing Self-supervision Integrated event recording Integrated disturbance recording for power system currents A minimum of spare parts needed due to standardization and a low number of varying units Options Breaker failure protection End-fault protection Definite time-overcurrent protection Disturbance recording for power system voltages Separate I0 measurement for impedancegrounded networks Communication with substation monitoring and control system (LON/IEC) Internal user-friendly human machine interface with display Redundant power supply for central units and/or bay units
ABB Power Automation
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 2
Application
The numerical busbar protection REB500 is designed for the high-speed, selective protection of MV, HV and EHV busbar installations at a rated frequency of 50 or 60 Hz. The structure of both hardware and software is modular enabling the protection to be easily configured to suit the layout of the primary system. The flexibility of the system enables all configurations of busbars from single busbars to quadruple busbars with transfer buses, ring busbars and 1 breaker schemes to be protected. The capacity is sufficient for up to 59 feeders (bay units) and a total of 32 busbar zones.
The numerical busbar protection REB500 detects all phase and ground faults in solidly grounded and resistive-grounded power systems and phase faults in ungrounded systems. The main c.ts supplying the currents to the busbar protection have to fulfil only modest performance requirements (see page 11). The protection operates discriminatively for all faults inside the zone of protection and remains reliably stable for all faults outside the zone of protection.
Table 1:
Main functions Busbar protection Breaker-failure protection End-fault protection Overcurrent protection Overcurrent check feature Low voltage check feature Neutral current detection I0 Pole discrepancy protection Event recording Disturbance recording (4 x I) Disturbance recording (4 x I, 4 x U) Communication interface Test generator for commissioning Isolator supervision Trip redirection Remote HMI * to be ordered for special applications only X X X X X X X X X Standard X X X X X X X Optional Special*
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 3
Installation
A REB500 busbar protection can be installed in one of three ways:

Distributed installation
In this case, the bay units (see Fig. 8 & 10) are installed in casings or cubicles in the individual switchgear bays distributed around the station and are connected to the central pro-
cessing unit by optical fibre cables. The central processing unit is normally in a centrally located cubicle or in the central relay room.
Fig. 1
Distributed layout
Centralized installation
19" mounting plates with up to three bay units each, and the central processing unit are mounted according to the size of the busbar system in one or more cubicles (see Fig. 9). A centralized installation is the ideal solution
for upgrading existing stations, since very little additional wiring is required and compared with older kinds of busbar protection, much more functionality can be packed into the same space.
Fig. 2
Centralized installation
Combined centralized and distributed installation
Basically, the only difference between a distributed and a centralized scheme is the mounting location of the bay units and therefore it is possible to mix the two philosophies.
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 4
System design
Bay unit (BU02)
The hardware structure is based on a closed, monolithic casing (see Fig. 14). Every bay unit has 16 binary inputs and 16 relay outputs. Where more binary and analogue inputs are needed, several bay units can be combined to form a feeder/bus coupler bay (e.g. a bus coupler bay with c.ts on both sides of the bus-tie breaker requires two bay units). A bay unit is the interface between the protection and the primary system process comprising the main c.ts, isolators and circuitbreaker and performs the associated data acquisition, pre-processing and control functions. It also provides the electrical insulation between the primary system and the internal electronics of the protection. The input transformer module contains the interposing c.ts for measuring phase and neutral currents with terminals for 1 A and 5 A. Additional interposing c.ts are not required, because any differences between the c.t. ratios are compensated by appropriately configuring the software of the respective bay units. If the option for recording voltage disturbances as well as current disturbances has been chosen, the bay unit is equipped additionally with four interposing v.ts.
In the analogue input and processing module, the analogue current signals are converted to digital signals at a sampling rate of 48 samples per period and then digitally preprocessed and filtered accordingly. The binary I/O module detects and processes the positions of isolators and bus couplers, blocking signals, starting signals, external resetting signals etc. The binary input channels operate according to a patented pulse modulation principle in a nominal range of 48 to 250 V DC. The application program provides facility for setting the threshold voltage of the binary inputs. A time stamp is attached to all the data such as currents, binary inputs, events and diagnostic information acquired by a bay unit. Process data are transferred at regular intervals from the bay units to the central processing unit via the process bus. The bay unit is provided with local intelligence, i.e. all backup protection (e.g. breaker failure, end fault, pole discrepancy) as well as the event recorder and disturbance recorder are bay-located functions. In the event of a failure of the central unit or an interruption of the optical fibre communication, the operation of the bay unit will continue and the backup protection scheme as well as the recorders (event and disturbance) will be available (stand-alone mode).
Bay Unit (BU02)

Optical interface
Local HMI
Central Unit (CU)

DC
DC DC
DC
Real-time Clock
SCS/SMS Interface
RS 232 Interface
Process-bus
CPU
Local HMI
CPU Module
C E
C E
DSP
DP Mem Binary in/output registers
CIM
A/D Filter
CPU Module
CPU Module
Filter
Starcoupler
Binary I/O
Starcoupler
Binary I/O
Electrical insulation
Fig. 3 Block diagram of a bay unit and a central unit
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 5
A software logic enables the input and output channels to be assigned to the various functions. All the binary output channels are equipped with fast-operating relays and can be used for either signalling or tripping purposes (see contact data in Table 4). The bay unit presents different mounting solutions: Without local HMI: ideal solution if convenient access to all information via the central unit or by an existing substation automation system is sufficient. With local HMI: ideal solution for standalone busbar protection and kiosk mounting (AIS), since all information is available in the bay. For the latter option it is possible to have the HMI either built in or connected via a flexible cable. See Fig. 14.
Additional plug-and-play functionality
cessors and star coupler modules are added for protection systems that include more than 9 bay units. For systems with more than 18 bay units, an additional casing or casings are required (without local HMI). One or two binary I/O modules can be connected to a central processing unit. The busbar replica is a purely software logic without any moving parts. The busbar protection zones are determined dynamically by the busbar replica logic.
Busbar protection
The protection algorithms are based on two well-proved measuring principles which have been applied successfully in earlier ABB lowimpedance busbar protection systems: a stabilized differential current measurement the determination of the phase relationship between the feeder currents (phase comparison) The algorithms process complex current vectors which are obtained by Fourier analysis and only contain the fundamental frequency component. Any DC component and harmonics are suppressed. The first measuring principle uses a stabilized differential current algorithm. The currents are evaluated individually for each of the phases and each section of busbar (protection zone).
k=1
Bay units can be added to an existing REB500 system in a simple way.
During the system start the bay unit requests its new address and the input can be made directly via its local HMI.
Central unit (CU)
The hardware structure is based on standard racks and only a few different module types for the control unit. The modules actually installed in a particular protection scheme depend on the size, complexity and functionality of the busbar system A parallel bus on a frontplane mother board establishes the interconnections between the modules in a rack. The modules are inserted from the rear. The central unit is the system manager, i.e. it configures the system, contains the busbar replica, assigns bays within the system, manages the sets of operating parameters, acts as process bus controller, assures synchronization of the system and controls communication with the station control system. The variables for the busbar protection function are derived dynamically from the process data provided by the bay units. The process data are transferred to the central processor via a starcoupler module. Up to 9 bay units can be connected to the first central processor and 10 to the others. Central pro-
Differential current ( | | )
in ip p Tr a re a
K setting = k st max
IK m in 0 0
Restraint area
Restraint current (||)
Fig. 4
Tripping characteristic of the stabilized differential current algorithm.
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 6
System design (contd)
In Fig. 4, the differential current is
Case 1: External fault == 144

Im
I Diff =
Busbar
I Ln
n =1
(1)
12== 144
I2 I1 Re
and the restraint current
Operating characteristic
180
Case 2: Internal fault = 36

Im
I Rest =
N n =1
I Ln
Phase-shift
(2)
74
Restraint area I1 I2
max = 74 Tripping area
Re
where N is the number of feeders. The following two conditions have to be accomplished for the detection of an internal fault:
0 Case 1 2
12== 36
Fig. 5
Characteristic of the phase comparator for determining energy direction.
kst =
I Diff > kst max I Rest
(3)
I Diff > I K min

where
kst kst max IK min
(4)
stabilizing factor stabilization factor limit. A typical value is kst max = 0.80 differential current pick-up value
The task of processing the algorithms is shared between the bay units and the central processing unit. Each of the bay units continuously monitors the currents of its own feeder, preprocesses them accordingly and then filters the resulting data according to a Fourier function. The analog data filtered in this way are then transferred at regular intervals to the central processing unit running the busbar protection algorithms. Depending on the phase-angle of the fault, the tripping time varies at Idiff/Ikmin= 5 between 20 and 30ms including the auxiliary tripping relay. Optionally, the tripping signal can be interlocked by a low-current or low-voltage check feature in the bay unit that enables tripping only when a current above a certain minimum is flowing, respectively the voltage is below a certain value.
Breaker-failure protection (Option)
The above calculations and evaluations are performed by the central unit. The second measuring principle determines the direction of energy flow and involves comparing the phases of the currents of all the feeders connected to a busbar section. The fundamental frequency current phasors 1..n (5) are compared. In the case of an internal fault, all of the feeder currents have almost the same phase angle, while in normal operation or during an external fault at least one current is approximately 180 out of phase with the others.
The breaker failure functions in the bay units monitor the phase currents independently of the busbar protection. They have two timers with individual settings. Operation of the breaker-failure function is enabled either: internally by the busbar protection algorithm (and, if configured, also by overcurrent or pole discrepancy protection features) externally via a binary input, e.g. by the line protection, transformer protection etc. After the delay of the first timer has expired, a tripping command can be applied to a second tripping coil on the circuit-breaker and a
Im (I Ln ) = arctan n Re (I Ln )
(5)
The algorithm detects an internal fault when the difference between the phase angles of all the feeder currents lies within the tripping angle of the phase comparator (see Figure 5).
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 7
remote tripping signal transmitted to the station at the opposite end of the line. This first timer operates in a stand-alone mode in the bay unit. If the fault still persists at the end of the second time delay, the breaker-failure function uses the busbar replica to trip all the other feeders supplying the same section of busbar via their bay units. A remote tripping signal can be configured in the software to be transmitted after the first or second timer. Phase-segregated measurements in each bay unit cope with evolving faults.
End-fault protection (Option)
central unit. This necessitates the existence of one set of voltage transformers per zone in one of the bay units. Tripping is only possible if the voltage falls short of the set value. Alternatively the enabling criterion can be configured for each feeder (voltage transformers must be installed). (For the enabling criterion see Table 11).
Neutral current detection I0 (special)
Ground fault currents in impedance-grounded systems may be too low for the stabilized differential current and phase comparison functions to detect. A function for detecting the neutral current is therefore also available, but only for single-phase-to-ground faults.
Pole discrepancy (Option)
In order to protect the dead zone between a circuit-breaker and the associated c.ts, a signal derived from the breaker position and the close command is applied. The end-fault protection is enabled a certain time after the circuit-breaker has been opened. In the event of a short circuit in the dead zone the nearest circuit-breakers are triggered. This function is performed in a stand-alone mode in the bay unit.
Overcurrent function (Option)
A pole discrepancy protection algorithm supervises that all three poles of a circuitbreakers open within a given time. This function monitors the discrepancy between the three phase currents of the circuitbreaker. When it picks up, the function does not send an intertripping signal to the central unit, but, if configured, it starts the local breaker failure protection (BFP logic 3). This function is also performed in a standalone mode in the bay unit.
Event recording
A definite-time overcurrent backup protection scheme can be integrated in each bay unit. (The operation of the function, if parameterized, may start the local breaker failure protection scheme). This function is performed in a stand-alone mode in the bay unit (see page 4).
Overcurrent check feature (Option)
Time stamps with a resolution of 1ms are attached to all binary events. Events are divided into the three following groups: system events protection events test events The events are stored locally in the bay unit or/and in the central unit.
Disturbance recording
The overcurrent check feature is only performed in the bay unit. It is effective for a busbar protection trip and for an intertripping signal (including end fault and breaker failure) and prevents those feeders from being tripped that are conducting currents lower than the setting of the overcurrent check feature.
Undervoltage check feature (special)
This function registers the currents and the binary inputs and outputs in each bay. Voltages can also be optionally registered (see Table 14). A disturbance record can be triggered by either the leading or lagging edges of binary input or output signals or events generated by the internal protection algorithms. Up to 10 general purpose binary inputs may be configured to enable external signals to trigger a disturbance record.
The undervoltage criterion is registered in the bay unit. Therefore voltage transformers have to be installed at the respective feeders. The function can be configured as enabling criterion per zone through internal linking in the
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 8
System design (contd)
The number of analogue channels that can be recorded, the sampling rate and the recording period are given in Table 14. A lower sampling rate enables a longer period to be recorded. The total recording period can be divided into a maximum of 15 recording intervals per bay unit. Each bay unit can record a maximum of 32 binary signals, 12 of which can be configured as trigger signals. The function can be configured to record the pre-disturbance and post-disturbance states of the signals. The user can also determine whether the recorded data is retained or overwritten by the next disturbance (FIFO = First In, First Out). This function is also performed in a standalone mode in the bay unit (see page 4). Note: Stored disturbance data can be transferred via the central unit to other computer systems for evaluation by programs such as WINEVE. Files are transferred in the COMTRADE format.
Communication interface
Disturbance recording data Differential currents of each protection zone in the generic part
Test generator
The HMI program (REBWIN) which runs on a PC connected to either a bay unit or the central processing unit includes a test generator. During commissioning and system maintenance, the test generator function enables the user to: activate binary input and output signals monitor system response. test the trip circuit up to and including the circuit-breaker (must be confirmed by the user in a dialogue)
Isolator supervision
The system monitors any inconsistencies of the binary input circuits connected to the isolator auxiliary contacts and generates an alarm after a set time delay.
Table 2:
N/O contact: Isolator CLOSED open N/C contact: Isolator OPEN open Isolator position
Last position stored + delayed isolator alarm, + switching prohibited signal OPEN CLOSED CLOSED + delayed isolator alarm, + switching prohibited signal
Where the busbar protection has to communicate with a station control or station monitoring system (SCS/SMS), a communication module is added to the central processing unit. The module supports the interbay bus protocols LON and IEC 60870-5-103. Transfer of the following are possible via a LON interbay bus: Time synchronization Binary events (signals, trips and diagnostic) Trip reset command Differential currents of each protection zone The IEC 60870-5-103 interbay bus transfers: Time synchronization Selected events listed in the public part All binary events in the generic part Trip reset command
open closed closed
closed open closed
Trip redirection
A binary input channel can be provided to which the external signal monitoring the circuit-breaker air pressure is connected. Tripping is not possible without active signal. When it is active, a trip generated by the respective bay unit is automatically redirected to the station at the opposite end of the line and also to the intertripping logic to trip all the circuit-breakers connected to the same section of busbar.
Human machine interface (HMI)
The busbar protection is configured and maintained with the aid of human machine interfaces at three levels.
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 9
Local HMI
At the lowest level, control is by local control and display units installed in the central unit and optionally in the bay units. This interface comprises: a four-line LCD with 16 characters each for displaying system data and error messages keys for controlling the display. Amongst other things, the following can be viewed: measured currents, voltages and the differential currents system status, alarms switchgear positions starting and tripping signals.
External HMI (REBWIN)
tions and the exchange of data via the process bus is also continuously supervised. The processing of tripping commands is one of the most important functions from the reliability and dependability point of view. Accordingly, every output channel comprises two redundant commands, which have to be enabled at regular intervals by a watchdog. If the watchdog condition is not satisfied, the channels are blocked.
Extension of the system
The system functions are determined by software configured using the software configuration tool. Additional system functions, e.g. breakerfailure, overcurrent or end fault protection, can be easily implemented at any time without extra hardware. The system can be completely engineered in advance to correspond to the final state of the station and the software modules for new bays or features activated using the HMI when the primary plant is installed or the features are needed.
Resetting the trip commands/-signals
More comprehensive and convenient control is provided by the external HMI software running on a PC connected to an optical interface on the front of either the central processing unit or a bay unit. The optical interface is completely immune to electrical interference. The PC software facilitates configuration of the entire busbar protection, the setting of parameters and full functional checking and testing. The HMI runs under MS WINDOWS NT and/or WINDOWS 98).
Remote HMI
The following resetting modes can be selected for each binary output (tripping or signal outputs): Latches until manually reset Resets automatically after a delay.
Inspection
A second serial interface at the rear of the central unit provides facility for connecting a PC remotely via either an optical fibre or modem link. The operation and function of REBWIN is the same whether the PC is connected locally or remotely.
A binary input is provided that excludes a bay unit from evaluation by the protection system. It is used while performing maintenance on the primary equipment.
Redundant power supplies (Option)
Other features
Self-supervision
All the system functions are continuously monitored to ensure the maximum reliability and availability of the protection. In the event of a failure, incorrect response or inconsistency, the corresponding action is taken to establish a safe status, an alarm is given and an event is registered for subsequent diagnostic analysis. Important items of hardware (e.g. auxiliary supplies, A/D converters and main and program memories) are subjected to various tests when the system is switched on and also during operation. A watchdog continuously monitors the integrity of the software func-
Two power supply modules can be fitted in a redundant arrangement, e.g. to facilitate maintenance of station batteries. This is an option for the central unit as well as for the bay unit.
Time synchronization
The absolute time accuracy with respect to an external time reference depends on the method of synchronization used: no external time synchronization: accuracy approx. 1 min. per month periodic time telegram with minute pulse (radio or satellite clock or station control system): accuracy typically 10 ms
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 10
periodic time telegram as above with second pulse: accuracy typically 1 ms.
The precise system time depends on the type of station control system and its configuration. The system time may also be synchronized by a 1 minute pulse applied to a binary input on the central unit.
Requirements
Optical fibre cables
A distributed busbar protection layout requires optical fibre cables and connectors with the following characteristics: 2 optical fibre cores per bay unit glass fibres with gradient index diameter of core and sheath 62.5, respectively 125 m maximum permissible attenuation 5 dB FST connector (for 62.5 m optical fibres) rodent protected and longitudinally waterproof if in cable ducts Observe the permissible bending radius when laying the cables. The following attenuation figures are typical values which may be used to determine an approximate attenuation balance for each bay:
Optical equipment for gradient index (840nm) per connector per cable joint Typical attenuation 3.5 dB/km 0.7 dB/km 0.2 dB/km
Isolator auxiliary contact
Auxiliary contacts on the isolators are connected to binary inputs on the bay units and control the status of the busbar replica in the numerical busbar protection. One potentially-free N/O and N/C contact are required on each isolator. The N/O contact signals that the isolator is CLOSED and the N/C contact that the isolator is OPEN. During the closing movement, the N/O contact must close before the isolator main contact gap reaches its flashover point. Conversely, during the opening movement, the N/O contact must not open before the isolator main contact gap exceeds its flashover point. If this is not the case, i.e. the contact signals no longer closed beforehand, then the N/C contact may not signal open before the flashover point has been exceeded.
Open end-position Close isolator Open isolator Isolator
Closed end-position
Auxiliary contacts: CLOSED normally-open OPEN normally-closed
Flashover gap
must be closed may be closed must be open
Fig. 6
Switching sequence of the auxiliary contacts that control the busbar replica
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 11
Main current transformer
The algorithms and stabilization features used make the busbar protection largely insensitive to c.t. saturation phenomena. Main c.ts types TPS (B.S. class x), TPX, TPY, 5P.. or 10P.. are permissible. TPX and TPY c.ts may be mixed within one substation in phase-fault schemes, but not TPZ and TPX or TPY c.ts. The relatively low c.t. performance needed for the busbar protection makes it possible for it to share protection cores with other protection devices.
Current transformer requirements for stability during external faults
where:
IKmax = I1N =
max. primary through-fault current rated primary c.t. current
Taking the d.c. time constant of the feeder into account, the effective n' becomes: 2) n' =10=for TN 120 ms, or n' =50=for 120 ms <TN 300 ms.
The minimum c.t. requirements are determined by the maximum fault current.
Example: IKmax = 30000 A I1N = 1000 A TN 120 ms Applying relationships 1) and 2): (1) 2) Selected: 30000 n --------------- = 6 5000 n' =10 n' =10
The effective accuracy limit factor (n') must be checked to ensure the stability of the busbar protection during external faults. The rated accuracy limit factor is given by the c.t. manufacturer. Taking account of the burden and the c.t. losses, the effective accuracy limit factor n' becomes:
n' = n
where: n PB PE PB = = = =
PN + PE PB + PE
Pickup for internal faults
In the case of internal busbar faults, c.t. saturation is less likely, because each c.t. only conducts the current of its own feeder. Should nevertheless c.t. saturation be possible, it is important to check that the minimum fault current exceeds the setting for Ikmin. Note: For systems that measure I0, the REB500 questionnaire 1MRB520258-Ken, Appendix L1, should be filled in and submitted to ABB, so that the c.t. requirements to ensure proper I0 measurement can be checked.
rated accuracy limit factor burden at rated current c.t. losses burden at rated current
In the case of scheme with phase-by-phase measurement, n' must satisfy the following two relationships: (1) 1 I Kmax n -----------------5 I 1N
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 12
Technical data
Hardware modules
Table 3: Analogue inputs (bay unit)
Currents 4 input channels Rated current (IN) Thermal ratings: continuous IL1, IL2, IL3, Io 1A or 5A by choice of terminals, adjustable c.t. ratio 4 x IN 30 x IN 100 x IN 250 x IN (peak) 0.1VA at IN = 1A 0.07VA at IN = 5A UL1, UL2, UL3, Uo 100 or 200V, adjustable v.t. ratio 2 x UN 3 x UN EN60255-6 (1994), IEC 255-6 (1988), VDE 0435, part 303 EN60255-6 (1994), IEC 255-6 (1988), VDE 0435, part 303 EN60255-6 (1994), IEC 255-6 (1988), VDE 0435, Part 303
for 10 s for 1 s
1 half-cycle Burden per phase Voltages (optional) 4 input channels Rated voltage (UN) Thermal ratings: continuous for 10 s Burden per phase Common data Rated frequency (fN)
0.3 VA at UN
50 Hz or 60 Hz (setting)
Table 4: Binary inputs/outputs (bay unit, central unit)

Binary outputs General Operating time Max. operating voltage Max. continuous rating Max. make and carry for 0.5s Max. making power at 110 V DC Binary output reset response, programmable per output 3 ms (typical) 300 V AC/DC 8A 30A 3300W - latched - automatic reset (delay 0...60 s)
Heavy-duty N/O contacts CR09 ... CR16 - bay unit Heavy-duty N/O contacts CR01 ... CR04, CR07 ... CR09 - central unit Breaking current for (L/R=40ms) 1 contact U< 50 V DC 1.5 A U< 120 V DC 0.3 A U< 250 V DC 0.1 A U< 50 V DC 5 A U< 120 V DC 1 A U< 250 V DC 0.3 A
2 contacts in series
Signalling contacts CR01 ... CR08 - bay unit Signalling contacts CR05, CR06 - central unit
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 13
Breaking current
U< 50 V DC 0.5 A U< 120 V DC 0.1 A U< 250 V DC 0.04 A 16 optocouplers 8 groups with common terminal 12 optocouplers per binary I/O module (max. 2) 3 groups with common terminal 48 ... 250 V DC Pick-up setting via HMI 10 mA <1 ms
Binary inputs Number of inputs per bay unit Number of inputs for central unit Voltage range (Uoc) Pick-up current Operating time
Table 5: Auxiliary supply

Module type Input voltage range (Uaux) 25% Fuse Load Common data Max. input voltage interruption during which output voltage maintained Frontplate signal Switch > 50 ms IEC 255-11 (1979) VDE 0435, Part 303 green "standby" LED ON/OFF Bay unit 48...250 V DC no fuse 11 W Central unit 48...250 V DC 10 A slow 100 W
Software modules
Table 6: Busbar protection
Min. fault current pick-up setting (Ikmin) Neutral current system Stabilizing factor (k) Differential current alarms current setting time delay setting Isolator alarm time delay Typical tripping time C.t. ratio per feeder Reset time 500...6000 A in steps of 100 A 100...6000 A 0.7...0.9 in steps of 0.05 5...50% x Ikmin in steps of 5% 2...50 s in steps of 1 s 0.5...90 s 20...30 ms at Idiff/Ikmin 5 incl. tripping relays 50...10 000/1A, 50...10 000/5A, adjustable via HMI 30...96 ms (at 1.2 < Ik/Ikmin < 20)
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 14
Technical data (contd)
Table 7: Breaker-failure protection (optional)

Measurement: Setting range Accuracy Timers: Setting range for timers t1 and t2 Accuracy Remote trip pulse Reset ratio Reset time 10...5000 ms in steps of 10 ms 0.1...2 x IN in steps of 0.1 x IN 5%
5%
100...2000 ms in steps of 10 ms typically 80% 25...51 ms (at 1.2 < I/Isetting < 20)
Table 8: End-fault protection

Timer setting range Current setting range Reset ratio Reset time 100...10,000 ms in steps of 100 ms 0.1...2 x IN in steps of 0.1 IN 95% 17 ms...63 ms (at 1.2 < I/Isetting < 20)
Table 9: Overcurrent function

Characteristic Measurement: Setting range Setting range time delay Reset ratio Reset time 0.1...20 x IN in steps of 0.1 x IN 10 ms...20 s in steps of 10 ms typically 95% 20...60 ms (at 1.2 < I/Isetting < 20) definite time
Table 10: Overcurrent check feature for tripping

Setting range (per feeder) 0.1 IN... 4.0 IN in steps of 0.1 IN, default 0.7 IN
If the overcurrent check feature is not activated, the tripping command (21110_Trip) is emitted without checking that a minimum feeder current is flowing (standard). The overcurrent check feature only enables tripping of a circuit-breaker, if the feeder current is higher than its setting. This can be individually determined for each bay.
Table 11: Undervoltage check feature for tripping

Setting range (per feeder) 0.2 UN... 1.0 UN in steps of 0.1 UN, default 0.7 UN
If the low-voltage check feature is not activated the tripping command (21110_Trip) is emitted unchecked (standard). Depending on the configuration the low-voltage check feature enables tripping for each zone or tripping of a circuit-breaker by the busbar protection (or BFP intertripping etc.) and, if configured, also by the local protection functions, if the voltage falls below the low-voltage check setting. This can be individually determined for each bay unit. Single-phase, three-phase and phase-to-phase configurations are possible. (In 3 ph. star configuration the phase-to-ground voltage and phase-to-phase voltages derived from the threephase Y voltage system are evaluated).
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 15
Table 12: Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection

Setting range Time delay Discrepancy factor 0.2 IN ... 1.0 IN in steps of 0.1IN, default 0.7 IN 100 ms ... 10000 ms in steps of 100 ms, default 1500 ms 0.01* Imax ... 0.99 * Imax in steps of 0.01 * Imax, default 0.6 * Imax
For feeders with single-phase tripping and autoreclosure, the time setting for the pole discrepancy protection must be greater than the reclosure time. The discrepancy factor is the maximum permissible difference between the amplitudes of two phases.
Table 13: Event recorder

Event recorder System events Protection events Test events Bay unit 100 total Central unit 1000 total
Table 14: Disturbance recorder

Standard: currents (4xI) Recording period 1.5 s 3.0 s 6.0 s 6.0 s 12.0s 24.0s 2400/2880 1200/1440 600/720 2400/2880 1200/1440 600/720 (50/60 Hz) (50/60 Hz) (50/60 Hz) (50/60 Hz) (50/60 Hz) (50/60 Hz) (50/60 Hz) (50/60 Hz) (50/60 Hz)
Option 1: Currents (4 x I) / Recording period
Option 2: Currents and voltages (4 x I, 4 x U)
Option 3: Currents (4 x I) / Recording period
Option 4: Currents and voltages (4 x I, 4 x U) 10.0 s 2400/2880 20.0s 1200/1440 40.0s 600/720
Number of disturbance records = total recording time / set recording period (max.15) Independent settings for pre-fault and post-fault period (min. setting 200 ms).
Table 15: Interbay bus protocols

LON IBB protocol LON interbay bus supports Time synchronization Binary events (signals, trips and diagnostic) Trip reset commands Differential currents of each protection zone Time synchronization Subset of binary events as specified in IEC Trip reset commands Disturbance recording data transfer Generic mode: Differential currents of each protection zone All other binary events
IEC 60870-5-103 IBB protocol IEC 60870-5-103 bus supports
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 16
Technical data (contd)
Table 16: General data

Temperature range: - operation - storage and transport Climate tests - Cold - Dry heat - Damp heat -10 C...+ 55 C - 40 C...+ 85 C -25 C / 16 h +70 C / 16 h +40 C; 95% rel. hum. / 4 days EN 60255-6 (1994), IEC 255-6 (1988) EN 60255-6 (1994), IEC 255-6 (1988) EN 60068-2-1 (1993), IEC 68-2-1 (1990) EN 60068-2-2 (1993), IEC 68-2-2 (1974) IEC 68-2-3 (1984) EN 60950 (1995) Sec. 5.1 IEC 255-5 (1977) EN 60950 (1995), IEC 950 (1995) IEC 255-5 (1977), VDE 0411 IEC 255-5 Cl.C (1977), EN 60950 (1995) BS 142-1966 ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1989 IEC 255-5 (1977)
Thermal withstand of insulating materials Clearance and creepage distances Insulation resistance tests Dielectric tests 0.5 kV / >100 MOhm 2 kV AC or 3 kV DC / 1 min 1 kV AC or 1.4 kV DC / 1 min (across open contacts) 1.2/50 s/0.5 Joule 5 kV AC
Impulse test
Table 17: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Immunity 1 MHz burst disturbance tests Immunity Electrostatic discharge test (ESD) - air discharge - contact discharge Fast transient test (burst) 1.0/2.5 kV 1 MHz 400 Hz rep. freq. IEC 255-22-1, Cl. 3 (1988), ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989 EN 50082-2 (1995) [prEN 50263/1996] EN 61000-4-2, Cl. 3 (1994), IEC 1000-4-2 (1995) IEC 801-2 (1991) EN 61000-4-4, Cl. 4 (1994), IEC 1000-4-4 (1995) IEC 801-4 (1988)
Industrial environment
8 kV 6 kV 2/4 kV
Power frequency magnetic field immunity test (50/60 Hz) - continuous field - short duration Radio frequency interference test (RFI)
30 A/m 300 A/m 0.15 - 80 MHz, 80% amplitude modulated 10 V, Cl. 3 80 - 1000 MHz, 80% amplitude modulated 10 V/m, Cl. 3 900 MHz, 1890 MHz pulse modulated 10 V/m, Cl. 3 Industrial environment Test procedure
EN 61000-4-8, Cl. 4 (1993), IEC 1000-4-8 (1993) ENV 50141,Cl. 3 (1993), IEC 1000-4-6 (1996) ENV 50140 (1995), IEC 1000-4-3 (1995), IEC 801-3 (1984) ENV 50204, Cl. 3 (1995) EN 50081-2, Cl. A (1994), [prEN 50263/ 1996] EN 55011 (1992), CISPR 11 (1990) EN 55022 (1989), CISPR 22 (1985)
Emission
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 17
Table 18: Mechanical tests

Vibration and shock Resonance investigation Permanent strength Seismic Shock test Bump test 2 ... 150 Hz / 0.5 gn 10 ... 150 Hz / 1 gn 2 ... 33 Hz 1 ... 5, 2 gn Cl.1; A = 15 gn; D = 11 ms; pulse/axis = 3 Cl.1; A = 10 gn; D = 16 ms; pulse/axis = 1000 IEC 255-21-1 (1988), IEEE 344-1987 IEC 255-21-1 (1988) IEC 255-21-3 (1993), IEEE 344-1987 EN 60255-21-3 (1995) IEC 68-2-27 (1987), IEC 255-21-1 (1988) IEC 68-2-29 (1987), IEC 255-21-2 (1988)
Table 19: Cubicle design

Cubicle Dimensions w x d x h Standard type RESP97 (for details see 1MRB520159-Ken) 800 x 800 x 2200mm (single cubicle) 1600 x 800 x 2200mm (double cubicle) 2400 x 800 x 2200mm (triple cubicle) *) approx. 400-600 kg per cubicle
*) largest shipping unit Total weight (with all units inserted) Terminals C.ts V.ts **) Power supply Binary I/O's Internal wiring gauges C.ts V.ts **) Power supply Binary I/O's **) optional 4 mm2 stranded 1.5 mm2 stranded 1.5 mm2 stranded 1.5 mm2 stranded 10 mm2 gauge, Phoenix URTK/S 10 mm2 gauge, Phoenix URTK/S 10 mm2 gauge, Phoenix UK 10 4 mm2, isolating, Phoenix UDMTK 5-P/P
Table 20: Enclosure protection classes

Bay unit IP40 19" central unit IP20 Cubicle
(seeTable 19)
IP40-50
Table 21: Optical interfaces

Number of cores Core/sheath diameter Max. permissible attenuation Max. length Connector 2 fibre cores per bay unit 62.5/125 m 5 dB approx. 1200 m Type FST for 62.5 m optical fibre cables
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 18
Ordering
Ordering and scope of supply
When sending your enquiry please fill in and enclose the short version of questionnaire 1MRB520258-Ken on pages 24 and 25 in this data sheet together with a single-line diagram of the station. This will enable us to submit a tender that corresponds more accurately to your needs. At the time of ordering, fill in the full version of questionnaire 1MRB520258-Ken. These data are used by ABB to engineer the protection, i.e. isolator allocation, c.t. allocation, binary inputs and outputs etc. The data given in the full version of the questionnaire is therefore binding. The protection system is supplied fully tested and accompanied by the following documentation and software: Rack and cubicle layouts if applicable
Three sets of documentation in either German, English or French System software with the plant configuration and parameter settings on mass storage media. System tests performed in the test department: Installation of the system software with plant configuration and parameter settings Testing of busbar replica and associated protection functions Acceptance testing can be carried out in the test department subject to prior agreement. The delivery time applies from the receipt of the technically and commercially complete order accompanied by the full version of the questionnaire.
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 19
Diagrams
Table 22: Bay unit

Bay unit types 500 BU02_1 (4 I, 16 I/O, classic flush mounting) 500 BU02_1 (4 I, 16 I/O, stand-alone) 500 BU02_2 (4 I, 4 U*, 16 I/O, classic mounting) 500 BU02_2 (4 I, 4 U*, 16 I/O, stand-alone)
* with redundant power supply
Available inputs / outputs
Abbreviations OCxx CRxx OLxx
Explanation Opto-coupler Tripping relay Optical link
Terminal block/ terminals A, B C, D E Rx Tx I U P, R
Explanation Binary inputs Binary outputs Optical connection Receive Transmit Currents Voltages Supply
Wire gauge/ Typ 2.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 FST plug FST plug 4 mm2 2.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 Wiring diagram of bay units
Fig. 7
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 20
Dimensioned drawings (in mm)
Fig. 8
Bay unit casing for flush mounting Enclosure Protection Class IP 40 (without local HMI)
Fig. 9
Centralized version based on a 19'' mounting plate with up to three bay units. Optionally with local HMI.
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 21
Fig. 10
Bay unit casing for flush mounting Enclosure Protection Class IP 40 (The process wiring is connected to terminals at the rear of the bay unit.) Optionally with local HMI.
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 22
Dimensioned drawings (in mm) (contd)
482.6
Spacefr Verdrahtung Platz for wiring
Rckseite Rear view
443
30
Fig. 11
Central unit casing (19") for flush mounting Enclosure Protection Class IP 20
ca. 235**)
212 *)
6U = 265.8
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 23
1 2 3 4
Fig. 12
Front view of REB500 with various design versions incl. line protection REL316*4 (example only)
Fig. 13
Hinged frame and rear wall
1
2 3 4 5 6
empty Central unit Ventilation grid 3 bay units, stand-alone with HMI REL316*4 + bay unit equal to rack 4 1 bay unit, classic flush mounting
Table 23: Maximum complement of modules per cubicle (centralized installation)

Number of binary I/O per bay 16 Max. number of bays Number of 19 mounting plates 4 Display example Possible configuration
12
Refer to standalone figures
Refer to example 1
Example 1: Double busbar, 11 feeders, 1 bus coupler, busbar and breaker failure protection for all bays.
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 24
Fig. 14
Possible arrangements of the bay unit (BU02) with HMI.
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 25
Brief questionnaire
1. Client Client Station Client's reference Person responsible, date
2. ABB (dealt with by ABB)
Tender No.:
Order No.:
Sales Engineer
Project Manager
3. Binding Single line diagram (must show location and configuration of spare bays) 4. HV System
Diagram No.
Date
Rev. Nr.
Rev. Date
Remark : Please always attach this diagram! 1-1/2 Breaker Ring bus Additional Transfer bus
System Voltage [kV]
Neutral Grounding Solidly grounded Isolated Syst. Frequency [Hz] Compensated Low resistance gr. Switchgear
Busbar configuration Single Double Triple Quadruple
AIS 5. Trip circuits Number of tripping coils (connected to REB500 tripping contacts) One trip coil
GIS
Two trip coils
6. Central Unit configuration
Busbar protection
BBP
With Neutral Current measurement (Special) -> for impedance grounded systems only IO ----> Interface LON
IEC 60870-5-103
SCS/ SMS interface

(Option)
Number of binary input-/ output boards (BIO) for central unit One BIO Remark: 12 binary inputs and 9 binary outputs per BIO Redundant supply for the Central Unit (Option) 7. Type of installation Distributed CU loose delivered
BU02 loose delivered
(Option) Two BIO's Udc [V]
DC Supply for central unit
Centralized CU and BU02 loose delivered Centralized CU and BU02 mounted in cubicles
Distributed CU mounted in cubicle,

BU02 mounted in cubicles
8. Cubicle data
Syst. cubicle acc. to specification 1MRB520159-Ken (Specification of a cubicle type RESP97)
(only fill in, if the BU02 and/or CU have to be mounted in cubicles) [m] [m] (only fill in, if an offer for optical fibre cables is explicitely desired) Number of additional sets (Optional)
9. Optical fibre cable
Total length for all bays (indoor type) Total length for all bays (outdoor type)
10. Documentation
REB500 standard, three complete sets of documentation Language: English German
11. Remarks
Abbreviations:
CU BU02 SCS SMS BIO AIS GIS HMI
REB500 Central Unit REB500 Bay Units Station Control System Station Monitoring Sys. Binary Input/ Output module Air isolated switchgear Gas isolated switchgear Human machine interface
Definitions:
(Standard) (Option) (Special)

4I 4I+4U Configuration 1-8
Standard function or version Optional function or version For special applications only Four current transformers Four current transformers and four voltage transformers (incl. redundant power supply) Depending on the protected station equipment (line, transformer, coupler) and the toplogy of the station, the bay units could have different configurations.
Please tick off or write an X for a selection
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 26
Bay unit configuration
Example 12. Type of HV Bay

Line feeder Transformer feeder Bus coupler/ bus section coupler Isolator field 1 -1/2 Breaker bay Reactor/ compensator bay
13. Design of Bay unit

BU02 (classic, flush mounting incl. local HMI)
4I (Standard)
ABB REB500
4I + 4U (Opt.) BU02 (basic version)
4I (Standard)
4I + 4U (Opt.) Inclusive local HMI BU02 (centralized mounting)
cable length= 3m
(Option)
4I (Standard)
4I + 4U (Opt.)
max. 3 BU02 per 19'' frame
Inclusive local HMI (Option) (Opt.) (**)
max. 3 LMI per 19'' frame
BU02 Power supply

Redundant supply for the bay units
14. Protection functions

Breaker failure protection BFP Starting BFP
Single phase starting Three phase starting
(Option)
x x
End fault protection EFP OCDT PDF UV OC (Option) (Option) (Special) (Special) (Special) Definitive time overcurrent protection Pole discrepancy protection Under voltage release
(**) (**)
Over current release
15. Disturbance Recorder DR

1.5 sec. Recording time (excl. voltage) at 2400/2880 Hz (Standard) 6 sec. Recording time at 2400 /2880 Hz (Option) 10 sec. Recording time at 2400 /2880 Hz (Option)
excl. Voltage incl. Voltage (**) excl. Voltage incl. Voltage (**)
16. Number of bay units

Number of equipped bay units for this configuration Number of pre-projected bay units (not fitted for future extension)
10 3
(**) for this option a bay unit version 4I+4U has to be selected
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 27
Other relevant publications
Cubicle specification RESP97 Cubicles for electronic installations Description Users manual Reference list Ordering questionnaire
1MRB520159-Ken 1MRB520115-Ben 1KHA000615-Sen 1MRB520259-Uen 1MRB520009-Ren 1MRB520258-Ken
REB500
1MRB520256-Ben
Page 28
ABB Power Automation Ltd.

Haselstrasse 16/122 CH-5401 Baden/Switzerland Tel. +41 56 205 77 44 Fax +41 56 205 55 77 Home page: www.abb.com/ch Printed in Switzerland (0003-1500-0)
June 2000
4.
4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.3.1. 4.3.2. 4.3.2.1. 4.3.2.2. 4.3.2.3. 4.4. 4.4.1. 4.4.2. 4.5. 4.5.1. 4.5.2. 4.5.3. 4.5.4. 4.5.5. 4.5.6. 4.5.7. 4.5.8. 4.5.9. 4.5.10. 4.5.11. 4.5.12. 4.5.13. 4.5.13.1. 4.5.13.2. 4.5.13.3. 4.5.13.4. 4.5.14. 4.5.14.1. 4.5.14.2. 4.5.15. 4.5.16. 4.5.17. 4.5.17.1.
External operator program (REBWIN)

Introduction ..............................................................................4-3 Safety instructions....................................................................4-3 Installation................................................................................4-4 Minimum PC requirements.......................................................4-4 Set-up ......................................................................................4-4 Serial interface, off-line and simulation mode ..........................4-4 Mouse ......................................................................................4-5 Installation on a network ..........................................................4-5 Starting the operator program ..................................................4-6 Window structure .....................................................................4-7 Main window ............................................................................4-8 Operation ...............................................................................4-11 File/Open ...............................................................................4-11 File/Save as ...........................................................................4-11 File/Upload from protection system........................................4-11 File/Download to protection system .......................................4-11 File/Compare with system data..............................................4-13 File/Exit ..................................................................................4-13 View/Single-line diagram........................................................4-14 View/Protection zone measurements.....................................4-16 View/Analogue input measurements......................................4-17 View/Binary inputs/output status ............................................4-18 View/Switchgear objects ........................................................4-19 View/Protection zone circuit-breakers ....................................4-19 View/Disturbance recorder.....................................................4-19 Recording...............................................................................4-20 COMTRADE...........................................................................4-20 Deleting..................................................................................4-20 Start/Stop ...............................................................................4-20 View/Event list........................................................................4-21 Load events ...........................................................................4-22 Deleting events ......................................................................4-22 View/Reset latching relays .....................................................4-23 Settings/System response .....................................................4-23 Settings/Busbar protection .....................................................4-23 Settings/Overcurrent release .................................................4-23
4-1
4.5.17.2. 4.5.18. 4.5.19. 4.5.20. 4.5.21. 4.5.22. 4.5.23. 4.5.24. 4.5.25. 4.5.26. 4.5.27. 4.5.28. 4.5.29. 4.5.30. 4.5.31. 4.5.32. 4.5.33. 4.5.33.1. 4.5.34. 4.5.35. 4.5.36. 4.5.37. 4.5.38. 4.5.38.1. 4.5.38.2. 4.5.39. 4.5.40. 4.5.41. 4.5.42. 4.6. 4.7. 4.7.1. 4.7.2. 4.7.3. 4.8.
Settings/Undervoltage release ...............................................4-23 Settings/Breaker failure protection .........................................4-24 Settings/Overcurrent protection .............................................4-24 Settings/End zone protection .................................................4-24 Settings/CB pole discrepancy ................................................4-24 Settings/Event memory ..........................................................4-24 Settings/Communication ........................................................4-24 Configuration/Activate/deactivate...........................................4-24 Configuration/Isolators ...........................................................4-24 Configuration/Circuit-breaker .................................................4-25 Configuration/Current transformers........................................4-25 Configuration/Voltage transformers .......................................4-25 Configuration/Device structure...............................................4-25 Configuration/Binary module..................................................4-25 Configuration/Disturbance recorder .......................................4-25 Configuration/CB inspection...................................................4-25 Testing/Test mode .................................................................4-25 Purpose of the test generator ................................................4-27 Testing/Installation mode .......................................................4-28 Tools/Version .........................................................................4-29 Tools/Reports.........................................................................4-30 Tools/Change password ........................................................4-31 Tools/Settings ........................................................................4-31 Operator program settings .....................................................4-31 Database locations ................................................................4-32 Tools/Set system time............................................................4-32 Tools/MMC session manager ................................................4-33 Window ..................................................................................4-34 Help (?) ..................................................................................4-34 Error messages......................................................................4-35 Corrective action ....................................................................4-36 DAC error: 102 .......................................................................4-36 Country settings, Code page..................................................4-36 Available system resources ...................................................4-36 Deinstallation .........................................................................4-36
4-2
4.
External operator program (REBWIN)

(See Section 5 for configuration and setting procedure)
4.1.
Introduction The REBWIN operator program enables the operator to communicate with the REB500 protection system. The program offers greater convenience than the local control unit (human/machine interface, HMI) with respect to viewing REB500 measurements and statuses, setting the protection functions offline and downloading the settings to REB500 and controlling the integrated disturbance recorder. REBWIN runs on a standard PC (see Section 4.3.1. Minimum PC requirements) under Windows 98 or NT. The data are transferred between the PC and REB500 via an optical serial interface located on the front of the REB500 units.
4.2.
Safety instructions Danger: The REBWIN operator program permits circuitbreakers and isolators to be operated. Every program operation and the possible consequences must be considered carefully beforehand. If switching operations have to be carried out, the same precautions must be taken as when performing them manually.
Caution: Version 5.0x of the REB500 of the protection software requires Version 5.0x of REBWIN. Earlier REBWIN versions are incompatible.
Caution: A password has to be entered to operate REBWIN. Passwords may only be assigned to competent authorised operators. Change the standard passwords in the software as soon as the program is installed.
4-3
4.3.
Installation Making a backup copy of the original REBWIN discs and using the backup copy for the installation is recommended. Providing the corresponding operating system option is activated, you must have administrator access rights to install the program on the PC.
4.3.1.
Minimum PC requirements The PC control program runs on an IBM PC or compatible under MS Windows 98 or NT 4.0. The minimum performance requirements are as follows: PC with a 100 MHz Pentium processor or higher mouse plus PS/2 interface (bus board) if the PC has only one serial interface Windows 98 or NT 4.0 16 MByte RAM (32 MByte recommended) 1 floppy (3", 1.44 MByte) or CD drive 1 serial interface (RS-232C) (COM1 or COM2) SVGA monitor (800 x 600) 1 parallel interface (LPT1) for a printer (recommended).
4.3.2.
Set-up Deactivate any anti-virus program you may have running on the PC before installing REBWIN. The anti-virus program can be reactivated once the installation of REBWIN is complete. Insert the disc 1/5 (Setup) or the program CD in the corresponding drive and run the program SETUP.EXE. Enter an installation directory of your choice should you not wish to use the default directory. You are requested to insert the second disc once all the files have been copied from the first and so on. The installation routine automatically creates a REBWIN program group and the program icon REBWIN x.xx ss, x.xx signifying the program version and ss the language.
4.3.2.1.
Serial interface, off-line and simulation mode By default, the installation routine will select the first free interface (COM port). The communication settings can be changed subsequently by selecting Tools/Settings (see Section 4.5.38.). The same menu item also provides a choice of operating mode by selecting either the radio button On-line (excludes the func4-4
tions requiring a REB500 to be connected) or Simulated (no REB500 connected, but with all the functions available for demonstration purposes and random generation of data). Note: REBWIN automatically starts off-line, if an invalid COM port is entered or another application is using the port. 4.3.2.2. Mouse A mouse is necessary to work with the REBWIN operator program efficiently. It is possible to control it solely via the keyboard, but this can be a little cumbersome. The right mouse button is also used for some operations and therefore it should not be configured to perform other functions (e.g. double click). 4.3.2.3. Installation on a network Before attempting to install REBWIN on a network, ascertain that you are authorised to write in the corresponding Widows directory, otherwise the installation will fail.
4-5
4.4.
Starting the operator program Note: The program screens in this Section are based on a typical application. Depending on the power system configuration and the options configured while engineering your system, certain menus may be missing or the display appear different. The first screen to appear after starting the operator program is the System log-on dialogue:
Figure 4.1
System log-on dialogue
The program can be run in a read only mode by appropriately activating the Read only check box, i.e. the data can be viewed but not changed. Users that want to run the program in a read/write mode must enter a password. Note: To enable a start to be made, the password is set to System when the program is supplied (case sensitive!). The operator program obtains the specific device data from a database in a file which is stored both on the PC and the protection system. Database files on the PC have the extension .mdb. Click on the OK button to continue the start-up routine or on the Cancel button to discontinue and close the program. The main window with the main menu bar appears after clicking on OK.
4-6
Some of the dialogues used by the program are standard Windows dialogues. Should these not be in the same language as REBWIN, then a different language is set for the Windows operating system. Note: The database that was open during the last session opens automatically. If a database was never opened before, select Open in the File menu and then the desired file. An error message is displayed if an attempt is made to open an incompatible file. An existing file in the protection system can also be opened using the Upload function in the File menu.
Figure 4.2 4.4.1.
Main REBWIN window
Window structure The structure and handling of the windows in the operator program is similar to other Windows applications.
Figure 4.3
Dialogue buttons
4-7
The following buttons appear in many dialogues: OK The new settings are saved in the database on the PC and the dialogue closes. Apply The new settings are saved in the database on the PC and the dialogue stays open. Restore The changes that have been made are ignored and the old settings restored. Cancel The new settings are not saved and the dialogue closes. Scroll (arrow) buttons In windows permitting the selection of several bays (or isolators, circuit-breakers etc.), there are four scroll buttons at the bottom for scrolling through the bays. Close The window or dialogue is closed and a warning is displayed, if changes have been made which have not been saved. In many dialogues with settings there is an overview tab for selecting one of a list of bays and a details tab showing the respective settings. The details can be viewed by either clicking on the tab or double-clicking on the bay in the overview list. 4.4.2. Main window The title bar is at the top of the main program window and states the name of the program REBWIN (REB500) and the project information entered by the ABB engineering department. The menu bar is located immediately below the title bar.
Figure 4.4
Main menu of the REBWIN operator program
4-8
File The menu item File permits databases to be opened and saved and a database to be uploaded from the protection or downloaded to it. View The menu item View contains menu items for viewing the plant diagram, the measurements of each protection zone, inputs and outputs, switchgear statuses, the event list and any tripping that has taken place. Settings The menu item Settings provides facility for setting the system parameters, the operating values for the various protection functions and the communication parameters. Configuration The menu item Configuration concerns the definition of the various circuit-breakers, isolators and c.ts, the activation/deactivation (masking/unmasking) of items of plant, the configuration of system modules, tripping logics-breakers and the disturbance recorder and the planning of maintenance. Testing The menu item Test is for enabling/disabling either the test or installation mode. Tools Functions for entering data file versions, producing reports, changing passwords, selecting operator program options and setting the system time are available under the menu item Tools. Status information is displayed on the bar at the bottom of the main window (Ready, On-line/Off-line, Edit/Read only, Test mode, Installation mode). These have the following significance:
Figure 4.5 Ready
Status bar
Signals that the program is standing by.
4-9
On-line/Off-line If the program can successfully establish contact with the protection system, it is in the on-line mode. If no connection can be established or is not desired the program is in the offline mode. Edit/Read only Edit permits settings to be saved in a file or downloaded to the protection system. In the Read only mode it is only possible to read data. Test mode Test mode is displayed on the status line whenever the test generator is activated. Installation mode Installation mode is displayed on the status line whenever the installation mode is activated. Simulation Simulation is displayed on the status line whenever the simulation mode is activated. This permits all the functions to be executed without being connected to a protection device. If data should be uploaded from the protection system, e.g. an event list or measurements, the simulation mode generates random values. These may correspond to fault situations.
4-10
4.5. 4.5.1.
Operation File/Open After starting the program, select Open from the File menu. A dialogue opens which enables you to select the desired file. The dialogue provides facility for navigating through the various drives and directories. After making the corresponding choice, click on OK to load the data into the program or on Cancel to close the dialogue without making any changes.
4.5.2.
File/Save as The current data in the PC database can be saved in a file by opening the File menu and clicking on Save as. As was the case with Open, the dialogue that appears gives full access to the PC file system.
4.5.3.
File/Upload from protection system This menu item enables data stored in the protection system to be uploaded to a file in the PC.
Figure 4.6 4.5.4.
Upload from protection system
File/Download to protection system Open the File menu and select Download to protection system to download the current data from the PC database to the protection system. The versions are compared before downloading proceeds and the result is displayed. An index and a comment may also be entered beforehand by selecting Tools/Version (see Section 4.5.35.). The new data is only saved if it is different. Data will only be saved if they are different or the version index is different. Note: Data will only be correctly downloaded providing the protection system has been correctly started.
4-11
After the downloading procedure is complete, the protection system is restarted and the valid version can then be verified on the HMI.
Figure 4.7
Download to protection system and comparison of versions
Figure 4.8
Download to protection system and comparison of versions
The progress of the downloading procedure is shown on the screen. The correct time format must be set via the control panel on the PC for the procedure to be presented correctly. While the data are actually being transferred to the protection system, the radio button Download all data to the system is red. The procedure can still be aborted at this stage by clicking on the Cancel button.
4-12
Figure 4.9
Download to protection system
Various check sums are calculated to establish the integrity of the data in the database and these are examined after the transfer of data has been completed. Only after all the data have been successfully transferred are they saved in the non-volatile memory. 4.5.5. File/Compare with system data Provision is made for checking whether the configuration and setting data in the protection system and the PC are the same. The comparison procedure does not identify data that differ. 4.5.6. File/Exit To terminate the program, open the File menu and select Exit. A warning is displayed if there are changes that have not been saved. You then have the choice of saving or discarding them.
4-13
4.5.7.
View/Single-line diagram Opening the View menu and selecting Single-line diagram displays diagram of the plant corresponding to the layout and wiring diagrams created for the project by the ABB engineering department. The screen below shows a typical single-line diagram:
Figure 4.10
Single-line diagram
The name of every item of plant can be changed by pointing at its label and clicking the right mouse button. This opens a menu with the operation Change label. Clicking the right mouse button again on this command opens a dialogue called New label. After entering the new name, click on OK to confirm it. The primary system shown above is only an example. Providing the items of plant have been configured, updating once or cyclically shows their actual status and the feeder currents. Using the right mouse button, it is also possible to display the differential currents of the selected busbar zone. A busbar zone is selected by clicking the right mouse button on its label, e.g. BZ1.
4-14
Figure 4.11
Updated single-line diagram
(Click the right mouse button in the empty field to update the symbol bar.)
4-15
4.5.8.
View/Protection zone measurements This dialogue displays the actual values of measured variables for each protection zone. The protection zones are determined by the positions of the isolators and the bus-tie breakers (busbar image). Overview
Figure 4.12
Overview dialogue for protection zone measurements
The currently active protection zones are listed in order showing the associated sections of busbar and the differential current per phase or in the neutral. The overview is not updated automatically, it is necessary to click on the Refresh button. A protection zone to which no measurement has been assigned at all is shown as being invalid.
4-16
4.5.9.
View/Analogue input measurements The bay units and their labels and slots are listed in the overview dialogue.
Figure 4.13
Overview dialogue for protection zone measurements
To display the values of measured variables, first select a module (becomes highlighted) and click on the Open measurements window button or alternatively double click on the module. Up to eight measurement windows can be open at the same time. The windows can be arranged under each other by clicking on the Arrange windows button. The display is not updated automatically, it is necessary to click on the Update measurement button. This updates all the measurement windows simultaneously. A warning appears in the measurement window if measurements cannot be correctly performed. Closing the overview window closes all the measurement windows as well.
4-17
4.5.10.
View/Binary inputs/output status
Figure 4.14
Binary input/output status
The binary inputs and outputs are listed in the overview dialogue together with their bay labels and slot numbers. To view a signal status, select the corresponding module and click on the Open status window button or alternatively double click on the module. Up to eight status windows can be open at the same time. They can be arranged under each other by clicking on the Arrange windows button. The display is not updated automatically, it is necessary to click on the Update status button. This updates all the status windows simultaneously. A status window shows either the inputs or the outputs. A 1 in a field indicates that the respective input or output is set and a 0 that it is reset. The statuses of all valid values are green (grey on a monochrome screen). A status of an input or output that has been impressed via the menu Testing/Test mode (see Section 4.5.33.) is yellow (white on a monochrome screen). The statuses of inputs which the monitor has tagged as being invalid are red. This can also occur briefly when the window is opened. Closing the overview window closes all the status windows as well.
4-18
Note: Further details of the signals assigned to the various binary inputs and outputs can be viewed by opening the Configuration menu and selecting Binary modules (see Section 4.5.30. Configuration/Binary module). 4.5.11. View/Switchgear objects This dialogue shows the positions of circuit-breakers and isolators.
Figure 4.15 4.5.12.
Switchgear objects
View/Protection zone circuit-breakers All the circuit-breakers belonging to the respective protection zone are displayed.
4.5.13.
View/Disturbance recorder The current status of every bay unit can be viewed. The sampling frequency can be set to either 600/720 Hz, 1200/1440 Hz or 2400/2880 Hz. Recording can also be started, deleted or transferred manually to the PC in the COMTRADE format (*.cfg). Records have to be explicitly deleted.
4-19
4.5.13.1.
Recording A trigger signal is sent to all the disturbance recorders that have been configured.
4.5.13.2.
COMTRADE It is only possible to access the oldest record for deleting or saving operations. COMTRADE files are saved using the usual Microsoft Windows function Save as which proposes the default file format: dddsssnn.CFG where ddd sss nn Day of the year (1...365) Disturbance recorder station number Consecutive disturbance recorder number.
A file each with the extension *.DAT and one with the extension *.HDR are also created. 4.5.13.3. Deleting Only the oldest record is deleted. 4.5.13.4. Start/Stop This concerns the disturbance recorder function. The trigger is inactive in the Not ready mode and therefore also the disturbance recorder. Providing the disturbance recorder function is configured on several bay units, a number can be selected and their data uploaded in a single operation. This function is also available in the automatic mode which scans the units periodically. For this purpose the Delete disturbance recorder records after successful upload box must be checked.
4-20
Figure 4.16 4.5.14.
Uploading disturbance recorder records
View/Event list Protection system events are shown in chronological order. By correspondingly setting the event filter, just protection events, system events or test events can be viewed separately.
Figure 4.17
Event list
The central unit event list has a maximum length of 1000 and the bay units 100 records. In the event of a supply failure, the events stored in the REB500 central unit remain intact for at least 24 hours.
4-21
4.5.14.1.
Load events The protection system has an event memory for every unit (central unit and bay units). To upload the latest events to the PC, open the View menu and select Event list. This opens the Event list dialogue (the operator program must be in the on-line mode). Click on the Refresh button to upload the events. The protection system stores the events until they are explicitly deleted. The list viewed on the PC is refreshed either on command or cyclically. To specify the refreshing interval, select Tools and then Settings (see Section 4.5.38.). There is no indication should the event memory overflow before the events have been uploaded. The events are updated as determined by the system response setting (see Section 4.5.22 Settings/Event memory). The following information is shown for every event: Type of event P = Protection function event S = System event T = Test generator event Date event occurred Time event occurred Source of event with application, node and device ID Text as entered via Configuration/Binary module Value, e.g. ON or OFF.
The width of the columns can be adjusted by dragging the border with the mouse in the table header. Providing a printer is connected to the PC, you can print the event list by clicking on the Print button. The event list can be saved to a text file on the PC with the aid of ASCII export. 4.5.14.2. Deleting events An event is marked (becomes highlighted) by clicking on it with the mouse and several events by holding the mouse button pressed and moving the pointer over them. Clicking in the blank field at the top left of the window (next to Type) marks all the events in the list.
4-22
Deleting the PC list Mark events you wish to delete and click on the Delete PC list button. Deleting can take several seconds and single events, groups of events or all events can be deleted. Deleting the system list All the events stored in the protection system are deleted. Deleting events that have been viewed All the protection events viewed since opening the window are deleted. System events when starting A number of system signals that are generated when starting the system are recorded as events. Up to the instant that system clocks are automatically synchronised, events may have an incorrect date and time. 4.5.15. View/Reset latching relays
Figure 4.18
Resetting latched tripping and signalling relays
All latched signals are reset and the corresponding display on the local control unit deleted. 4.5.16. Settings/System response See Section 5.4.2. Settings/System response. 4.5.17. Settings/Busbar protection See Section 5.4.3. Settings/Busbar protection (settings and calculations). 4.5.17.1. Settings/Overcurrent release See Section 11.6.3. Overcurrent check. 4.5.17.2. Settings/Undervoltage release See Section 11.6. Enabling the tripping command.
4-23
4.5.18.
Settings/Breaker failure protection The setting dialogue for the breaker failure protection is only available providing the function is part of the scope of supply. See Section 11.1. Breaker failure protection.
4.5.19.
Settings/Overcurrent protection The setting dialogue for the time-overcurrent protection is only available providing the function is part of the scope of supply. See Section 11.3. Time-overcurrent protection.
4.5.20.
Settings/End zone protection The setting dialogue for the end zone protection is only available providing the function is part of the scope of supply. See Section 11.2. End zone protection.
4.5.21.
Settings/CB pole discrepancy The setting dialogue for the CB pole discrepancy function is only available providing it is part of the scope of supply. See Section 11.4. Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function.
4.5.22.
Settings/Event memory See Section 5.4.8. Event memory.
4.5.23.
Settings/Communication Providing the corresponding hardware has been fitted, the busbar protection can communicate with a station automation system (SCS) or station monitoring system (SMS) via the interbay bus connector. See Section 11.8. Interbay bus (IBB) connector.
4.5.24.
Configuration/Activate/deactivate
Entire bay units or individual items of plant can be activated or deactivated, i.e. included in or excluded from the protection system.
See Section 8.1.9.4. Activating and deactivating feeders. 4.5.25. Configuration/Isolators

This menu item permits the isolator labels to be changed.
See Section 5.3.2. Configuration/Isolators.
4-24
4.5.26.
Configuration/Circuit-breaker
This menu item permits the circuit-breaker labels to be changed.
See Section 5.3.3. Configuration/Circuit-breakers. 4.5.27. Configuration/Current transformers

This menu item permits the c.t. labels and ratios to be changed.
See Section 5.3.4. Configuration/Current transformers. 4.5.28. Configuration/Voltage transformers This menu item only appears if the protection system includes v.ts. See options and Section 11.6.1.1. Configuration/Voltage transformers. 4.5.29. Configuration/Device structure See Section 5.3.6. Configuration/Device structure. 4.5.30. Configuration/Binary module See Section 5.3.7. Configuration/Binary module. 4.5.31. Configuration/Disturbance recorder See Section 5.3.8. Configuration/Disturbance recorder. 4.5.32. Configuration/CB inspection See Section 5.3.9. Configuration/CB inspection. 4.5.33. Testing/Test mode Caution: Switching to the test mode while the protection is in operation is not recommended because of the danger of false tripping if the consequences of changing statuses is not fully considered. The test generator is activated by opening the Testing menu, selecting Test mode and entering a valid password. A tick appears next to the menu item, Test mode appears on the status line at the bottom of the screen and the Test mode dialogue appears.
4-25
Note: To enable a start to be made, the password is set to Test when the program is supplied. The test generator is used in conjunction with the Status of binary inputs/outputs dialogue (has to be opened by the operator) (see Section 4.5.10. View/Binary inputs/output status). When the test generator is active, the statuses of the tripping commands cannot change.
Figure 4.19
Test mode
Unblock all relays Clicking on the Unblock all relays button restores the relays to normal operation and their statuses can change again. Caution: An output relay can now be set or reset either directly or indirectly (e.g. via an input or by a protection function). The greatest care must be taken when using the test mode, especially when the protection system is in operation. Block all relays Clicking on the Block all relays button prevents the statuses of all relays for which outputs have been configured from being changed.
4-26
ception of 41810_In service, 41835_Test generator active and 41410_Output relays blocked. Reset all overridden relays Clicking on the Reset all overridden relays button returns all inputs and outputs which have had statuses impressed on them for test purposes to their original states. 4.5.33.1. Purpose of the test generator
Figure 4.20
Test mode
In order to set or reset binary inputs and outputs using the test generator, it is necessary to open the Status of binary inputs/outputs dialogue. Providing the test mode is active, the status of an input or output can be changed by simply doubleclicking on it. The display must then be refreshed by clicking on the Update status button in the Status of binary inputs/outputs dialogue. The test generator is deactivated by clicking on the menu item Test mode a second time. All the relays are then restored to their original statuses, any latching is reset and blocking by the test generator is cancelled. Regardless of whether they are logical 0 or logical 1, inputs and outputs are normally green, those with impressed statuses yellow and invalid ones red. Impressed statuses are green after the display is refreshed.
4-27
Exiting the test generator 4.5.34. Overridden signals are restored to their previous statuses. Latched outputs are reset. All the outputs that were blocked during testing are enabled again.
Testing/Installation mode This mode is activated by opening the Testing menu, selecting Installation mode and entering a valid password. A tick appears next to the menu item, Installation mode is displayed on the status line at the bottom of the screen and the Installation mode dialogue opens. Click on Installation mode in the Testing menu to reset the installation mode. Note: To enable a start to be made, the password is set to Install when the program is supplied.
Figure 4.21
Restart the protection system
4-28
Figure 4.22
Delete database in the protection system
Delete data base in the protection system All the data in the protection system are deleted. Restart the protection system Clicking on the Restart the protection system button reinitialises the protection. Debug mode In the debug mode, the protection system generates additional internal program events. Read traceability information The hardware data (type, serial number, revision index, date of manufacture etc.) and software data (version) are uploaded from the protection equipment and stored in the database to enable previous history to be retraced. 4.5.35. Tools/Version This menu item is for administering the data of the specific protection system such as settings, event texts, configuration of the binary inputs and outputs etc., in the database. Parts of the database can be edited using the REWIN operator program on the PC and then downloaded to the protection. The database has a version number and index that are displayed in the main menu of the local control unit. Version: X.YY, date of the last change, description
4-29
The version is purely numerical, i.e. X {1...9} and Y {1...9}. It is assigned by ABB Power Automation while processing the contract and determined at the time the system is accepted by the user. The user cannot change it subsequently. Index: XX, date of the last change, description The index only comprises letters, i.e. X {A...Z}. The user has the possibility of changing the index and its description if he changes the REB500 settings in order to document and distinguish different sets of settings. When a new index is assigned, the current date on the PC is recorded as the date of the last change.
Figure 4.23 4.5.36.
Version
Tools/Reports
Figure 4.24
Reports
4-30
Open the Tools menu and select Reports to open the Reports selection dialogue containing a list of different kinds of reports.
Either a desired report can be printed on its own or all the reports can be printed by activating the Print all reports check box. The difference between the options in the Printing quality field is that the data are presented in tabular form if the Normal radio button is active. Unless a printer is actually installed on the PC, the Reports menu item is grey and inactive. A printer does not, however, have to be connected. 4.5.37. Tools/Change password This menu item provides facility for changing the passwords giving access to various protected functions (changing settings and activating the test mode or installation mode). Passwords apply to the operator program on the PC and not for the protection system. 4.5.38. 4.5.38.1. Tools/Settings Operator program settings Some of the operator program functions can be customised:
Figure 4.25
Operator program settings
Communication mode This group includes radio buttons for selecting whether the operator program should operate on-line with the protection or in
4-31
the simulation mode without the protection and also the interface (COM port) via which on-line communication should take place. Write DB download/upload log file If these are set to yes, a log file is saved every time the database is downloaded to, respectively uploaded from the protection system. Parameters for reading and exporting event data Settings are provided for the period for cyclically reading events and the separator for an ASCII file when exporting events. 4.5.38.2. Database locations The operator program creates a number of configuration databases. The following dialogue provides facility for defining the directories where the databases are located and changing the database names. Default directories are created during the installation of REBWIN and it is recommended that these not be changed.
Figure 4.26 4.5.39.
Tools/Settings/Database locations
Tools/Set system time The system clock in the protection system is equipped with a standby battery and runs independently with an accuracy of 150 ppm (13 s per day), unless the time is not synchronised periodically by an external reference. The date and time are set by opening the Tools menu and selecting Set system time. The date and time displayed are those effective on the PC.
4-32
The settings in the fields can be incremented or decremented by clicking on the appropriate arrow to the right of the value. After making the necessary changes, click on the Set time button to automatically download the new date and time to the protection system.
Figure 4.27
Setting the system time
This menu item is not available if a communication interface for an station automation system (SCS) is configured. 4.5.40. Tools/MMC session manager
Figure 4.28
MMC session manager
As a rule, this function runs entirely automatically and requires no intervention by the operator. Only if after something untoward happens and an error message is displayed is it necessary to manually close sessions (e.g. if the PC is switched off without correctly shutting down the program). Every transaction involving communication between the operator program and the protection system (e.g. reading the event list or
4-33
setting inputs and outputs using the test generator) is managed as a (DAC) session. Open the Tools menu and select MMC session manager to open a dialogue with a list of open sessions. Mark the sessions which have been aborted and have to be closed and then click on the Close session button. Take care when doing so that no other PC is connected to any other part of the protection system as its communication may also be terminated. The session TGR_Read EMI monitors the main communication between the operator PC and the protection system and must remain open. The operator program must be shut down and restarted should the TGR_Read EMI session be closed by mistake. 4.5.41. Window When several windows are in use, this menu provides facility for arranging them to overlap, under each other or next to each other. 4.5.42. Help (?) About This provides information on the program version and the PC system (available memory etc.).
4-34
4.6.
No. 102
Error messages
Text Write session Exist Cause / Description 1. The same function (e.g. upload events) was called from a second PC. 2. The connection PC/protection system was interrupted without closing the MMC program. Action For 1. Wait till the operation by the other PC is finished. For 2. Close all sessions via the Tools menu and MMC session manager and restart REBWIN (no other PC may be on-line with the protection system). As 102 Check all connections to the protection and repeat the operation. Notify ABB if the error/failure persists. Restart the operator program or PC. Notify ABB if the error/ failure persists. Repeat operation. Switch to test mode.
103 1004
Invalid session TDB_Protocol_ Error
As 102 Communication or internal SW error
1006
TDB_Buffer_Error
Internal SW error
2002 2003
TGR_Is_Busy TGR_No_Session
Function could not be executed. Statuses can only be impressed in the test mode. The configuration data in the open data base do not agree with the effective system configuration.
2004
TGR_Address_ Not_Handled
Check the REBWIN data base (correct plant data base?).
2005
TGR_Confi guration_Error TGR_Not_ Responding
Invalid data downDownload the data to the loaded to the protection protection system again. system. No communication between central and bay units Internal SW error Check the optical fibre cable connections between central and bay units. Notify ABB.
2006
xxxx
Table 4.1
Error messages displayed by the REBWIN operator program
4-35
4.7.
Corrective action (See Section 9 Corrective action)
4.7.1.
DAC error: 102 It is not possible for more than one PC to access the event list at a time. If an operator using a second PC attempts do so, the message DAC error 102 is displayed. With this exception, the limited connection of several PCs is possible.
4.7.2.
Country settings, Code page The ABB engineering department configures all REB500 systems for Code page 850 (multilingual, Latin). The currently active code page can be viewed by entering the DOS command chcp. Please consult the instructions for your operating system for how to change the code page. For example, the entry on the country line in the CONFIG.SYS file could be: country = 041,850,\dos\country.sys
4.7.3.
Available system resources Should your PCs system resources fall below 20 % after starting REBWIN (select About in the Help menu and click on System info), REBWIN may not function correctly. In this case, close all other Windows applications.
4.8.
Deinstallation Run the deinstallation program Unwise.exe in the REBWIN program directory (default C:\Program Files\REB500\REBWIN 5.00US).
4-36
REB500
1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A
June 2000
5.
5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.3.1. 5.3.2. 5.3.3. 5.3.4. 5.3.5. 5.3.6. 5.3.6.1. 5.3.6.2. 5.3.7. 5.3.7.1. 5.3.7.2. 5.3.7.3. 5.3.7.4. 5.3.7.5. 5.3.7.6. 5.3.7.7. 5.3.8. 5.3.8.1. 5.3.8.2. 5.3.8.3. 5.3.8.4. 5.3.9. 5.4. 5.4.1. 5.4.2. 5.4.2.1. 5.4.2.2. 5.4.2.3. 5.4.2.4. 5.4.3. 5.4.3.1. 5.4.3.2. 5.4.3.3. 5.4.3.4.
CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS

Introduction ..............................................................................5-3 View menu .............................................................................5-3 Configuration menu ...............................................................5-4 Configuration/ Activate/deactivate............................................5-4 Configuration/Isolators .............................................................5-4 Configuration/Circuit-breaker ...................................................5-6 Configuration/Current transformers..........................................5-8 Configuration/Voltage transformers..........................................5-8 Configuration/Device structure .................................................5-9 Overview ..................................................................................5-9 Details ......................................................................................5-9 Configuration/Binary module ..................................................5-11 Overview ................................................................................5-11 Binary inputs ..........................................................................5-12 Binary inputs on the bay units ................................................5-17 Binary inputs on the central unit .............................................5-23 Binary outputs ........................................................................5-25 Binary outputs on the bay units ..............................................5-29 Binary outputs on the central unit...........................................5-32 Configuration/Disturbance recorder .......................................5-35 Analogue inputs .....................................................................5-35 Recording...............................................................................5-36 Binary channels......................................................................5-36 Signals ...................................................................................5-37 Configuration/CB inspection...................................................5-40 Settings and calculations .......................................................5-41 Rated frequency (not adjustable) ...........................................5-41 Settings/System response......................................................5-41 System response to a differential current alarm.....................5-41 System response to an isolator alarm ....................................5-41 Isolator alarm delay................................................................5-42 Remote trip impulse width ......................................................5-43 Busbar protection (settings and calculations).........................5-44 Restrained amplitude comparison IKmin and k ...................5-46 Application example ...............................................................5-47 Busbar with just two feeders ..................................................5-49 Busbar with several feeders ...................................................5-49
5-1
REB500
5.4.3.5. 5.4.3.6. 5.4.3.7. 5.4.3.8. 5.4.3.9. 5.4.3.10. 5.4.3.11. 5.4.4. 5.4.5. 5.4.6. 5.4.7. 5.4.8.
Busbar fault with through current ...........................................5-51 Differential current alarm setting ............................................5-53 Differential current alarm delay setting...................................5-54 Neutral current supervision (operating characteristic L0)........5-54 Phase comparison .................................................................5-54 Overcurrent check for enabling tripping .................................5-54 Undervoltage check for enabling tripping ...............................5-55 Breaker backup protection .....................................................5-55 End fault protection ................................................................5-55 Time-overcurrent protection ...................................................5-55 Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function ..............................5-55 Event memory ........................................................................5-55
5-2
REB500
5.
5.1.
CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS

Introduction The REB500 busbar protection system is configured on the basis of the customers specification resulting from his response to a questionnaire. The following information is intended to enable the user to understand the choice of REB500 settings and to follow their calculation. The basic configuration of the REB500 system is performed by ABB. There are some additional settings that the user has to make. In this Section, the various menus and submenus are explained that require settings or the input of text by the user.
5.2.
View menu Single-line diagram:
Figure 5.1
Single-line diagram in the View menu
Right clicking an item opens a dialogue for changing its label.

5-3
REB500
5.3.
Configuration menu
Figure 5.2 5.3.1.
Menu items in the configuration menu
Configuration/ Activate/deactivate This menu item is used to activate or deactivate items of plant in the single-line diagram so that it agrees with the actual state of the primary system (see Section 8.1.9.4. Activating and deactivating feeders).
5.3.2.
Configuration/Isolators Changing isolator labels: Overview
Figure 5.3
Overview tab in the Configuration/Isolator dialogue
5-4
REB500
The Overview tab opens a dialogue with a list of all the isolators in the single-line diagram with their labels and bay unit labels. An isolator in a particular bay can be viewed by activating the check box Feeder filter and selecting a bay from the list. Details
Figure 5.4
Details tab in the Configuration/Isolator dialogue
The label in the Markings field can be edited. The arrows to the left and right of Select isolator at the bottom of the dialogue enable you to scroll through the entire list.
5-5
REB500
5.3.3.
Configuration/Circuit-breaker Changing circuit-breaker labels: Overview
Figure 5.5
Overview tab in the Configuration/Circuit-breakers dialogue
All the feeder circuit-breakers and bus-tie breakers shown in the single-line diagram are listed in this dialogue together with their labels, bay labels, type of circuit-breaker (feeder or bus-tie) and the reclaim time. Details The label in the Label field can be edited and the reclaim time for each circuit-breaker is entered in the corresponding field. The arrows to the left and right of Select breaker at the bottom of the dialogue enable you to scroll through the entire list. Bus-tie breaker In certain operating conditions, the measurement of the current through the bus-tie breaker has to be blocked. This end zone protection acts as a backup for a fault between the bus-tie breaker and the single set of c.ts being used for both protection zones. Blocking the bus-tie measurement after a delay excludes it from the evaluation of fault location so that the current leaving
5-6
REB500
the protection zone to an apparently external fault can no longer prevent tripping. Note: The blocking (reclaim) time is determined as follows: Reclaim time = bus-tie breaker operating time + arc extinction time + 60 ms (60 ms = total transmission time + safety margin)
Parameter Reclaim time
Min. 20
Max. 300
Default 120
Step 20
Unit ms
Table 5.1
Range of the reclaim time setting for circuitbreakers
Figure 5.6
Details tab in the Configuration/Circuit-breakers dialogue
5-7
REB500
5.3.4.
Configuration/Current transformers Changing the c.t. labels and ratios: Overview All the c.ts shown in the single-line diagram are listed in this dialogue. Details
Figure 5.7
Overview tab in the Configuration/Current transforer dialogue
The label in the Markings field can be edited. The ratios in the Transformer ratio fields are entered in terms of the primary and secondary rated currents.
Min. Primary [A] Secondary [A] L1, L2, L3, L0 L1, L2, L3, L0 50 1 Max. 10000 5 Step 1
5.3.5.
Configuration/Voltage transformers This menu item is only available when v.ts are installed (see Section 11 Options).
5-8
REB500
5.3.6.
Configuration/Device structure The device structure is configured by ABB when engineering the system and may only be changed in consultation with ABB.
5.3.6.1.
Overview The central unit and all the bay units are listed together with their labels and type. The desired unit is selected by clicking the mouse on it.
Figure 5.8
Overview tab in the Configuration/Device structure dialogue
5.3.6.2.
Details Details shows the function and ABB reference for every type of module. The node ID indicates the assignment of the module on the process bus.
5-9
REB500
Bay unit
Figure 5.9
Details tab for a bay unit in the Configuration/Device structure dialogue
Central unit
Figure 5.10 Details tab for the central unit in the Configuration/Device structure dialogue
5-10
REB500
The list for the central unit shows whether the modules are masked or unmasked. Refer to Section 3.2.6.2. Central unit modules for further information. 5.3.7. Configuration/Binary module This dialogue is used while engineering the protection system to configure the binary modules. The data entered is normally provided in the questionnaire filled in by the user. The window has three tabs: 5.3.7.1. Overview Inputs Outputs
Overview
Figure 5.11 Overview tab in the Configuration/Binary module dialogue The overview tab opens a list with all the binary I/O modules for which the following information is given: ABB ref. (ABB designation for the bay or central unit)
5-11
REB500
Bay Device Slot No.
(in which the bay unit is located, users label for the bay) (label) (module location in the bay or central unit)
Module type (designation). These attributes can only be viewed by clicking on Select module or the arrow keys but not changed.
5.3.7.2.
Binary inputs The overview provides facility for entering the auxiliary supply voltage (battery voltage) and viewing the assignment of the binary inputs. The Details dialogue enables the opto-coupler inputs to be assigned to the logical input signals and the event memories to the respective input and output units. Overview (of input signals for each device)
Figure 5.12 Central unit inputs in the Configuration/Binary module dialogue
5-12
REB500
Figure 5.13 Bay unit inputs in the Configuration/Binary module dialogue The upper part of this dialogue contains a general layout of the respective module. The auxiliary supply voltage for each group of opto-couplers (with a common pole) is entered below this. All the input signals assigned to the module are listed. The abbreviations C.i and O.x denote the CLOSE and OPEN auxiliary contacts on the isolator or circuit-breaker respectively as shown in the properties window. Deleting a signal The assignment of a signal is cancelled by marking it in the window and clicking on the Delete button.
5-13
REB500
Details
Figure 5.14 Details tab for bay unit inputs in the Configuration/Binary module dialogue The configuration data of the individual inputs are shown in the Details dialogue. These include the contact mode, opto-coupler number and whether inverted or not inverted. Two inputs should be assigned to an isolator or circuit-breaker signal, one for the OPEN contact and one for the CLOSED contact. Where an isolator or a circuit-breaker is only equipped with a single auxiliary contact, the One auxiliary contact mode must be selected. This mode is not recommended because the status of the isolator or circuit-breaker cannot be properly monitored with just one auxiliary contact. The signals are configured at the time the protection system is engineered and are generally not changed subsequently. Only the CLOSED signal field is visible when the One auxiliary contact mode is selected. The function of the OPEN signal is achieved by inverting the CLOSED signal. In this case, we recommend connecting the auxiliary contact supply to the corresponding input so that its integrity is supervised.
5-14
REB500
Minimum input signal duration Provision is made for prolonging the input signals in steps of 1 ms. New signal
Figure 5.15 New input signal button in the Configuration/Binary module dialogue The New signal button opens a dialogue with a list for selecting and adding a new signal. Clicking on the arrow button to the right of the signal name field opens a list of the signals available for the particular module. Click on OK to confirm the choice or on Cancel to close the window without making a choice. The Details dialogue opens automatically upon clicking on the OK button. The new signal can now be assigned to an opto-coupler and inverted if necessary. Caution: To preserve computing capacity, not more than four input signals should be assigned to one opto-coupler.
5-15
REB500
Central unit signals
Figure 5.16 Assignment of inputs in the Configuration/Binary module dialogue Most central unit signals can only be assigned once. There are two input signals (31105_External TRIP BB zone and 31805_External release BB zone) per section of busbar (bus zone) and the latter must be stated when one of these signals is selected. Event configuration
Figure 5.17 Configuring events in the Configuration/Binary module dialogue

5-16
REB500
Every signal can be declared to be an event and recorded when it occurs in one or several event memories (see Section 5.4.8. Event memory). It is possible to configure a signal as an event in either the Overview window or the Details dialogue. First select the signal (one line) and then click on the Event config. button to open the Configuration of events dialogue. More input fields appear when the Recording radio button is selected which enable the event to be recorded on the positive or negative-going edge or on both edges. The corresponding edge must be selected and a text (up to 20 characters) can be entered for it. If none is entered the system assigns a default event text. At least one event memory in the Send event to (= save event in) field must also be selected. Configuring opto-coupler events Apart from events generated by function signals, a physical input can also be configured as an event. This is of advantage, for example, when several signals are assigned to a physical input or when ambivalent signals from isolators or circuit-breakers need to be recorded. These can be assigned in either the Overview or Details dialogue. First select an opto-coupler in the overview window by clicking on it above the signal list (column marked). Now click on the OC event config. button to open the Configuration of events window. 5.3.7.3. Binary inputs on the bay units The following input signals are listed in the same order they appear in the selection list of the operator program on the PC. 11105_External TRIP This signal is a tripping command received from another protection device (including one in the remote station) and is used for the REB500 tripping contact to trip faults on a line or a power transformer. The External TRIP signal generally only effects the circuitbreaker of the feeder concerned. The response for special busbar configurations is as follows:
5-17
REB500
1 breaker schemes: Both circuit-breakers connected to the feeder concerned are tripped. Bypass busbar: An External TRIP command that trips circuit-breaker Q0 on feeder 1 does not isolate the fault if isolator Q7 is closed (bypass mode). Circuit-breaker Q0 on feeder 2 is therefore tripped automatically to fully isolate the fault. Bypass isolator across circuit-breaker: An External TRIP command trips the local circuit-breaker Q0 on feeder 1. This, however, does not interrupt the fault current, because the bypass isolator Q7 is across the breaker, and therefore the busbar protection intertrips busbar 3.
Busbar 1 Busbar 2 Busbar 3 Bypass Q7
Q0
Q0
Feeder 1
Feeder 2
Figure 5.18 Bypass mode
5-18
REB500
Busbar 1 Busbar 2 Busbar 3
Q0
Q7
Feeder 1
Figure 5.19 Isolator across the circuit-breaker 11110_External TRIP BB zone This input is used when an external signal has to trip an entire bus zone. It is applied to all the bay units of the bus zone. Sections of busbars connected by an isolator trip together (intertripping). 11205_Block all A signal applied to this input blocks all the protection functions, External Trip, tripping by the busbar protection and intertripping of the respective bay unit. 11210_Block output relays All the output contacts configured for a bay unit are blocked. 11215_Ext. measurement disturbed This signal is active when invalid analogue values are detected. The busbar protection (i.e. the specific protection zone of the busbar) and all the local protection functions are blocked. If the disturbance lasts longer than 400 ms, an event is generated (BBP Minor Error 7). This input should only be used in special cases and only when engineering a REB500 system.
5-19
REB500
11505_Close command CB The circuit-breaker close command has to be used for bus-tie breakers to control the REB500 measuring system. It is also used when the end zone protection is configured. 11510...11525_Supervision aux. voltage_x The supervision of the auxiliary supply is configured when the compliance of the auxiliary contacts on the isolators with the required switching sequence cannot be guaranteed and for this reason the Not CLOSED = OPEN logic has to be used. These signals ensure that the protection responds correctly should the auxiliary supply to the isolators fail. This signal is only applicable in the case of Not CLOSED = OPEN! 11530_Circuit breaker/Isolator-off/on The position of a circuit-breaker or an isolator is signalled by one or two auxiliary contacts. The statuses CLOSED, OPEN and Isolator alarm are determined from the positions of the auxiliary contacts. It is necessary to know the positions of circuit-breakers and isolators in order to: generate and image of the busbar configuration detect faults in the end zone between an open circuit-breaker and the c.ts. (CB position).
Refer to Section 3.5 Technical specification for the technical requirements to be fulfilled. 11605_External release Trip Providing they have been configured, a signal applied to this input enables tripping by the busbar protection and the intertripping function in the bay unit (AND logic of tripping and enabling signals). The input has no influence on other protection functions. This input can be used in special cases to interlock tripping by the protection by, for example, an external undervoltage relay. 11610_External reset Tripping commands and signals can be configured to latch after picking up, in which case they must be reset by applying a signal to this input. It also resets the text display and LEDs on the local control unit. A reset signal resets the entire system.
5-20
REB500
11615, 11625, 11635, 11645_Inspection_x-Off These inspection inputs (x = 1...4) activate the isolator or circuitbreaker inspection mode for the cases 1 to 4. As with the isolator inputs for the busbar image, two anticoincident signals can be connected to these inputs. The last valid position is maintained and a failure is signalled on the local control panel on the bay unit if both inputs are the same. Should only one inspection signal be available, the Revision_x-On input must be configured and the signal applied to it (see Section 3.4.1.5. Inspection and maintenance). 11620, 11630, 11640, 11650_Inspection_x-On These inspection inputs (x = 1...4) activate the isolator or circuitbreaker inspection mode. They must be used should only one inspection input be available. 11655_Maintenance-Off Anti-coincident maintenance input. Refer to the description for the Inspection_x-Off signals. 11660_Maintenance-On This input is excited by the maintenance function. It is used should only one maintenance signal be available. Refer to Section 8. Operation and maintenance for a detailed description of the maintenance function. 11765_General Start DR This input must be configured as an event and not assigned to an opto-coupler input to achieve a general start of the disturbance recorder. It is normally configured at the works, but can also be configured on site using REBWIN. 13205_Block BFP The operation of the breaker failure protection is blocked for the corresponding bay unit. When the blocking signal is cancelled, the timers start again at t = 0. 13605_Trip transferred The circuit-breaker sets this input when it cannot open, for example, because the air pressure is too low or there is a leak in the case of GIS (Alarm Stage 3 - Circuit-breaker blocked).
5-21
REB500
A tripping signal is then transferred to the adjacent breakers and possibly the remote station. This function requires that the BFP be configured. 13705_External Start BFP A signal applied to this input starts the breaker failure protection timer (independently of the overcurrent measurement). 13710...13735_Start BFP Lp_x Phase-selective (p = 1...3) starting of the breaker failure protection with two inputs per phase (x = 1 or 2). The breaker failure timer is started by this input signal providing the current in the respective phase is above pick-up. 13740...13765_Start BFP L1L2L3_x Three-phase starting of the breaker failure protection by six inputs (x = 1...6). The breaker failure timer is started by a signal at one of these inputs providing the current in at least one phase is high enough. 14205_Block EFP The operation of the end fault protection is blocked for the corresponding bay unit. When the blocking signal is cancelled, the timers start again at t = 0. 15210_Block OCDT The operation of the time-overcurrent function is blocked. When the blocking signal is cancelled, the timer starts again at t = 0. 16705...16750_Start DR_x The disturbance recorder function is started by an external signal applied to one of these 10 inputs (x = 1...10), or they can be simply used for recording purposes. The external signal may come, for example, from the tripping contact of a line protection relay or the starting contact of a time-overcurrent relay. Optocouplers are configured for these inputs. 17205 Block PDF The operation of the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection is blocked. The timers start at t = 0 again when the input resets.
5-22
REB500
17710 Start PDF The circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection is started by an external signal applied to this input. 5.3.7.4. Binary inputs on the central unit The following input signals are listed in the same order they appear in the selection list of the operator program. 31105_External TRIP BB zone (BB zone tripped by external signal) A busbar section can be tripped by a signal applied to this input. Up to 32 sections can be addressed. One input can be configured for each section. Sections connected by isolators are tripped together (intertripping). 31205_Block all A signal applied to this input blocks all the protection functions including External Trip and intertripping. 31210_Block output relays All the output contacts configured for the central unit and all the bay units are blocked. 31215_Block IEC master direction REB500 does not transfer any events, error messages, measurements etc., to the master station via the station bus IEC 60870-5-103 when this input is active. 31505_Accept bus image alarm This signal acknowledges (resets) an isolator alarm. If it is continuously active, a new isolator alarm is immediately reset. 31805_External release BB zone This input enables the tripping signal for a section of busbar (AND gate with tripping and enabling inputs). One of these inputs can be configured for each busbar section. The entire protection zone surrounding the busbar section is enabled (transfer tripping). Sections connected by isolators are also enabled (transfer tripping). The input can be used in special cases, for example, to interlock the tripping signal by an undervoltage relay. This will generally delay tripping.
5-23
REB500
31810_External reset Tripping commands and signals can be configured to latch and when they are, they are reset by a signal applied to this input. The same signal also resets the LEDs (alarm and tripping). The reset signal applies to the entire system. 31815_Ext. superv. in service_1 Input for monitoring any fans, external supplies etc. The signal 22010_Alarm is set in the central unit when this signal changes from logical 1 to 0. 31820_Ext. superv. in service_2 Input for monitoring any fans, external supplies etc. The signal 22010_Alarm is set in the central unit when this signal changes from logical 1 to 0. 31825_Time synchronisation Clock synchronisation input. Synchronisation takes place on the positive edge of a minute impulse. The minute impulse must be at least 20 ms wide. 32205_Block BBP The entire busbar protection function is blocked. 33210_Block BFP The operation of the breaker failure protection is blocked throughout the busbar protection system. When the blocking signal is cancelled, the timers start again at t = 0 providing the current is higher than setting. 34215_Block EFP The operation of the end fault protection is blocked throughout the busbar protection system. When the blocking signal is cancelled, the timers start again at t = 0 providing the circuit-breaker is open and the current is higher than setting. 35220_Block OCDT The operation of the time-overcurrent function is blocked throughout the busbar protection system. When the blocking signal is cancelled, the timers start again at t = 0.
5-24
REB500
36705_General Start DR Providing they have been configured, the disturbance recorder functions in all the bay units are started by this input. The signal General start disturbance recorder must also be configured in the bay units. 37205_Block PDF This signal blocks the operation of the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function throughout the system. The PDF timers start at t = 0 again when this signal resets. 5.3.7.5. Binary outputs The procedures for configuring binary inputs and outputs are almost identical. Therefore only the differences are dealt with in this Section. Overview (output signals available on each device)
Figure 5.20 Configuring CU outputs in the Configuration/Binary module dialogue
5-25
REB500
Figure 5.21 Overview of BU outputs in the Configuration/Binary module dialogue The overview of the BU outputs shows which signals are assigned to which output relays. A signal can be assigned to up to four output relays (e.g. BBP TRIP to CR01, 02 and 03) and an output relay can be controlled by several signals (e.g. output relay CR07 by A1.REMOTE TRIP, A1.BFP REMOTE TRIP and , A1.EFP REMOTE TRIP). For reasons of safety, it is impossible to mix tripping commands and signals, i.e. tripping commands can only be combined with tripping commands and control signals with control signals. Tripping commands: 21105_EXTERNAL TRIP 21110_TRIP 23105_BFP TRIP 25105_OCDT TRIP 27105_PDF TRIP
The remaining signals and all the CU signals are control signals.
5-26
REB500
Details
Figure 5.22 Details of CU outputs in the Configuration/Binary module dialogue
Figure 5.23 Details of BU outputs in the Configuration/Binary module dialogue This dialogue applies for three functions or input fields.
5-27
REB500
Signal delay Every output signal can be configured either to latch (until reset by a signal) or to have a defined reset delay. A reset delay can be entered in the field t and can be incremented by clicking with the mouse. Blocking output signals throughout the system In the case of all the output signals being blocked by the selfsupervision function or a signal applied to the blocking CU or BU input Block output relays, the statuses of the selected output signals cannot change. This setting determines whether a signal is really blocked of is generated anyway. Relay output The current signal is assigned to the output relays with checked check boxes. Other signals of the same type (tripping command or control signal) may also be assigned to the same relay. Unavailable output relays (grey) already have signals of the other type assigned to them. The remaining relays are available for other signals. New signal Same as for the binary inputs (see Section 5.3.7.3. Binary inputs on the bay units). Central unit signals Most of the CU signals only occur once. There is an output signal Trip BB zone for each section of busbar (bus zone), therefore the respective zone must be given when selecting this signal. Delete Same as for the binary inputs (see Section 5.3.7.3. Binary inputs on the bay units). Configuring events An output relay event is configured in the same way as an input signal event. An event is generated when the output signal is set and reset.
5-28
REB500
Configuring output relay events An event is generated when an output relay picks up or resets, i.e. this type of event takes any reset delay that has been set or blocking by another signal into account. Select an output relay in the overview dialogue first by clicking on its label above the signal list (its column is then highlighted). Now open the event configuration dialogue by clicking on the CR event config. button. As in the case of the binary input signals in Section 5.3.7.2., the binary output signals are configured at the works. 5.3.7.6. Binary outputs on the bay units The following output signals are listed in the same order they appear in the selection list of the operator program. 21105_EXTERNAL TRIP Tripping command generated by the external input 11105_EXTERNAL TRIP. 21110_TRIP Tripping command generated by the intertripping function (BBP, BFP t2 etc.). 21115_Remote TRIP Tripping command issued to the remote station by the functions busbar protection, breaker failure protection, end fault protection and the EXTERNAL TRIP command. In the case of a 1 breaker scheme, the signal Remote TRIP is dependent on the busbar protection, breaker failure protection and end fault protection, i.e. remote tripping can only take place if the breaker failure function is configured. Remote tripping can only take place if a fault cannot be cleared by the circuit-breaker in the bay concerned. This applies in the following cases: 1 breaker schemes Bypass operation with the bus tie breaker being used for a feeder Circuit-breaker bypassed by an isolator
5-29
REB500
21305_Trip Signals tripping by the bay unit and can be set by any of the protection functions. 21405_All blocked Signals that all the protection functions including External Trip and intertripping are blocked. 21410_Output relays blocked All the output contacts configured in the bay unit concerned are blocked. 21805_In service Signal set by the diagnostic function that shows that a bay unit is operational and standing by. 21810_Loss of supply voltage This signals a failure of the isolator auxiliary voltage (Supervision aux. voltage_x) in the bay unit. 21815_Inspection/maintenance Signals that an inspection or maintenance input is set on the bay unit. 22405_BBP blocked Signals that the busbar protection function is blocked. 23105_BFP TRIP Trip generated by the breaker failure protection. 23110_BFP remote TRIP Tripping command issued to the remote station by the breaker failure protection. This signal can be assigned to an output contact by the signal Remote TRIP. 23305_BFP trip t1 Signals tripping by the breaker failure protection after time 1. 23310_BFP trip t2 Signals tripping by the breaker failure protection after time 2.
5-30
REB500
23315_BFP trip L1 Signals that the breaker failure protection detected a fault on phase L1 and has tripped. 23320_BFP trip L2 Signals that the breaker failure protection detected a fault on phase L2 and has tripped. 23325_BFP trip L3 Signals that the breaker failure protection detected a fault on phase L3 and has tripped. 23330_Trip transferred Signals that tripping has been redirected. The input Trip transferred must be set and a trip command must be active. 23335_Trip by BFP Signals that the breaker failure protection has issued an intertripping command. 23405_BFP blocked Signals that the breaker failure protection is blocked (either the bay or the whole system). 24105_EFP remote TRIP Tripping command issued by the end fault protection. 24305_EFP trip Signals that the end fault protection has tripped. 24405_EFP blocked Signals that the end fault protection is blocked (either the bay or the whole system). 25105_OCDT TRIP Tripping command issued by the time-overcurrent function. 25405_OCDT blocked Signals that the time-overcurrent protection is blocked (either the bay or the whole system).
5-31
REB500
26805_DR ready Signals that the disturbance recorder is standing by. 26810_DR memory full Signals that the disturbance recorder memory is full. 26815_DR recording Signals that the disturbance recorder is in the process of recording. 26820_DR record available Signals that disturbance records are available. 27105_PDF TRIP Tripping command by the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function. 27305_PDF Trip Signals tripping by the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function. 27405_PDF blocked Signals that the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function is blocked. 5.3.7.7. Binary outputs on the central unit All the outputs generated by the central unit are signals for control or information. They are listed in the same order they appear in the selection list of the operator program. 41305_Trip BB zone (busbar designation) Signals which busbar sections have been tripped. An output can be configured for each busbar section which is then correspondingly designated. There are as many output relays as there are busbar zones and where the number of busbar zones is high, a second BIO module is needed. 41310_Trip transferred Signals that tripping has been redirected by the input Trip transferred on a bay unit.
5-32
REB500
41405_All blocked Signals that all the protection functions including External Trip, busbar protection and intertripping are blocked. 41410_Output relays blocked All the output contacts that are configured are blocked. 41505_Isolator alarm This signal indicates that at least one isolator or circuit-breaker is not reporting a defined position (neither CLOSED nor OPEN). It is issued at the end of the set time delay and is reset by the input Acknowledge isolator alarm, respectively set again by the next isolator alarm. 41805_Alarm This signal is set in the following cases: Supply failure Failure or disturbance of a central unit module Failure of the communication with a bay unit Failure of a bay unit Failure of a bay unit function Error when refreshing the data in the protection system Communication error in the central unit Ext. superv. in service_1/2 not set.
41805_In service Signal set by the diagnostic function that shows that the central unit is operational and standing by. 41815_Diff. current alarm The differential current of a protection zone exceeded the set alarm level during the preset interval. 41820_Loss of supply voltage Signals the failure of the isolator auxiliary supply on a bay unit (Supervision aux. voltage_x). It is used in conjunction with Not OPEN = CLOSED.
5-33
REB500
41825_Inspection/maintenance Signals that an inspection or maintenance input is set on one of the protection units. 41830_Switch inhibit This signal appears together with Isolator alarm. No switching of the primary system may take place as long as this signal is active, because the image of the primary system in the protection would not then correspond to the actual situation. 41835_Test generator active Signals that the test generator is active, i.e. the test generator is in use somewhere on the busbar protection system. 42305_BBP trip Signals that the busbar protection has tripped. 42310_BBP trip L0 Signals that a fault was detected on phase L0 and the busbar protection has tripped. 42315_BBP trip L1 Signals that a fault was detected on phase L1 and the busbar protection has tripped. 42320_BBP trip L2 Signals that a fault was detected on phase L2 and the busbar protection has tripped. 42325_BBP trip L3 Signals that a fault was detected on phase L3 and the busbar protection has tripped. 42405_BBP blocked Signals that the busbar protection is blocked. 43305_BFP trip t1 Signals that the breaker failure protection tripped in time step 1. 43310_BFP trip t2 Signals that the breaker failure protection tripped in time step 2.
5-34
REB500
43405_BFP blocked Signals that the breaker failure protection is blocked (either a bay unit or the entire system). 44305_EFP trip Signals that the end fault protection has tripped. 44405_EFP blocked Signals that the end fault protection is blocked (either a bay unit or the entire system). 45305_OCDT trip Signals that the time-overcurrent protection has tripped. 45405_OCDT blocked Signals that the time-overcurrent protection is blocked (either a bay unit or the entire system). 45805_OCDT start Signals that one of the feeder time-overcurrent functions has picked up. 47305_PDF Trip Signals tripping by the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function. 47405_PDF blocked Signals that the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function is blocked (either just the bay or the whole system). 5.3.8. 5.3.8.1. Configuration/Disturbance recorder Analogue inputs The currents measured by the four analogue inputs are always recorded. The four voltage inputs may only be recorded providing they have been licensed and engineered (optional). The recording time is doubled if the voltage channels are not activated.
5-35
REB500
The dialogue has three tabs: Configuration The configuration dialogue shows a bay unit together with its recording mode and signals. Overview The overview shows all the bay units and their basic disturbance recorder configurations. A bay unit is selected by clicking on it with the mouse. License status The license dialogue lists all the bay units and the duration of recording. 5.3.8.2. Recording The following disturbance recorder settings can be made:
Sampling frequency 600/720 Hz, 1200/1440 Hz or 2400/2880 Hz. The maximum recording time is automatically adjusted to suit.
Number of records n The maximum recording time available is divided by this setting into n equal time periods. For example, assuming 3 records have to be made and a maximum recording time of 6 seconds, 3 records of 2 seconds each can be recorded. Acquisition time This setting determines how much time before the triggering point is included in the record. The total recording time is at least 0.5 s. Of this, at least 0.2 s are pre-event time and therefore at least 0.3 s post-event time. In the event of overflow Response of the disturbance recorder should the memory overflow.
5.3.8.3.
Binary channels All binary signals (input, output or internal signal) can be recorded. For this purpose, they must be configured for recording and identified by their signal labels.
5-36
REB500
The name is used for identification in the COMTRADE file during recording. The user has the possibility to edit the labels as necessary.
Figure 5.24 Configuration and recording tabs in the Configuration/Disturbance recorder dialogue
5.3.8.4.
Signals Up to 32 binary signals per bay can be selected for recording. Of these, up to 12 can be configured to trigger the start of recording. Triggering can take place on the lagging or leading edge of a signal. If both edges is selected, both lagging and leading edges are active. Once recording has been started, the complete recording period that has been set is recorded. In addition to the normal bay unit binary signals, there are up to ten general purpose input signals that can be configured for recording and for triggering the disturbance recorder.
5-37
REB500
Figure 5.25 Configuration and signals tabs in the Configuration/Disturbance recorder dialogue
Figure 5.26 Overview tab in the Configuration/Disturbance recorder dialogue Only the bay units engineered for the station are available for configuration.
5-38
REB500
Figure 5.27 License status tab in the Configuration/Disturbance recorder dialogue
Trigger operation Recording commences when at least one of the triggering conditions is fulfilled. The trigger then remains disabled until the record has been completed and is then enabled again. You must therefore set the recording period such that all the signals you want to record can be recorded. Caution: The trigger inputs are scanned every 16 ms. A trigger signal must therefore be at least 16 ms long to be certain that it will be detected.
5-39
REB500
5.3.9.
Configuration/CB inspection The plant inspection and maintenance records are displayed.
Figure 5.28 Overview tab in the Configuration/CB inspection dialogue
5-40
REB500
5.4.
Settings and calculations Settings menu This menu accesses the system and protection function parameters and the corresponding setting instructions are given below.
5.4.1.
Rated frequency (not adjustable) The rated frequency of the protection system (50 or 60 Hz) is entered while engineering the system. It is recorded in the report General plant data (see Section 4.5.36. Tools/Reports).
5.4.2. 5.4.2.1.
Settings/System response System response to a differential current alarm After selecting the menu item System response in the Settings menu, a dialogue opens that permits you to select how the system should react in the event of a differential current alarm: Continue in operation The busbar protection continues to function regardless of the differential current alarm. Block busbar protection Operation of the entire busbar protection is blocked. Selective block busbar protection (preferred) Operation of the busbar protection is only blocked for the section of busbar (protection zone) concerned.
5.4.2.2.
System response to an isolator alarm the same dialogue also permits the response of the system to be determined in the event of an isolator alarm: Continue in operation The busbar protection continues to function regardless of the isolator alarm. Block busbar protection Operation of the entire busbar protection is blocked.
5-41
REB500
Selective block busbar protection and intertripping (preferred) Operation of the busbar protection is only blocked for the section of busbar (protection zone) concerned.
Figure 5.29
Settings/System response dialogue
The radio buttons enable the desired response of the system in the event of a differential current or an isolator alarm to be selected. The setting for the isolator operating time applies for all the isolators and switches in the system. The protection can be configured such that in the event of a differential current or an isolator alarm, only the protection zone directly involved is blocked (selective blocking). The setting for Remote trip impulse width limits the duration of a transfer tripping signal sent to the remote end of the line (see Section 5.4.2.4. Remote trip impulse width). 5.4.2.3. Isolator alarm delay The busbar protection REB500 has a common alarm circuit and timer for monitoring the operation of all the isolators and bus-tie breakers. Note: The time delay must be set longer than the slowest isolator operating time.
5-42
REB500
5.4.2.4.
Remote trip impulse width The busbar and where configured, the breaker failure and end fault protection functions can send an intertripping signal to a remote station via PLC or optical fibre communication channel. The duration of the impulse usually has to be limited.
Parameter Remote trip impulse width Min. 100 Max. 2000 Default 200 Step 10 Unit ms
Table 5.2
Setting range of the remote trip impulse width
Note: The typical duration of the remote tripping impulse is 200 ms.
5-43
REB500
5.4.3.
Busbar protection (settings and calculations) The following parameters can be set using the REBWIN operator program:
Parameter IKmin Op. char. L1, L2, L3 k Op. char. L1, L2, L3 Differential current alarm Op. char. L1, L2, L3 Delay (differential current alarm) Op. char. L1, L2, L3 IKmin Op. char. L0 k Op. char. L0 Differential current alarm Op. char. L0 Delay (differential current alarm) Op. char. L0 Min. 500 Max. 6000 Default Step 1000 100 Unit A
0.7
0.9
0.80
0.05
50
10
% IKmin
50
100
6000
300
100
0.7
0.9
0.80
0.05
50
10
% IKmin
50
10
Table 5.3
Busbar protection settings
5-44
REB500
Figure 5.30
Settings/System response dialogue
The operating characteristic shown in the above dialogue only applies for the restrained current amplitude comparison algorithm. There are no settings for the phase comparison algorithm.
Parameter Overcurrent check Setting (overcurrent check, if active) 0.1 4,0 Min. Max. Default Step inactive 0.7 0.1 IN Unit
Table 5.4
Settings for the overcurrent check feature
The overcurrent check feature is a local bay function that only influences intertripping commands (i.e. busbar protection trips and intertripping by the central unit) and tripping by the breaker failure protection. L1, L2, L3 operating characteristic This dialogue is for entering the parameters applicable to the phase fault operating characteristic. To change a value, click on the arrow button to the right to open a list of possible settings and then click on the desired value. Click on the OK or Apply
5-45
REB500
button to confirm the setting, or on Restore or Cancel to reject it. L0 operating characteristic The procedure for setting the ground fault characteristic is the same as for phase faults. This dialogue is only available providing a neutral current measurement has be configured. 5.4.3.1. Restrained amplitude comparison IKmin and k The restrained amplitude comparison algorithm detects an internal fault when the settings for IKmin and k are exceeded. A tripping command is only issued, however, providing the phase comparison function detects an internal fault at the same time. Note: The pick-up setting for the fault current (IKmin) must be less (80 %) than the lowest fault current that can occur on the busbars (IKMS). There is a risk of the protection being too insensitive at higher settings. Providing the minimum fault current (IKMS) is high enough, IKmin should be set higher than the maximum load current. If the c.ts saturate at the minimum fault current, the feeder currents have to be reduced by a factor cR. The corrected current values form the basis for calculating the setting for IKmin. The reduction factor cR is calculated as follows: For a power system time constant TN 120 ms: CR = 0.45 + 0.55 e
IK 0.3IN n'
For a power system time constant 120 ms < TN 300 ms: CR = 0.2 + 0.8 e In both cases:
n' = n PN + PE PB + PE
IK 0.5IN n'
where CR
reduction factor due to the power system time constant
5-46
REB500
IK IN TN n n' PB PE PN 5.4.3.2.
in this case, the vectorial sum of feeder fault and load currents for an internal fault c.t. rated current power system time constant rated overcurrent factor effective overcurrent factor power consumption of the burden at rated current c.t. losses c.t. rated power
Application example The minimum busbar fault current is 1300 A and is supplied by two feeders. The time constant TN of the power system is 80 ms. Feeder 1: Contribution to minimum fault current: 800 A C.ts: Ratio: Class: PB: PE: PN: 200 A/1 A 5P10 6 VA 5 VA 10 VA
n' = 10
10VA + 5VA = 13.6 6VA + 5VA

800 A 0.3200 A13.6
CR = 0.45 + 0.55 e
= 0.66
Feeder 2: Contribution to minimum fault current: 500 A C.ts: Ratio: Class: PB: PE: PN: 400 A/1 A 5P20 6 VA 8 VA 20 VA
n' = 20
20 VA + 8 VA = 40 6 VA + 8 VA
5-47

500 A 0.3400 A40
REB500
CR = 0.45 + 0.55 e
= 0.95
Reduced fault current IKR: IKR = 800 A 0.66 + 500 A 0.95 = 1003 A IKmin setting: IKmin = 1003 A 0.8 = 802 A The factor k is normally set to 0.80. Numerous test on a network model have shown this setting to be the most favourable.
Figure 5.31 Operating characteristic of the restrained amplitude comparison function During a through-fault and normal operation, it is impossible for the differential (operating) current to be higher than the restraint current. Other parameters may also influence the setting in extreme cases and these are explained in the following examples.
5-48
REB500
5.4.3.3.
Busbar with just two feeders
Busbar IB Feeder 1 IB Feeder 2
Figure 5.32 Busbar with two feeders Assuming a fault on the c.t. secondary of feeder 1 or 2 (c.t. open or short-circuit), false tripping can be prevented by settings which satisfy the inequality: IKmin > IB The fault current setting IKmin must be higher than the load current IB. 5.4.3.4. Busbar with several feeders
Busbar IB1=2 kA Feeder 1

(infeed)
IB2=1.7 kA Feeder 2
IB3=0.3 kA
Feeder 3
Figure 5.33 Busbar with three feeders a) C.t. circuit fault on feeder 1 The c.t. circuit fault simulates a fault on the busbars with a current I = IB2 + IB3 = 2 kA. False tripping can be avoided with a setting which satisfies the inequality: IKmin > 2 kA (e.g. the next higher setting 2.1 kA)
5-49
REB500
b) C.t. circuit fault on feeder 2 The c.t. circuit fault in this case simulates a fault on the busbars with a fault current I = IB2 - IB3 = 1.7 kA and the value calculated for the quotient k becomes: k= I I I 17 . = B1 B3 = = 0.74 I IB1 + IB3 2.3
False tripping can thus be avoided with settings for IKmin and/or k which satisfy the inequalities: IKmin > 1.7 kA and/or k > 0.74 c) C.t. circuit fault on feeder 3 This case corresponds to case b), but the values for I and k are lower: I = IB1 - IB2 = 0.3 kA
k= IB1 IB2 0.3 = = 0.081 i.e. IB1 + IB2 3.7
k 0.7
A c.t. circuit fault under normal load conditions cannot cause false tripping. d) Influence of the phase comparison function Tripping can only take place when both functions (restrained amplitude comparison and phase comparison) detect an internal fault. The decision reached be the phase comparison function is therefore of no consequence in the cases illustrated in this section. e) Summary Considering case a), the pick-up setting for the fault current in the example given must be: IKmin > 2 kA This is the only setting which will prevent tripping in the case of a).
5-50
REB500
Both settings, k = 0.80 and IKmin > 1.7 kA prevent tripping in case b). A dangerous setting is impossible in case c). Assuming a minimum fault current higher than 2.1 kA (see case a)), the settings for the above example become: IKmin > 2.1 kA k = 0.80 For a minimum fault current lower than 2.1 kA or even lower than the maximum load current of 2 kA, the setting of IKmin can result in both a failure of the protection to trip when it should or a false trip: With a setting of IKmin > 2 kA, the protection in the above example would not detect a minimum fault current of 2 kA (excluding a c.t. fault). With a setting of IKmin < 2 kA, a fault in the c.t. circuit according to case a) would cause a false trip.
The best solution in this situation is to set IKmin to 80 % of the minimum fault current (IKMS). 5.4.3.5. Busbar fault with through current In certain circumstances, it is possible for currents to flow away from the busbars during a busbar fault. Two examples of this are discussed below. a) Through current Busbar fault
IK1
IK2
IK3
IR
Figure 5.34 Busbar fault with through current IR
I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 IR = IK IR I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 + IR = IK + IR
5-51
REB500
k=
I I I = K R I IK + IR
The busbar protection will only trip providing the total fault current (IK) exceeds a certain minimum: k IK Table 5.5 0.9 19 0.85 12.4 0.8 9 0.75 7 0.7 5.7 IR
Minimum internal fault current to ensure tripping
For the phase comparison function not to prevent tripping, the low current check for including feeder currents in the phase comparison (see Section 3.3.2.2. Phase comparison) must be set higher than the through current IR. This must be determined when engineering the scheme. An alternative is to disable the phase comparison function which also must be determined when engineering the scheme.
b) Loop current
Busbar fault
IK1
IK2
IQ
IQ
IK3
Figure 5.35 Busbar fault with a loop current I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 + IQ IQ = IK I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 + IQ + IQ = IK + 2 IQ

k= I IK = I IK + 2 IQ
5-52
REB500
The busbar protection will only trip providing the total fault current (IK) exceeds a certain minimum: k IK Table 5.6 0.9 18 0.85 11.4 0.8 8 0.75 6 0.7 4.7 IQ
Minimum internal fault current to ensure tripping
For the phase comparison function not to prevent tripping, the low current check for including feeder currents in the phase comparison (see Section 3.3.2.2. Phase comparison) must be set higher than the loop current IQ. This must be determined when engineering the scheme. A alternative is to disable the phase comparison function which also must be determined when engineering the scheme.
5.4.3.6. Differential current alarm setting
The setting for the differential current alarm is entered as a percentage of the minimum fault current setting IKmin.
Parameter Min. Max. 50 Default Step 10 5 Unit %
Differential current 5 alarm
Table 5.7
Differential current alarm setting range
Note: A typical setting is 10 %.
5-53
REB500
5.4.3.7.
Differential current alarm delay setting Should the differential current alarm pick up, alarm is not actually given until the set time delay has expired.
Parameter Time delay Min. 2 Max. 50 Default Step 2 15 Unit s
Table 5.8
Time delay setting range for the differential current alarm
Note: A typical setting is 5 s.
5.4.3.8.
Neutral current supervision (operating characteristic L 0) This setting is only available if it is enabled (see Section 11. Options).
5.4.3.9.
Phase comparison No settings have to be made using the REBWIN operator program for the phase comparison algorithm. The settings for this function are determined when engineering the scheme for a particular application. The parameters involved are the operating angle max and the two minimum current settings (L1, L2, L3 and L0) for the inclusion of a feeder in the evaluation.
5.4.3.10.
Overcurrent check for enabling tripping The tripping of a circuit-breaker by the busbar protection can also be made dependent on whether the feeder in question is conducting a certain minimum current. The setting thus applies to individual bay units (see Table 5.4) If the overcurrent check is not set for a feeder, any tripping command (21110_TRIP) passes to the circuit-breaker without a check being made that the feeder is actually conducting current.
5-54
REB500
5.4.3.11.
Undervoltage check for enabling tripping See Section 11.
5.4.4.
Breaker backup protection This function only appears providing it is enabled (see Section 11 Options).
5.4.5.
End fault protection This function only appears providing it is enabled (see Section 11 Options).
5.4.6.
Time-overcurrent protection This function only appears providing it is enabled (see Section 11 Options).
5.4.7.
Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function This function only appears providing it is enabled (see Section 11 Options).
5.4.8.
Event memory The busbar protection includes an event memory for each individual unit (central unit and bay units) in which changes in the statuses of binary signal are recorded. The event memories have a capacity for 100 events in bay units and 1000 events in the central unit. The user can select whether the oldest event should be overwritten (ring register) or no further events recorded when the memory is full. A time stamp (date and time with an accuracy of 1 ms), a text defined using the operator program and a status (set or reset) are attached to every event. Individual texts can be entered for each status. Generally, one event is configured for every input and output, but events can also be assigned to opto-coupler inputs or relay outputs. When a PC running the operator program is connected, events can be uploaded from the protection to the PC. The events stored in the central unit can only be read when connected to the central unit and
5-55
REB500
the events stored in bay units when connected to either the central unit or the respective bay unit. Events that are no longer needed in the PC can be deleted either individually or collectively in marked groups.
Figure 5.36 Settings/Event memory dialogue
5-56
June 2000
6.
6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.4.1. 6.4.2. 6.4.3. 6.4.4. 6.5. 6.5.1. 6.5.1.1. 6.5.1.2. 6.5.1.3. 6.5.1.4. 6.5.2. 6.5.2.1. 6.5.2.2. 6.5.3. 6.5.3.1. 6.5.3.2. 6.5.3.3. 6.5.4.
Erection and installation

General ....................................................................................6-2 Safety instructions....................................................................6-2 Checking the shipment.............................................................6-3 Erection....................................................................................6-3 Material required ......................................................................6-3 Relay location and ambient conditions.....................................6-3 Installation in cubicles ..............................................................6-4 Decentralised installation in switch panels ...............................6-5 Installation................................................................................6-5 Grounding guidelines ...............................................................6-5 Cubicle grounding ....................................................................6-6 Grounding principles for bay units............................................6-8 Mounting in an open frame ......................................................6-8 Grounding straps (copper braid) and their fittings ....................6-9 Wiring.....................................................................................6-10 External wiring........................................................................6-10 Internal wiring.........................................................................6-10 Screening...............................................................................6-12 Cable screens ........................................................................6-12 Terminating cable screens .....................................................6-12 Additional grounding points along cables...............................6-13 Laying optical fibre cables......................................................6-14
6-1
6.
6.1.
Erection and installation

General The busbar protection equipment must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care. Install the cubicles such that there is adequate access from the front and the rear for maintenance or additions. Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of installation and ambient conditions given in Section 3 Technical Specification. Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in this section.
6.2.
Safety instructions Danger: If parts of the station are in operation, be sure to take all the necessary safety precautions to prevent electrical shock.
Caution: If parts of the station are in operation, be sure to interrupt the tripping circuits to avoid unintentional operation of the respective circuit-breakers during erection and commissioning.
Note: Allow for the weight marked on the crates and packing of the individual units when transporting and lifting the protection equipment.
Note: Cubicles which have been removed from their packing may only be lifted by the lugs on the top.
6-2
6.3.
Checking the shipment Upon receipt, check that the consignment is complete. Inform your local ABB agent or representative should discrepancies be found in relation to the delivery note, shipping documents or order. Visually check all the items when unpacking. Should any transport damage be found, lodge a claim in writing with the last carrier without delay and inform ABB. If the protection equipment is not going to be installed immediately, all items must be stored in a closed room in their original packing. The humidity should not exceed 95 % at a maximum temperature of +40 C; the permissible storage temperature range in dry air is -40 C to +85 C.
6.4. 6.4.1.
Erection Material required All the small parts needed are included in the installation kit. A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs provided.
6.4.2.
Relay location and ambient conditions The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the optical fibre cable connector and the local control unit. There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of electronic modules. Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient conditions, the location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances) severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, high levels of humidity, surge voltages of high amplitude and short rise time and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as far as possible air must be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically (operation of the local control unit and visibility of markings).
6-3
In all other respects, observe the limits and ranges given in Section 3 Technical specification. 6.4.3. Installation in cubicles In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have been prepared as shown in the installation diagram. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations as shown in the drawing.
Figure 6.1
Front view and view with the hinged equipment frame swung out of a REB500 busbar protection cubicle
6-4
Figure 6.2
Cubicle layout for 1, 2 and 3 cubicles (W = 800 mm, D = 800 mm) with floor bolt dimensions
6.4.4.
Decentralised installation in switch panels Where the busbar protection equipment is to be mounted in switch panel cut-outs, the racks and switch panels must be mounted first and then the busbar protection units inserted into the cut-outs and secured (installation kit).
6.5. 6.5.1.
Installation Grounding guidelines Switching operations in HV installations generate transient overvoltages on instrument transformer and control signal cables. There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them. All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus. On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of other apparatus. In order to minimise these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed with respect to grounding, wiring and screening. Note: All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
6-5
6.5.1.1. 6.5.1.1.1.
Cubicle grounding Mechanical design The RF impedance from the location of the various modules in the cubicle to the cubicle ground must be low. There must therefore be a good electrical contact between the metal parts of the cubicle such as side plates, blanking plates etc., and the frame and base of the cubicle. The contact surfaces must not only be good electrical conductors, they must also be corrosion-proof so that long-term good electrical conductivity is preserved. Non-observance of these conditions can result in the cubicle or parts of it resonating at certain frequencies, which increases the interference transmitted by the units in the cubicle and can lower their immunity to electrical interference from outside.
6.5.1.1.2.
Grounding a single cubicle The moving parts of a cubicle such as the doors (front and rear) or hinged frame must be connected to the cubicle structure by three copper braid straps (see Figure 6.3 Cubicle grounding principles).
Door or hinged frame
Rack
Bay unit
Mount cubicle ground rail close to bottom of cubicle

Station ground
Copper braid, width 20 mm, cross-section 16 mm2 Braid lug, i.e. good electrical connection
Figure 6.3
Cubicle grounding principles
6-6
The cubicle ground rail is connected to the station ground by a copper braid strap (see Section 6.5.1.4 Grounding straps (copper braid) and their fittings). If the distance to the station ground exceeds 5 m, two straps must be run in parallel as closely as possible to each other. 6.5.1.1.3. Grounding principles for adjacent cubicles Where cubicles are standing next to each other (less than 1 m apart), observe the following additional conditions (example with 2 cubicles).
Cubicle
Cubicle ground rail
Station ground
Figure 6.4
Grounding principles for two adjacent cubicles
The ground rails in the two cubicles are connected together and each one individually connected to the station ground. The ground rails of cubicles that are more than 1 m apart do not have to be connected. The cubicles of a suite of several cubicles are also connected together and each one individually connected to the station ground.
6-7
6.5.1.2.
Grounding principles for bay units The grounding straps of racks and modules may be connected on either the left or right, but whichever the case, they should be as short as possible.
* **
Pre-assembled grounding bolt A copper braid strap can be attached at one of these positions.
Figure 6.5 6.5.1.3.
Grounding individual bay units
Mounting in an open frame An open frame must be electrically conducting, corrosion-proof and properly connected to the station ground (see Figure 6.6).
Mounting plate Electrically conducting connection on both sides
Electrically conducting connection
Electrically conducting connection
Open frame Cover
Station ground
Figure 6.6
Methods of grounding units in open frames (front view, semi-flush and surface mounting)
6-8
The contact surfaces between mounting plates or covers and the frame must be electrically conducting, i.e. neither contact surface may be painted and the contact area must be corrosionproof (e.g. galvanised). The units must be grounded directly to the rack frame as shown in Figure 6.6 if the contact surfaces are poor conductors or to the mounting plate as shown in Figure 6.10 in Section 6.5.3 Screening providing the surfaces are good conductors. The units must be grounded such that the grounding straps are as short as possible. As described in Section 6.5.1.1.2. Grounding a single cubicle, a second grounding strap must be run in parallel if the station ground is more than 5 m away. 6.5.1.4. Grounding straps (copper braid) and their fittings The interference currents conducted by the ground connections are of high frequency and as a result of the skin effect, only the part of the ground straps near the surface is of consequence. Tinned copper braid is therefore used for the ground straps and not copper rod, because the cross-section of an equivalent rod would be much greater. Data of copper braid straps: Width 20 mm Cross-section 16 mm2
(necessary for protection grounds)
Both ends of the straps must be fitted with lugs suitable for the connecting to ground bolts. The surfaces in contact with the lugs must be electrically conducting and corrosion-proof.
Copper braid
Cable lug
Ground bolt Contact surface
Figure 6.7
Grounding straps and their termination
6-9
Caution: In the case of aluminium contact surfaces, a cupal disc (copper-plated aluminium) must be fitted between the lug and aluminium to prevent corrosion. 6.5.2. 6.5.2.1. Wiring External wiring The external wiring includes all the connections between the primary system plant and the cubicle, rack or device terminals. The corresponding cables should be run in metal cable ducts that are connected at several points to the station ground. The external wiring falls into the following groups: instrument transformer leads auxiliary supply connections binary inputs and outputs.
Experience as shown that most interference is induced in the instrument transformer leads and therefore these should be run in separate cable ducts away from the other cables. Caution: The instrument transformer lead in GIS stations must be screened (see Section 6.5.3). This is also to be recommended in the other kind of stations. 6.5.2.2. Internal wiring The internal wiring comprises the connections between the cubicle or rack terminals and the terminals on the devices. This wiring should be kept as short as possible especially in open frames. As described in Section 6.5.2.1. External wiring, it is recommended to separate the instrument transformer leads from the other cables, i.e. they should not be run in the same cable ducts or loom. To reduce the risk of parallel coupling, cables may also be crossed at right-angles (see Figure 6.8 Wiring of two bay units to be performed by the customer). The minimum crosscoupling occurs when cables cross at right angles. Pre-wiring non-defined inputs is not permissible.
6-10
C.t. leads
Binary inputs and outputs Aux. supply
C.t. leads
Crossed at right angles
Terminal blocks
Figure 6.8
Wiring of two bay units to be performed by the customer
6-11
6.5.3. 6.5.3.1.
Screening Cable screens Cables have braided screens with a cover ratio of more than 80 %.
6.5.3.2.
Terminating cable screens Cable screens must be terminated such that the entire circumference of the screen is in contact with ground. Cable screens must be grounded at both ends. Caution: The screening effect is inadequate in industrial installations if the cable screen is grounded by a wire soldered to it. The screens of cables can be grounded best if the cables enter cubicles via cable glands. Where this is not possible, proceed as illustrated in Figure 6.9, taking care that that the cable screens are grounded inside the cubicle as closely as possible to the entrance. In order to connect the screen to ground, remove a suitable length of the insulation, push the exposed screen back over end of the remaining insulation and clamp it to a metal surface (see Figure 6.8 Wiring of two bay units to be performed by the customer). Both the clamp and the metal surface must be electrically conducting and corrosion-proof.
Cable clamp Cable insulation
Screen pushed back over end of insulation
Cores
Figure 6.9
Cable screen termination
It is important that the screen be pushed back over the end of the insulation as otherwise it frays with time and the quality of the ground connection diminishes. The risk of the screen and cores being pinched is also reduced. Screens in the case of open frames are also secured by a clamp to the mounting plate close to the device as shown in Figure 6.10.
6-12
Bear mounting plate with bay unit Equipment frame
Cable screen terminations Screened cables
Station ground
Figure 6.10
Cable screen terminations in open equipment frames (rear view for semi-flush mounting, front view for surface mounting)
The unscreened ends of the cores going to the device terminals must be kept as short as possible and the groups of cables should be run separately as explained in Section 6.5.2.2 Internal wiring. 6.5.3.3. Additional grounding points along cables Where cubicles are at different potentials, balancing currents can flow through the screens of cables that are grounded at both ends which induce interference in the cable cores. Where the distance between the cubicles is greater than approximately 10 m, the induced interference can be strong enough to affect the equipment. One solution is to run the cables next to the ground rails of the station grounding mesh and to ground the cables screens every 5 to 10 m. For this purpose, remove a suitable length of insulation and fit a clamp to ground the exposed screen to a grounded metal surface. The clamp and the metal surface must be clean, electrically conducting and corrosion-proof. The type of clamp must be chosen such that it holds the cable firmly without pinching or crushing the screen of the cores.
6-13
6.5.4.
Laying optical fibre cables Refer to the suppliers instructions for how to lay optical fibre cables. The requirements the optical fibre cables have to fulfil from the point of view of the protection are given in Section 3. Technical specification. Optical fibre cables may never be sharply bent or pinched. Always observe the minimum permissible bending radius.
6-14
June 2000
7.
7.1. 7.1.1. 7.1.2. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. 7.4.1. 7.4.2. 7.4.3. 7.4.4. 7.4.5. 7.4.6. 7.4.7. 7.4.8. 7.5. 7.5.1. 7.5.1.1. 7.5.1.2. 7.5.1.3. 7.5.1.4. 7.5.1.5. 7.5.2. 7.5.3. 7.5.4. 7.5.5. 7.5.5.1. 7.5.5.2. 7.5.5.3. 7.5.5.4. 7.5.6. 7.5.7. 7.5.8. 7.5.9.
COMMISSIONING
Safety instructions....................................................................7-3 Assumptions and preconditions ...............................................7-3 Regulations ..............................................................................7-3 General remarks on commissioning the REB500 protection system.......................................................7-4 Commissioning procedure........................................................7-4 Checks prior to switching on ....................................................7-5 Record the equipment data......................................................7-5 Visually inspect for transport damage ......................................7-5 Visually inspect the external wiring and cables ........................7-6 Check the grounding of cubicles and other units .....................7-6 Check the auxiliary DC battery supply......................................7-6 Check the settings....................................................................7-7 Check the c.t. circuits ...............................................................7-8 Check the v.t. circuits .............................................................7-10 Commissioning the protection system....................................7-12 Communicating with the protection system............................7-12 Connecting the PC .................................................................7-12 Minimum PC requirements.....................................................7-12 Starting the operator program ................................................7-13 Simulation of isolator and circuit-breaker position signals......7-13 Comparison of diagrams ........................................................7-13 Checking the input c.ts (analogue inputs) .............................7-14 Checking the input v.ts (analogue inputs) .............................7-14 Checking the binary inputs signals (opto-coupler inputs) .......7-14 Check auxiliary contacts on the isolators and circuit-breakers and the CLOSE command .........................7-15 Timing sequence....................................................................7-15 Auxiliary contact circuit...........................................................7-18 Checking the isolator auxiliary contacts .................................7-19 Checking the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts and the manual CLOSE command ......................................7-19 Checking the binary output signals (alarms) ..........................7-19 Checking the binary output signals (tripping circuits) .............7-20 Checking the starting of the breaker failure protection...........7-21 Checking protection stability...................................................7-22
7-1
7.5.9.1. 7.5.9.2. 7.5.10. 7.5.11. 7.6. 7.6.1. 7.6.2. 7.6.3. 7.6.3.1. 7.6.3.2. 7.6.3.3.
Checking through-fault stability with the busbars de-energised ......................................................7-22 Checking though-fault stability with load current ....................7-24 Set the system time................................................................7-25 Final test and inspection ........................................................7-25 Remote HMI ...........................................................................7-26 General notes.........................................................................7-26 Optical fibre link......................................................................7-26 Modem link.............................................................................7-27 Connecting the modem ..........................................................7-27 Configuring the modem..........................................................7-28 Establishing a modem link .....................................................7-28
7-2
7.
7.1. 7.1.1.
COMMISSIONING
Safety instructions Assumptions and preconditions It is assumed that the REB500 protection system is already installed and all the input and output signals that have been configured are also wired and the optical fibre cables run and tested. It must also be assumed that the busbars or sections of them are in operation and that circuit-breakers and isolators are in the process of being installed or maintained. The commissioning engineer requires the operating instructions and the station diagrams prepared by the engineering department. The protection system may only be commissioned by correspondingly trained commissioning personnel.
7.1.2.
Regulations
Danger: The greatest care must be taken when testing a busbar protection system on busbars in operation, as the consequences of tripping a circuit-breaker by mistake when there is no fault, or not tripping it when there is a fault can be extremely serious.
Danger: Before testing the operation of circuit-breakers or isolators, check that no maintenance is being carried out on the circuit-breakers or the busbars. Even with the power switched off, switching operations with people in the vicinity can cause accidents and injury.
Caution: Unnecessary switching operations should be avoided as far as possible, because switchgear has a limited number of operations and switching disturbs the normal operation of the station.
7-3
7.2.
General remarks on commissioning the REB500 protection system

The REB500 protection system operates digitally and is equipped with a continuous self-supervision and diagnostics function (see Section 1.). All the functions are (protection) algorithms computed by the system software.
ABB exhaustively tests the system software before it is released. The customers specific data are also recorded in software form in a database, which is similarly tested by the ABB test department before being released. The self-supervision function is so extensive that only few hardware components are not covered. These include the binary inputs (opto-couplers) and outputs and the analogue channels (c.t. and v.t. inputs). For these reasons, it is superfluous to test the internal functions of the protection by secondary injection. Secondary injection is therefore restricted to those components which are not covered by the self-supervision function, i.e. the: 7.3. binary inputs and outputs analogue channels.
Commissioning procedure The following procedure has proved the best in practice: Checks prior to switching on 1 Record the equipment data 2 Visually inspect for transport damage 3 Visually inspect the external wiring and cables 4 Check the grounding of cubicles and other units 5 Check the auxiliary DC battery supply 6 Check the settings 7 Check the c.t. circuits 8 Check the v.t. circuits
7-4
Checks after switching on the protection system 9 Secondary injection tests using the test set 10 Check the binary input signals 11 Check auxiliary contacts on the isolators and circuit-breakers and the CLOSE command 12 Check the control signal and alarm circuits 13 Check the tripping circuits 14 Check the stability factor 15 Set the system time 16 Final test and inspection.
Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5 Test Report!
7.4. 7.4.1.
Checks prior to switching on Record the equipment data For purposes of identification and quality assurance, the following equipment data shall be recorded: Rated voltage of the primary plant
Busbar configuration (double busbars, 1 breaker scheme etc.)
Type of station (outdoor/indoor, gas insulated) Cubicle number(s) Central unit number Bay unit designations Bay unit numbers Software version Designations and revision indices of the diagrams.
7.4.2.
Visually inspect for transport damage Deformed housings, dents and damaged paintwork are an indication of transport damage. Where such indications are ob7-5
served, check the proper function of the respective unit especially thoroughly and consult the ABB to assess the best course of action. Electrical and optical fibre cables must not be bent or pinched. Check that all the plug-in boards and modules are properly inserted and secure. Check that the consignment is complete. 7.4.3. Visually inspect the external wiring and cables Check that the gauges of all cables are adequate for the current to be conducted. Check that the cable screens are properly grounded. The c.t. circuits should be connected to shorting and isolating terminals. The v.t. circuits should be connected to isolating terminals. Check the tightness of the connections by exerting moderate force. Screened leads must be used for c.t. and v.t. circuits as described in Section 6 Erection and Installation. 7.4.4. Check the grounding of cubicles and other units Cubicles and equipment must be grounded as described in Section 6 Erection and Installation. 7.4.5. Check the auxiliary DC battery supply Disconnect the auxiliary supply from the protection equipment (green connector). Check the grounding of the battery supply. The battery circuit can be grounded at either positive of negative pole symmetrically via impedances not at all (ungrounded).
Check for ground faults if the battery circuit is symmetrically grounded via impedances or ungrounded.
7-6
Measure the following voltages: positive to negative positive to ground negative to ground.
For higher availability, the station may be equipped with redundant auxiliary supplies. In this case, check the second battery supply in the same way as the first. The two supplies must not be connected in parallel at any point. The battery voltage must be within the permissible range of the power supply unit(s) in the busbar protection system under all operating conditions (refer to the technical data of the respective power supply unit). Check that the battery leads are connected with the correct polarity. If all these checks are satisfactory, reinsert the green auxiliary supply connectors. Possible sources of error and helpful hints: Make sure that the battery circuits are properly protected and multiple circuits are not interconnected. Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
Caution: Power supply units may never be inserted or withdrawn with the auxiliary supply connected. Therefore place the switch on the front of the power supply unit in the off position and unplug the green connector on the end of the battery cable. The other modules may only be inserted or withdrawn when the switch on the front of the power supply unit in the off position or there is no power supply unit fitted.
7.4.6.
Check the settings The commissioning engineer does not generally have to calculate or confirm the calculation of the protection settings. He only checks and records
7-7
whether there appear to be basic or obvious errors who calculated the settings.
Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
7.4.7.
Check the c.t. circuits
Danger: Never interrupt c.t. circuits during operation. Where manipulations in c.t. circuits are necessary, be sure to shortcircuit them at the shorting and isolating terminals beforehand. After completing work on the c.t. circuits, make sure that they are closed, i.e. no longer interrupted, and switch the shorting and isolating terminals back to their normal operation position again.
Note: The c.t. circuits are not normally tested by the protection commissioning engineer. He only records who checked them. Check that the c.ts are connected in strict accordance with the diagram supplied. Perform the following checks to establish the correctness of the c.ts and c.t. circuits: Polarity: The test circuit is given in Figure 7.1. There must be a positive deflection on the voltmeter when the switch is closed. This provisionally checks the c.t. circuit and confirms the polarity of the c.t.
7-8
Figure 7.1
Circuit for checking c.t. polarity
Ratio and wiring: The c.t. ratios and wiring are checked by primary injection between the three phases R,S and T and ground (R-0, S-0 and T0) and phase-to-phase (R-S and R-T). The phase and neutral currents flowing in protection input circuits are tested. Apart from checking the ratios and wiring, the phase-to-phase injection also checks that all three phases are connected with the same polarity.
Figure 7.2
Example of primary phase-to-ground injection
Knee-point voltage: This requires the connection of a test voltage (HV!) to the c.t. secondary and the measurement of current and voltage. The primary winding must not be short-circuited.
7-9
The values recorded indicate whether the c.t. has a protection or metering core. A protection core has a relatively high knee-point voltage (the point at which a 10 % reduction of voltage produces a 50 % reduction of current). Possible sources of error and helpful hints: The measurement of the knee-point voltage is very important, because swapped protection and metering cores are not apparent in normal operation, but only when a power system fault occurs (false tripping of the busbar protection or failure of the breaker failure protection to trip may be a consequence).
Figure 7.3 Grounding:
Example of primary phase-to-ground injection
Every electrically insulated c.t. circuit must be grounded at one point (of advantage is a point that is accessible during normal operation). Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
7.4.8.
Check the v.t. circuits
Note: The v.t. circuits are not normally tested by the protection commissioning engineer. He only records who checked them. Check that the v.ts are connected in strict accordance with the diagram supplied. Perform the following checks to establish the correctness of the v.ts and v.t. circuits:
7-10
Polarity: This test is generally performed on the secondary windings. Ratio: Measure the secondary voltage after switching on. Grounding: Every electrically insulated v.t. circuit must be grounded at one point (of advantage is a point that is accessible during normal operation). Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
7-11
7.5.
Commissioning the protection system
Danger: To avoid any possible false tripping due to wiring mistakes, interrupt all the tripping circuits before switching the protection on for the first time. The protection system is switched on by placing the switch on the power supply unit in the ON position. Providing all the bay units (BUs) are switched on and correctly connected by optical fibre cables to the central unit (CU), the system is ready for operation and standing by after the initialisation procedure (about 5 min). The display shows, for example: Ready Alarm Trip ABB REB 500 V5.00 V1.50AB 99-11-03 Should this not be the case, follow the procedure given in Section 9 Trouble-shooting. There should not be any alarms, assuming all the isolators and return confirmation signals are properly connected and energised (if not, see Section 7.5.1.4. Simulation of isolator and circuit-breaker position signals). Other operations require the connection of a PC in order to be able to communicate with the protection system. 7.5.1. 7.5.1.1. Communicating with the protection system. Connecting the PC The PC is connected to the central unit or bay unit by means of the optical connecting cable supplied. 7.5.1.2. Minimum PC requirements The PC operator program runs on an IBM PC or compatible running MS Windows. The minimum PC requirements are: PC mit INTEL INTEL Pentium 100 MHz or better mouse plus PS/2 interface (bus board) if the PC has only one serial interface
7-12
Windows 98 or NT 4.0 MByte RAM (32 MByte recommended) 1 floppy (3", 1.44 MByte) or CD drive 1 serial interface (RS-232C, COM1 or COM2) SVGA monitor (800 x 600) 1 parallel interface (LPT1) for a printer (recommended).
Note: The REBWIN operator program runs under Microsoft Windows 98 or NT 4.0 with Service Pack 5.
7.5.1.3.
Starting the operator program See Section 4.4 Starting the operator program.
7.5.1.4.
Simulation of isolator and circuit-breaker position signals In order to operate, the REB500 protection system requires signals from the isolators and circuit-breakers indicating their positions. If one or several positions are unknown, the protection system starts incompletely. It is only fully operational and standing by when all the position signals are available. At the beginning of commissioning, these signals are frequently incorrectly wired or the supply for the auxiliary contacts is not switched on. To enable commissioning of the protection system to proceed in spite of this, the positions of the isolators and circuit-breakers have to be simulated. This can be achieved either using jumpers at the terminals or by simulating opto-coupler positions in the test mode. Once this has been done, no alarms with the exception of Test generator active) may be active.
7.5.1.5.
Comparison of diagrams Now compare the REB500 diagram with the station diagram (binary and analogue inputs and binary outputs). Possible sources of error and helpful hints: Check that the actual c.t. locations in the single-line diagram in the REB500 database agree with their locations in the station.
7-13
7.5.2.
Checking the input c.ts (analogue inputs) Using a test set, SVERKER or MODURES Type XS92b, inject a current into each of the c.t. inputs. The c.ts can be checked in one of the following ways: Reading the injected currents on the local control unit. (Note: The readings are referred to the primary values.) Reading the injected currents via the REBWIN operator program by selecting Analogue input measurements in the View menu. Reading the injected currents via the REBWIN operator program by selecting Protection zone measurements in the View menu. Increasing the currents until the protection function (e.g. busbar or end fault protection function) picks up.
The last alternative, increasing the current until the protection function picks up is the one normally chosen, but this is not imperative. Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
7.5.3.
Checking the input v.ts (analogue inputs) Using a test set, SVERKER or MODURES Type XS92b, inject a voltage into each of the c.t. inputs. Read the voltage applied on the local control unit. (Note: The readings are referred to the primary phase-to-ground voltage.) Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
7.5.4.
Checking the binary inputs signals (opto-coupler inputs) Check the proper function of every binary opto-coupler input by exciting the signal source. The binary inputs can be checked in one of the following ways: Reading the statuses on the local control unit.
7-14
Reading the statuses via the REBWIN operator program by selecting Binary input/output status in the View menu. Checking the events generated in the event list.
The event list enables the correct assignment of the signals as well as their operation to be checked. Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
7.5.5.
Check auxiliary contacts on the isolators and circuitbreakers and the CLOSE command Timing sequence To be able to operate discriminatively, the protection has to know the actual configuration of the busbars. For this purpose, auxiliary contacts on the isolators and circuit-breakers must be connected to the binary inputs of the respective bay units. Thus every isolator and circuit-breaker has to be equipped with potentially-free normally open and normally closed contacts, the N/O contact signalling that the corresponding switching device is closed and the N/C contact that it is open. During the closing operation of an isolator, the N/O contact must already signal its closed status before the main contacts reach their breakdown voltage. Conversely, during the opening operation, the N/O contact (CLOSED signal) should not open before the main contacts have exceeded their breakdown voltage and it is impossible for an arc to ignite. If this condition cannot be fulfilled, i.e. the N/O contact signals that the isolator is open before it has reached its breakdown voltage, the N/C contact must not close before the main contact exceeds its breakdown voltage.
7.5.5.1.
7-15
Figure 7.4
Isolator timing sequence
The protection system supervises that only one signal is being generated (i.e. either CLOSED or OPEN), otherwise an isolator alarm is given after a delay. The alarm can be configured to block the protection if necessary. If the auxiliary contacts do not fulfil the above conditions, the logic Not OPEN = CLOSED can be used. This, however, is only permissible if the isolator auxiliary supply is supervised by connecting it to one of the signal inputs.
7-16
Figure 7.5
Not OPEN = CLOSED logic
Inverting the logic enables local events to be generated while a bay unit is starting that signal a change of input status that did not take place. This does not impair correct operation.
7-17
7.5.5.2.
Auxiliary contact circuit The N/C auxiliary contacts of phases L1, L2 and L3 must be connected in series and the N/O contacts in parallel.
Figure 7.6
Isolator and circuit-breaker positions and manual CLOSE signals
The isolator and circuit-breaker position signals are evaluated as follows:

N/O aux. contact: isolator/circuitbreaker CLOSED Open N/C aux. contact: isolator/circuitbreaker OPEN Open Isolator/circuit-breaker position Last position recorded. + alarm after delay + switching forbidden signal OPEN CLOSED CLOSED + alarm after delay + switching forbidden signal
Open Closed Closed
Closed Open Closed
7-18
7.5.5.3.
Checking the isolator auxiliary contacts Check the timing sequence of the isolator auxiliary contacts by inspecting the construction of the isolator or assessing it from the respective data sheet. Verify the operation of the CLOSED and OPEN contacts according to the circuit diagram and by physically opening and closing the isolator. Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
7.5.5.4.
Checking the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts and the manual CLOSE command Check and verify the operation of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts in the same way as for the isolators. Check for every configured circuit-breaker that its CLOSED signal (command) is detected by the protection, i.e. CLOSE commands from local and remote devices, from the station automation system (SAS) or from the auto-reclosure equipment. Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
7.5.6.
Checking the binary output signals (alarms) The contact load and rupture capacity given in Section 3 Technical specification must not be exceeded. Set the operator program to the test mode by selecting Test mode from the Testing menu. This requires the input of the correct password. Note: To enable a start to be made, the password is set to Test when the program is supplied. Click on the Unblock all relays button in the test mode dialogue.
7-19
In the test mode, select Binary input/output status in the View menu to view the outputs of a binary module. The status of an output can be changed by double-clicking on the corresponding field, which then changes to yellow.
Figure 7.7
REBWIN dialogue for viewing output statuses after selecting Binary input/output status in the View menu
Check the external alarm by activating the output relay. Caution: All external relay coils must be fitted with freewheel diodes or voltage-dependent resistors (VDRs).
Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
7.5.7.
Checking the binary output signals (tripping circuits) The contact load and rupture capacity given in Section 3 Technical specification must not be exceeded. Circuit-breakers are frequently equipped with two completely independent tripping circuits. In such cases, check that both are independently controlled by REB500. Caution: Test operations of circuit-breakers and isolators require the permission of the user and all the prescribed safety precautions must be observed. The tripping circuits are tested in the same way as the alarm circuits by setting them appropriately in the test mode.
7-20
Figure 7.8
REBWIN dialogue for viewing output statuses after selecting Binary input/output status in the View menu
Check that the correct circuit-breaker trips and by the correct tripping coil. Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
7.5.8.
Checking the starting of the breaker failure protection The breaker failure protection is started by various other protection functions and therefore its connections to each of them have to be checked (same procedure as in Section 7.5.4 Checking the binary inputs signals (opto-coupler inputs)). Basically, every protection function that can trip the circuitbreaker should also start the breaker failure protection. These are typically: Busbar protection (When busbar and breaker failure protection functions are performed by the REB500, the connection between the two is part of the software.) Line protection (distance or longitudinal differential) Remote trip from the other end of a line (direct transfer tripping) Transformer protection (differential, Buchholz or overtemperature) Overcurrent protection.
Starting has to be single-phase where single-phase reclosure is being applied, otherwise three-phase starting is permissible.
7-21
7.5.9.
Checking protection stability Proper operation of the protection system can only be assured if the stability check includes all the feeders. Wherever possible the stability should be checked before the busbar is energised, because the risk of a busbar fault is especially high when it is being energised for the first time (flashovers, grounding isolators still closed etc.).
7.5.9.1.
Checking through-fault stability with the busbars deenergised Inject a current from a primary injection test set (25 % of the c.t. rated current is recommended) into two feeders (a reference feeder and one other feeder, see Figure 7.9). Any feeder can be used as reference. Compare each of the other feeders and bustie breaker with the reference feeder. If a bus-tie breaker is only equipped with one set of c.ts, note that the they are used by two busbar sections. In the case of a bus-tie breaker equipped with two sets of c.ts (Figure 7.10), make sure that the set of c.ts assigned to the busbar section under test is checked. The simplest way of ensuring this is to short-circuit the c.ts belonging to the section not under test directly at the c.ts or as close as possible to them. The feeder currents and the differential current can be read using the operator program on the PC. The comparison with the reference feeder must be conducted for phase and neutral currents for protection schemes that evaluate the neutral current.
7-22

I II
Primary injection test set Reference feeder
Figure 7.9
Test set-up for checking protection through-fault stability by primary injection (feeders)
I II
Short-circuit c.ts
Primary injection test set
Reference feeder
Figure 7.10 Test set-up for checking protection through-fault stability by primary injection on busbar I (bus-tie breaker with two sets of c.ts)
7-23
7.5.9.2.
Checking though-fault stability with load current Where protection stability cannot be tested before the busbar is energised or in the case of an extension to an existing system, it has to be tested using load current. Caution: For this test, either tripping by the protection has to be blocked or the tripping circuits have to be interrupted before the currents are applied to the protection. In order to carry out the test, all the amplitudes and directions of the primary currents must be known. Perform one of the following: Alternative a) Alternative b) Short-circuit the c.ts and isolate them from the protection. Use the test mode to simulate that all the isolators are open (this is the simpler method).
In the case of a), connect the infeeds one by one, or in the case of b), simulate the closure of the isolators one by one. Whichever method is chosen, check that the differential current increases as each infeed is connected (either on a PC using the operator program or on the local control unit of the central unit). Repeat this procedure with the loads and the differential current must reduce as each feeder is connected.
In the case of systems which evaluate the neutral current, the differential current of the neutral measurement must be checked as well. A neutral current has to be simulated in a symmetrical power system in order to perform the stability test (see Figure 7.11).
Figure 7.11 Testing the through-fault stability of the neutral circuit

7-24
Caution: Take great care not to open-circuit a c.t. secondary by mistake. Any other protection devices in the same c.t. secondary circuit must not be influenced in any way (e.g. transformer differential protection or earth fault relays). Note: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in Section 12.5. Test Report!
7.5.10.
Setting the system time Set the date and local time by selecting Set system time in the Tools menu.
7.5.11.
Final test and inspection Print the report with all the settings and the configuration by selecting Reports in the Tools menu and checking the Print all reports checkbox in the dialogue that opens (see Section 4.5.36 Tools/Reports). Check all the settings and the configured features such as assignment of modules, auxiliary supply values and the assignment of signals to each opto-coupler input and relay output once again in the report. Visually check that all the temporary changes have been removed and the system restored to its operational state. Pay special attention to: interrupted tripping circuits interrupted alarms interrupted input signals short-circuited c.ts interrupted v.ts.
Make sure that the report has been completely filled in.
7-25
7.6.
Remote HMI In addition to the optical interface on the front of the local control unit, the REB 500 central unit or a bay unit can also be connected to the PC via a serial interface at the rear. This interface is intended for communication over some distance by means of an optical fibre cable or a modem.
7.6.1.
General notes Modem and optical fibre cable are connected to the 25 pin SubD connector marked SERIAL PORT 2 on the CMP. The interface is permanently configured for 9600 Baud, 8 bit, no parity and 1 stop bit. For safety reasons, only one of the two REBWIN interfaces may be in use at any one time, i.e. either the one on the front of the local control unit or the remote connection to the CMP at the rear. When REB 500 is started, both interfaces are active. As soon as REBWIN is started on the PC connected to one of them, the other interface is disabled and remains so until the connection with REBWIN is interrupted (i.e. until REBWIN is shut down on the PC). Both interfaces are then enabled and standing by again until REBWIN establishes communication with one of them.
7.6.2.
Optical fibre link Two electrical-to-optical converters and two optical cables are needed before REBWIN can communicate with REB 500. Depending on the distance, either optical fibre cables with plastic or glass cores are used. Optical fibre cables with plastic cores are permissible for distances up to 30 m. Complete cable kits (2 converters and cables) can be ordered as accessories under the following numbers: Type YX216a-1 (4 m) YX216a-1 (10 m) YX216a-1 (30 m) Order No. 7433 1640 AA 7433 1640 BA 7433 1640 CA Part No. HESG448522 R1 HESG448522 R2 HESG448522 R3
7-26
Optical fibre cables with 62.5/125 mm glass cores and appropriate converters such as Hirschmann OZDV 2451 G (Hirschmann Order No. 943 299-021) are recommended for distances greater than 30 m. The converter at the REB500 end should be configured as DCE and the one at the PC end (with 25 to 9 pin adapter) as DTE. 7.6.3. Modem link Modems are needed at both ends to enable a PC running REBWIN to communicate with REB 500 via a telephone line. ABB does not supply modems as accessories and therefore standard commercially available modems must be procured. We recommend studying the modem manual carefully to avoid problems during installation and operation. We recommend a modem with automatic call-back for use with the REB500. A modem of this kind requires the caller to enter a password. The connection is then interrupted and providing the password was correct, the modem calls back the number for the particular password. This procedure ensures that only authorised personnel can communicate with the protection device. The passwords and associated telephone numbers are entered in the modem connected to the REB500. Consult the instructions for the modem for the corresponding AT commands. In most cases, configuration software is supplied with the modem which greatly simplifies setting the modem. Once all the settings have been made, the changes have to be saved using the corresponding AT command given in the instructions for the modem. 7.6.3.1. Connecting the modem The modem is connected to SERIAL PORT 2 on CMP in REB 500 by a 25 pin cable. The cable pins 2 (TX) and 3 (RX) need to be crossed. Caution: To maintain EMC, the modem may only be connected via an electrically insulated RS232 input device.
7-27
7.6.3.2.
Configuring the modem A standard terminal program must be installed on the PC (e.g. Microsoft Terminal supplied with Windows) to configure the modem. The terminal program itself must be configured to use the COM port to which the modem is connected. Both modems: First check the correct operation of the modem by entering AT <Return>. The modem must respond with OK (or 0). Set the communication parameters to 9600 Baud, 8 bit, no parity and 1 stop bit. Disable both software and hardware handshakes. Consult the modem manual for the corresponding command. REB 500 modem: Set the modem to Automatic answer. The command for most modems is AT S0=3, 3 being the number of rings before the modem answers. PC modem: Disable the DTR (data transmission ready) signal in the modem at the PC end. This is necessary to facilitate changing from terminal operation to REBWIN operation without interrupting the communication channel. Consult the modem manual for the corresponding command.
7.6.3.3.
Establishing a modem link 1 Start the Terminal program on the PC. 2 Dial the telephone number for the protective device, respectively the modem connection. 3 Wait until the two modems establish the connection. If the call-back mode was configured, enter your password and wait for the call-back and for the two modems to establish connection. 4 Close the Terminal program and start REBWIN. 5 Close REBWIN in the normal way to terminate communication and shut the link down. The modem can then be switched off or the channel shut down using the Terminal program.
7-28
June 00
8.
8.1. 8.1.1. 8.1.2. 8.1.3. 8.1.4. 8.1.5. 8.1.5.1. 8.1.5.2. 8.1.5.3. 8.1.5.4. 8.1.5.5. 8.1.5.6. 8.1.5.7. 8.1.5.8. 8.1.5.9. 8.1.6. 8.1.6.1. 8.1.6.2. 8.1.6.3. 8.1.7. 8.1.8. 8.1.8.1. 8.1.8.2. 8.1.8.3. 8.1.8.4. 8.1.9. 8.1.9.1. 8.1.9.2. 8.1.9.3. 8.1.9.4. 8.2. 8.3. 8.3.1. 8.3.2. 8.3.3. 8.3.3.1. 8.3.3.2. 8.3.3.3.
Operation and maintenance

Operation .................................................................................8-3 Safety instructions....................................................................8-3 General ....................................................................................8-3 Viewing data on the local control unit (HMI).............................8-3 Starting the protection system..................................................8-6 Normal operation .....................................................................8-6 Measurements .........................................................................8-7 Differential current....................................................................8-7 Inputs .......................................................................................8-7 Outputs ....................................................................................8-7 Global settings .........................................................................8-7 Settings ....................................................................................8-7 System response .....................................................................8-7 Busbar protection .....................................................................8-7 Operating characteristic ...........................................................8-8 Failure of the protection ...........................................................8-8 Unexpected restart...................................................................8-9 Differential current alarm..........................................................8-9 Isolator alarm .........................................................................8-10 Protection blocking functions .................................................8-11 Protection tripping ..................................................................8-12 Resetting latched signals and relays......................................8-12 Tripping ..................................................................................8-13 Trip list ...................................................................................8-14 Reading disturbance recorder data........................................8-14 Special operating modes........................................................8-14 Inspection and maintenance ..................................................8-14 Transfer tripping.....................................................................8-15 Isolator auxiliary contact logic Not OPEN=CLOSED ...........8-16 Activating and deactivating configured feeders......................8-16 Maintenance ..........................................................................8-19 System additions, spare units and checks .............................8-20 Activating a previously configured feeder...............................8-20 Replacing a bay unit...............................................................8-23 Example: Maintenance check on a feeder circuit-breaker .....8-24 Step 1.....................................................................................8-26 Step 2.....................................................................................8-28 Step 3.....................................................................................8-29
8-1
8.3.3.4. 8.3.3.5. 8.3.3.6. 8.3.3.7. 8.3.4. 8.3.4.1. 8.3.4.2. 8.3.4.3. 8.3.4.4. 8.3.4.5. 8.3.4.6.
Step 4.....................................................................................8-31 Step 5.....................................................................................8-32 Step 6.....................................................................................8-33 Step 7.....................................................................................8-33 Example: Maintenance check on a bus-tie breaker ...............8-34 Step 1.....................................................................................8-34 Step 2.....................................................................................8-35 Step 3.....................................................................................8-35 Step 4.....................................................................................8-36 Step 5.....................................................................................8-36 Step 6.....................................................................................8-36
8-2
8.
8.1. 8.1.1.
Operation and maintenance

Operation Safety instructions Caution: Only properly trained and authorised personnel should be in possession of the REBWIN password.
Caution: Checks and maintenance on the REB500 system may only be carried out by properly trained personnel.
8.1.2.
General Operation in the case of the REB500 busbar protection system is confined to supervising the proper function of the system and assessing the system data. There are different procedures for reading operating, disturbance and tripping data: on the local control unit on a PC running the REBWIN operator program via remote control by the station automation system (SCS).
8.1.3.
Viewing data on the local control unit (HMI) The local control unit permits control functions to be performed locally on the equipment. The different coloured LEDs signal the various operating statuses of the protection system and supplementary information is displayed on the LCD. The following data can be viewed on the central control unit: current and voltage measurements statuses of inputs and outputs alarms (generated by the respective bay unit) system (or respective bay unit) settings settings of all the specific bay unit protection functions.
8-3
LEDs: green yellow
red
Optical PC interface
Figure 8.1
Local control unit (HMI)
Pushbuttons Button E Press button E to go to the next menu down. Button C Press button C to return to the main menu. If Reset latching is the current menu, pressing this button resets any relays that are latched. Arrow buttons The buttons marked and are for scrolling through displays of information needing more than four lines. The buttons marked and are for moving through the menus item by item.
8-4
Menu structure of the central unit

Alarms Trips Reset latching Central unit Meas. var. Bus zones Bus zone 1 Diff. cur. alarm Bus zone 2 Diff. cur. alarm ... (other bus zones as configured) Inputs Slot 19 (where fitted) Slot 20 (where fitted) Outputs Slot 19 (where fitted) Slot 20 (where fitted) Global values Settings System response Busbar protection Phases Neutral Bay units Bay unit 1 Meas. var. Currents Voltages Inputs Slot 5 Slot 4 (where configured) Outputs Slot 5 Slot 4 (where configured) Circuit-breakers Breaker designation ... (where configured) Settings BBP BFP (where configured) OCDT (where configured) EFP (where configured) PDF (where configured) Bay unit 2 See bay unit 1 ... (other bay units as configured)
8-5
Menu structure of the bay unit

Alarms Trips Reset latching Settings Global values System response BBP Phases Neutral current Overcurrent enable BFP (where configured) OCDT (where configured) EFP (where configured) PDF (where configured) Measured variables Currents Voltages Inputs Slot 1 Outputs Slot 1 Circuit-breakers Breaker designation ... (where configured)
8.1.4.
Starting the protection system After switching on the auxiliary supply the following is displayed on the central unit and bay units:
HMI text LEDs The three LEDs flash Event -
Table 8-1
System initialisation
It takes about 6 minutes to initialise the system. 8.1.5. Normal operation Central unit and bay units
HMI text ABB REB500 V5.0 V1.00A 99-12-05 LEDs Green lit Event
Table 8-2
Normal operation
Using the arrow buttons to navigate through the menu structure, additional information can be view on the LCD.
8-6
8.1.5.1.
Measurements The measurements that can be viewed on the LCD are the differential currents of the various busbar zones and the statuses of the binary inputs and outputs on the BIO modules in the central unit.
8.1.5.2.
Differential current The differential currents of the various busbar zones are displayed on the LCD of the central unit. Where the configuration of the busbars is such that several busbar zones are connected to form a single zone, the identical differential current is displayed for the individual zones.
8.1.5.3.
Inputs The statuses of the opto-coupler inputs on each of the binary input/output modules in the central unit are displayed as a bit pattern, a logical 1 indicating an active input (i.e. the input voltage is higher than the pick-up voltage) and a logical 0 an inactive input. In the row of 12 binary digits (1 or 0), opto-coupler 1 is on the left and opto-coupler 12 on the right.
8.1.5.4.
Outputs The statuses of the outputs on each of the binary input/output modules in the central unit are displayed as a bit pattern, a logical 1 indicating a set output. Output 1 is on the left of the bit pattern and output 9 on the right.
8.1.5.5.
Global settings This menu item displays the set power system frequency.
8.1.5.6.
Settings This menu item displays those settings which determine the response of the entire system and the busbar protection.
8.1.5.7.
System response How the system responds to a differential current or isolator alarm (i.e. what is blocked and what is not), the isolator operating time and the width of the transfer tripping impulse are displayed.
8.1.5.8.
Busbar protection The settings determining the response of the busbar protection to phase faults and, where configured, to ground faults are displayed.
8-7
8.1.5.9.
Operating characteristic The settings determining the operating characteristic of the restrained current amplitude comparison algorithm are displayed: IKmin k Differential current alarm Time delay min. fault current k factor differential current supervision delay of the differential current alarm
8.1.6.
Failure of the protection This Section lists the signals that appear when the protection has failed or is blocked, the likely causes and suggestions for corrective action. Alarms and signals are generated for the following events: Central unit and bay units
HMI text General alarm LEDs Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Event CU: BU: 41805_Alarm No event
Table 8.3
Protection failure
Possible causes: Auxiliary supply failure Failure of a board in the central unit Failure of the communication with a bay unit Failure of a bay unit Failure of a bay unit application Error while updating the protection system data Failure of the internal communication in the central unit Operation of supervision devices for fans or any external power supplies (31815_Ext. superv. in service_1 at logical 0).
8-8
8.1.6.1.
Unexpected restart Central unit

HMI text LEDs The three LEDs flash Event CU: 41810_In service resets
Table 8-4
Central unit restarts
Possible causes: The central unit is no longer in the standby status and restarts. Corrective action: Discuss event list with the operations manager without delay. Bay units
HMI text LEDs The three LEDs flash Event BU: 21805_In service resets
Table 8-5
Bay unit restarts
Possible causes: A bay unit is no longer in the standby status and restarts. Corrective action: Discuss event list with the operations manager without delay. 8.1.6.2. Differential current alarm Central unit
HMI text Diff. cur. alarm LEDs Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Event CU: 41815_Diff. current alarm active
Table 8-6
Differential current alarm on the central unit
8-9
Possible causes: Fault in one or several current circuits (between c.ts and bay units). The fault can be located by checking the current measurements by each of the bay units. Corrective action: Block the protection. Compare all the feeder currents with the values displayed in the control room. If differential current is flowing in two busbar zones, check the isolator image. Check the directional comparison measurement: Short circuit all the c.ts at the inputs of the bay units of feeders supplying energy to the busbars in the phases and busbar zones concerned. The differential current must increase with each infeed that is short-circuited. Should this not be the case, check the c.t. circuit of the feeder that does not produce an increase (all screws tight and jumpers correct?). If the fault cannot be located, continue with the c.ts of feeders conducting energy away from the busbars. In this case, the current must reduce with each feeder short-circuited. Should this not be the case, check the c.t. circuit of the feeder that does not produce a decrease. 8.1.6.3. Isolator alarm Central unit and bay units
HMI text Isol. alarm Feeder name Isol. alarm LEDs Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Event CU: 41505_Isolator alarm active CU: 41830_Switch inhibit active BU: No event
Table 8-7
Isolator alarm
Possible causes: Either the isolator auxiliary supply for a feeder has failed or the CLOSED and OPEN signals are both active together. Corrective action: Measure the isolator image signal voltages at the opto-coupler inputs and if both are present, check the circuits back to the auxiliary contacts (no voltage, open-circuit lead or incorrect operation of the isolator auxiliary contacts).
8-10
8.1.7.
Protection blocking functions Central unit and bay units

HMI text <Subsystem> blocked (Subsystem = BBP, BFP, EFP, OCDT, PDF) Contacts blocked LEDs Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Event CU: 41405_All blocked active BU: 21405_All blocked active
CU: 41410_Output relays blocked active BU: 21410_Output relays blocked active CU: 42405_BBP blocked active BU: 22405_BBP blocked active
BBP blocked Feeder BBP blocked
BFP blocked Feeder BFP blocked
CU: 43405_BFP blocked active BU: 23405_BFP blocked active
EFP blocked Feeder EFP blocked
CU: 45405_EFP blocked active BU: 25405_EFP blocked active
OCDT blocked Feeder OCDT blocked
CU: 45405_OCDT blocked active BU: 25405_OCDT blocked active
PDF blocked Feeder PDF blocked
CU: 47405_PDF blocked active BU: 27405_PDF blocked active
Table 8-8
Blocking protection functions
8-11
Possible causes: The blocking of a protection function is due to either an active opto-coupler input or an internal alarm, e.g. differential current alarm. Corrective action: Corrective action is only necessary if blocking is unintentional. If this is the case, check whether a voltage is being applied to an input which indicates a likely fault in the external circuit. If the fault appears to be caused by an internal alarm, check whether there is a corresponding display and correct the cause of the alarm (see instructions for the corresponding alarm). 8.1.8. Protection tripping A trip is indicated by the red LED on the front of the central unit and the bay unit concerned. The text on the display disappears as soon as any button on the respective unit is pressed. The text is also added to a list in the central unit and in the bay unit concerned. 8.1.8.1. Resetting latched signals and relays
HMI text Reset latching C: Reset E: Quit LEDs Event -
Table 8-9
Resetting latched signals and relays
Latched signals and relays can be reset by pressing button C or the corresponding reset button. To prevent an active trip from being reset by mistake, the button C has to be pressed to reset a latched trip signal, which is not what one would expect from the assigned functions of the buttons on the local control unit.
8-12
8.1.8.2.
Tripping Central unit

HMI text Date Time TRIP Feeder name Bus zone * Date Time BFP trip t 1/2 Feeder name Date Time EFP trip Feeder name Date Time OCDT trip Feeder name Date Time PDF trip Feeder name LEDs Green lit, red lit Event CU: CU: CU: CU: CU: 42305_BBP trip active 42310_BBP trip L0 active 42315_BBP trip L1 active 42320_BBP trip L2 active 42325_BBP trip L3 active
Green lit, red lit
CU: 43305_BFP trip t1 active CU: 43310_BFP trip t2 active CU: 44305_EFP trip active
Green lit, red lit
Green lit, red lit
CU: 45305_OCDT trip active
Green lit, red lit
CU: 47305_PDF trip active
Table 8-10
Central unit trips
8-13
Bay units
HMI text Date Time BBP TRIP Date Time BFP trip t 1/2 LEDs Green lit, red lit Event BU: 21110_TRIP active BU: 21115_REMOTE_TRIP active BU: 21305_BBP Trip active BU: 23105_BFP TRIP active BU: 23110_BFP_REMOTE_TRIP active BU: 23305_BFP trip t1 active BU: 23310_BFP trip t2 active BU: 23315_BFP TRIP L1 active BU: 23320_BFP TRIP L2 active BU: 23325_BFP TRIP L3 active BU: 23335_BFP Trip by BFP active BU: 24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP active BU: 24305_EFP trip active BU: 25105_OCDT TRIP active BU: 25305_OCDT trip active BU: 27105_PDF TRIP active BU: 27305_PDF trip active
Green lit, red lit
Date Time EFP trip Date Time OCDT trip Date Time PDF trip
Green lit, red lit
Green lit, red lit Green lit, red lit
Table 8-11 8.1.8.3. Trip list
Bay unit trips
The last 20 trips are recorded in a non-volatile memory. The details of a particular trip can be viewed by selecting it in the list. The last trip is at the top of the list. 8.1.8.4. Reading disturbance recorder data Refer to Section 4.5.13. View/Disturbance recorder. 8.1.9. 8.1.9.1. Special operating modes Inspection and maintenance The inspection status is signalled when an inspection/maintenance input is active (see Section 3.4.1.5. Inspection and maintenance).
8-14
Caution: The information on the positions of the isolators is lost if the bay unit is switched off or reset and the actual positions are detected when it starts again. This causes an isolator alarm which disappears as soon as the maintenance signal resets. An active isolator alarm in the maintenance mode thus means that the isolator positions being signalled may have changed. Central unit
HMI text Insp./Maintenance Feeder name LEDs Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Event CU: 41825_Inspection/maintenance active
Table 8-12 Bay units

HMI text
Inspection/maintenance on central unit
LEDs Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed
Event BU: 21815_Inspection/maintenance active
Inspection Inspection number
Maintenance
BU: 21815_Inspection/maintenance active
Table 8-13 8.1.9.2.
Inspection/maintenance on bay units
Transfer tripping A transfer trip is signalled when a transfer trip input is active (see Section 11.1.3.2.).
8-15
Central unit
HMI text Trip transferred LEDs Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Event Depends on configuration
Table 8-14 8.1.9.3.
Transfer trip
Isolator auxiliary contact logic Not OPEN=CLOSED A failure of the isolator image auxiliary supply is signalled when the isolator auxiliary contact logic Not OPEN=CLOSED is active: Central unit
HMI text Isol. alarm Feeder name Isol. alarm LEDs Green lit, yellow flashes until button on the local control unit pressed Event CU: 41505_Isolator alarm active CU: 41830_Switch inhibit active CU: 41820_Loss of supply voltage active BU: 21810_Loss of supply voltage active
Table 8-15 8.1.9.4.
Isolator alarm for Not OPEN=CLOSED logic
Activating and deactivating configured feeders Standard procedure The procedure for activating and deactivating configured feeders is as follows: 1 Start REBWIN. 2 Block REB500 by setting the input Block all on the central unit. 3 Any bay unit that needs to be deactivated must be switched off. 4 Select Installation mode in the REBWIN Testing menu and then click on Delete database in the protection system to delete the existing REB500 database. REBWIN then closes automatically.
8-16
5 Start REBWIN again when Load database appears on the local control unit. 6 Download the database with the changed data by selecting Download to protection system in the REBWIN File menu. REB500 then restarts automatically.
Figure 8.2
ABB references tab in the Activate/deactivate dialogue of the Configuration menu
Caution: Activating and deactivating single items of plant such as a single isolator can have an unforeseeable effect on the response of the protection system. When an item of plant is deactivated, the tripping and intertripping logics change and therefore it should only be done following consultation with ABB.
ABB accepts no responsibility for errors when using this function.
8-17
Figure 8.3
Modules in the central unit tab in the Activate/deactivate dialogue of the Configuration menu
Figure 8.4
System objects tab in the Activate/deactivate dialogue of the Configuration menu
8-18
Special procedure (for CPU 04) It occurs occasionally that the database is not completely deleted and REB500 cannot be restarted. In this case, the following procedure has to be followed: 1 Close REBWIN. 2 Switch off all the bay units. 3 Connect the PC to the central unit and start REBTERM. 4 Switch off the central unit and switch it on again while pressing the space bar <SPACE> until the monitor program returns SiMon CU #5 > 5 Delete the database by entering: SiMon CU #5 > ee 24:30 (CPU04) 6 Switch the central unit off and back on again. 7 Wait until Load database appears on the local control unit. 8 Start REBWIN: 9 Download the changed database to REB500 by selecting Download to protection system in the File menu. 10 Switch on all the activated bay units. 8.2. Maintenance The REB500 protection system operates electronically and does not contain any mechanical parts that are subject to wear and tear. The system does not therefore require any maintenance. Depending on the ambient conditions, we recommend removing the dust (e.g. with a vacuum cleaner) and wiping the front of the LCD with a damp cloth (perhaps with a little washing up liquid) from time to time. Do not use petrol or cleaning agents containing alcohol. Software routines continuously supervise the operation of the REB500 busbar protection, which therefore does not require periodic inspection. Nevertheless, since the protection equipment is only part of the overall protection system, we recommend periodically checking all the parts that are not automatically supervised. The test procedure illustrated by the examples in Sections
8-19
8.3.3. and 8.3.4. should be performed on all circuit-breakers at intervals of approximately two years. 8.3. 8.3.1. System additions, spare units and checks Activating a previously configured feeder Where REB500 was configured for the final state of a station and one of the previously configured feeders is installed and equipped with a bay unit, it has to be activated in the system to be included in the protection. The procedure in this case is: 1 Start REBWIN. 2 Block REB500 by setting the input Block all on the central unit. 3 Select Installation mode in the REBWIN Testing menu and then click on Delete database in the protection system to delete the existing REB500 database. REBWIN then closes automatically. 4 Start REBWIN again when Load database appears on the local control unit. 5 Download the database with the changed data by selecting Download to protection system in the REBWIN File menu. REB500 then restarts automatically. 6 Switch on all the activated bay units.
8-20
Figure 8.5
ABB references tab in the Activate/deactivate dialogue of the Configuration menu
Caution: Activating and deactivating single items of plant such as a single isolator can have an unforeseeable effect on the response of the protection system. When an item of plant is deactivated, the tripping and intertripping logics change and therefore it should only be done following consultation with ABB. ABB accepts no responsibility for errors when using this function.
8-21
Figure 8.6
Modules in the central unit tab in the Activate/deactivate dialogue of the Configuration menu
Figure 8.7
System objects tab in the Activate/deactivate dialogue of the Configuration menu
8-22
Special procedure (for CPU 04) It occurs occasionally that the database is not completely deleted and REB500 cannot be restarted. In this case, the following procedure has to be followed: 1 Close REBWIN. 2 Switch off all the bay units. 3 Connect the PC to the central unit and start REBTERM. 4 Switch off the central unit and switch it on again while pressing the space bar <SPACE> until the monitor program returns SiMon CU #5 > 5 Delete the database by entering: SiMon CU #5 > ee 24:30 (CPU04) 6 Switch the central unit off and back on again. 7 Wait until Load database appears on the local control unit. 8 Start REBWIN: 9 Download the changed database to REB500 by selecting Download to protection system in the File menu. 10 Switch on all the activated bay units. 8.3.2. Replacing a bay unit When connecting a bay unit to a central unit for the first time, for example, when replacing a defective module, it is necessary to configure the communications parameters, the node ID and the device ID as they were on the old unit. Caution: Incorrect or incorrectly executed settings will prevent the bay unit from starting and can disable the entire system. Refer to the report Bus section and device allocation (see Section 4.5.36. Tools/Report) for the values that have to be set, the bus section being the node ID.
8-23
The setting procedure is as follows: 1 Switch on the bay unit. When this display appears on the local control unit, press the E button. SiMon PPC Vx.xy Press E for Set-Up ....
2 The current setting appears on the local control unit. Use the arrow buttons and to change a value and move from one value to the next using and . 3 The new values are displayed and have to be confirmed by pressing the E button.
MVB parameters node ID = nnn device ID = ddd E=Save C=Cancel
Saving MVB para. (N:nnn D:ddd) E=Confirm C=Quit
Once the values have been confirmed, the bay unit restarts automatically with the new communication settings. 8.3.3. Example: Maintenance check on a feeder circuit-breaker Caution: Maintenance involves opening and closing circuitbreakers. Make sure that all safety notices are in place and all the safety precautions taken.
Note: REB500 is still fully operational while the following maintenance is being carried out. The following example of performing a maintenance check on a feeder circuit-breaker assumes a double busbar configuration.
8-24
Figure 8.8
Maintenance check on a feeder circuit-breaker
The isolator image auxiliary supply must not be switched off. The feeder must not be grounded. The maintenance procedure must be gone through step by step. The feeder is isolated from the busbars during the test and therefore cannot conduct power.
The maintenance procedure for a feeder connected to double busbars is illustrated in Figure 8.9.
8-25
Figure 8.9 8.3.3.1. Step 1
Steps of the feeder maintenance procedure
The conditions prior to maintenance can be seen from Figure 8.10 Configuration of the feeder before Step 1 (on load).
Figure 8.10 Configuration of the feeder before Step 1 (on load) Connect the PC to the central unit and start REBWIN. Open the circuit-breaker.
8-26
Close the circuit-breaker.
Check the statuses of the isolators and the circuit-breaker (providing they are active in the protection system) in REBWIN by selecting Switchgear objects in the View menu (see Figure 8.11 Checking the statuses of the switchgear).
Figure 8.11 Checking the statuses of the switchgear Interrupt the tripping circuit.
8-27
8.3.3.2.
Step 2 The conditions prior to Step 2 can be seen from Figure 8.12 Configuration of the feeder before Step 2.
Figure 8.12 Configuration of the feeder before Step 2 Short circuit the main c.t. leads at the terminals of the protection cubicle and open the jumper to the protection. Inject a current of 1 x IN into each phase of the analogue inputs. Read the current on the local control unit (see Section 8.1.3. Viewing data on the local control unit (HMI) or in REBWIN by selecting Analogue input measurements in the View menu (see Figure 8.13. Checking the currents at the analogue inputs).
8-28
Figure 8.13 Checking the currents at the analogue inputs 8.3.3.3. Step 3 The conditions prior to Step 3 can be seen from Figure 8.14 Configuration of the feeder before Step 3.
Figure 8.14 Configuration of the feeder before Step 3 Start the REBWIN test generator in the Test mode dialogue. All the output relays are automatically blocked. Enable all the relays again so that the system is operating normally.
8-29
Close the circuit-breaker. Trip trip circuit 1, R phase (see Figure 8.15 Using the test generator to initiate tripping).
Figure 8.15 Using the test generator to initiate tripping Check that the R phase pole of the circuit-breaker has tripped. Repeat the last two operations for the other phases and trip circuits. Check that the circuit-breaker is open, otherwise open it. Check the remote tripping function of the breaker failure protection if it is configured. The remote circuit-breaker must be ready to trip before this test. Make the transfer tripping circuit. This must operate the remote tripping relay and trip the remote circuit-breaker. Check that this has indeed happened. Check the signals to other systems.
8-30
8.3.3.4.
Figure 8.16 Configuration of the feeder before Step 4 Interrupt the transfer tripping circuit. Inject a current into the line protection (systems 1 and 2 if installed). Check that the starting signal has been received from the line protection by the breaker failure protection. Use the Binary input/output status dialogue for this purpose (see Figure 8.17 Checking the binary inputs). Remake the transfer tripping circuit.
The following test must also be performed if the busbar image of the circuit-breaker is being used: Close and reopen the circuit-breaker. Check the position of the circuit-breaker and the close command in the Binary input/output status dialogue (see Figure 8.17 Checking the binary inputs).
8-31
Figure 8.17 Checking the binary inputs 8.3.3.5. Step 5 The conditions prior to Step 5 can be seen from Figure 8.18 Configuration of the feeder before Step 5.
Figure 8.18 Configuration of the feeder before Step 5 Close and open the isolators to busbars 1 and 2. Check the positions of the isolators in the Binary input/output status dialogue (see Figure 8.17 Checking the binary inputs).
8-32
8.3.3.6.
Figure 8.19 Configuration of the feeder before Step 6 8.3.3.7. Reinsert the jumpers in the c.t. secondary circuit and remove the short-circuit from the main c.t. leads. Close the isolator to connect the feeder to the desired busbars. Close the circuit-breaker.
Step 7 The conditions prior to Step 7 can be seen from Figure 8.20 Configuration of the feeder before Step 7 (on load).
Figure 8.20 Configuration of the feeder before Step 7 (on load) Compare the actual load current with the value in the Analogue input measurements dialogue (see Figure 8.13 Checking the currents at the analogue inputs).
8-33
8.3.4.
Example: Maintenance check on a bus-tie breaker The maintenance procedure for a bus-tie breaker between a pair of double busbars is illustrated in Figure 8.21.
Figure 8.21 Steps of the bus-tie breaker maintenance procedure 8.3.4.1. Step 1 The conditions prior to maintenance can be seen from Figure 8.22 Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before Step 1 (on load).
Figure 8.22 Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before Step 1 (on load) Connect the PC to the central unit and start REBWIN. Open the bus-tie breaker.
8-34
8.3.4.2.
Open the isolators. If an overcurrent relay is connected to the same c.ts in series with REB500, short circuit its current inputs.
Step 2 The conditions prior to Step 2 can be seen from Figure 8.23 Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before Step 2.
Figure 8.23 Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before Step 2 Short circuit the main c.t. leads at the terminals of the protection cubicle and open the jumper to the protection. Completely block the busbar protection by applying the signal 32205_Block BBP to the central unit. Inject a current of 1 x IN into each phase of the analogue inputs. Read the current on the local control unit (see Section 8.1.3. Viewing data on the local control unit (HMI) or in REBWIN by selecting Analogue input measurements in the View menu (see Figure 8.13. Checking the currents at the analogue inputs). Enable the busbar protection again.
8.3.4.3.
Step 3 The conditions prior to Step 3 can be seen from Figure 8.23 Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before Step 2. Start the REBWIN test generator in the Test mode dialogue. All the output relays are automatically blocked. Enable all the relays again so that the system is operating normally. Close the bus-tie breaker.
8-35
8.3.4.4.
Trip trip circuit 1, R phase (see Figure 8.15 Using the test generator to initiate tripping). Check that the R phase pole of the circuit-breaker has tripped. Repeat the last two operations for the other phases and trip circuits. Check that the bus-tie breaker is open, otherwise open it. Check the signals to other systems.
Step 4 The conditions prior to Step 4 can be seen from Figure 8.23 Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before Step 2. Remove the short-circuit across the overcurrent relay (if installed). Inject a current into the overcurrent relay. Check that the starting signal has been received from the overcurrent relay by the breaker failure protection. Use the Binary input/output status dialogue for this purpose (see Figure 8.17 Checking the binary inputs). Close and reopen the bus-tie breaker. Check the position of the bus-tie breaker and the close command in the Binary input/output status dialogue (see Figure 8.17 Checking the binary inputs).
8.3.4.5.
Step 5 The conditions prior to Step 5 can be seen from Figure 8.23 Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before Step 2. Reinsert the jumpers in the c.t. secondary circuit and remove the short-circuit from the main c.t. leads. Close the isolators. Close the bus-tie breaker.
8.3.4.6.
Step 6 The conditions prior to Step 6 can be seen from Figure 8.22 Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before Step 1 (on load). Compare the actual load current with the value in the Analogue input measurements dialogue (see Figure 8.13 Checking the currents at the analogue inputs).
8-36
June 00
9.
9.1. 9.2. 9.2.1. 9.2.1.1. 9.2.1.2. 9.2.1.3. 9.2.2. 9.2.3. 9.2.4. 9.2.5. 9.2.5.1. 9.2.5.2. 9.2.5.3. 9.3. 9.3.1. 9.3.2. 9.3.3. 9.3.4. 9.4. 9.5.
Fault-finding
Safety instructions....................................................................9-2 Lists of possible faults ..............................................................9-3 General faults while starting the system...................................9-3 While starting the central unit ...................................................9-4 While starting the bay unit BU02 ..............................................9-7 While starting the REBWIN operator program .........................9-9 General faults in operation .....................................................9-10 System function failures .........................................................9-12 REBWIN errors ......................................................................9-17 Hardware failures ...................................................................9-19 500CMP01/500CSP01/500CIM01 .........................................9-19 500MBA01 .............................................................................9-20 500SCM01 .............................................................................9-20 Replacing units.......................................................................9-22 Procedure ..............................................................................9-22 Replacing modules in the central unit ....................................9-23 Replacing a bay unit...............................................................9-24 Report ....................................................................................9-25 Restoring the system to operation..........................................9-25 Returning modules for repair..................................................9-25
9-1
9.
9.1.
Fault-finding
Safety instructions
Caution: All work on the REB500 busbar protection system must be carefully planned. Errors when manipulating the system cannot only destroy components, they can also cause false tripping and serious interruption to the power supply. Modules that have been replace may only be repaired by the manufacturer.
Danger: Precautions must be taken in the immediate area when working on the central unit or one of the bay units to exclude any possibility of persons coming into contact with live parts. A danger of electrical shock also exists when measuring currents and voltages.
Danger: When replacing electronic modules, take the necessary precautions to prevent damage to components due to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
9-2
9.2.
Lists of possible faults The faults are divided into: faults during start-up faults during normal operation
9.2.1.
General faults while starting the system Faults are most likely to occur during installation of the protection system (i.e. while testing and commissioning it).
Code 10 Description Unsuccessful central unit start Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. Hardware Corrective action: Step 1: Table 9.2 on Page 9-4 20 Unable to start bay unit Possible causes: Aux. supply failure Corrective action: Step 1: Table 9.3 on Page 9-8 30 System blocked after startup Possible causes: 1. Active isolator alarm during start-up 2. Invalid event memory because of being switched off longer than 24 hours or a defective power reservoir. Uploading to REBWIN can cause blocking. Check the voltage at the optocoupler inputs for the busbar image isolator supervision. Acknowledge isolator alarm and the system will start. Delete the event memory using REBWIN and the system will start.
Corrective action: Step 1:
Step 2: Step 3:
60
System fails to respond. No caps fitted to unused 500SCM01 channels.
Possible causes: 1. Process bus failure Fit caps on unused 500SCM01 optocouplers. Corrective action: Step 1:
Table 9.1
Starting the protection system
9-3
9.2.1.1.
While starting the central unit

Code 10 Description LED on PSM 03 not lit although system switched on Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. 2. Aux. supply failure Fuse blown
Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: 15 Check power supply. Check fuse.
Loading database appears Possible causes: on the display and the 1. DBS (database) corrupted system resets immediately Corrective action: Step 1: Delete database using REBTERM terminal software and download the database to the protection system again using REBWIN.
20
The central unit LEDs do not flash while starting.
Possible causes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Defective local control unit cable Defective local control unit IP Serial defective or missing Ribbon cable between MVME and TRM defective or missing Firmware not installed. 500CMP01/500CSP01 monitor active
Corrective action: Step 1: Check the red LEDs on the back of the rack (500CUB02 only). If any are lit, the respective MVMEs are in the Reset/Monitor mode. Check that no external devices (PC or modem) are communicating with REB500. Step 2: Use REBLoad to check the REBSYS firmware. Step 3: Check whether a Serial IP is installed. Step 4: Check whether a Serial IP is installed and in the correct socket. Step 5: Check that two ribbon cables go from the 500CMP01 to the TRM. Step 6: Check the HMI cable and whether it is plugged in the right connector. Step 7: If the HMI is lit, the HMI cable is the wrong way round in the back plane connector. Step 8: The local control unit may also be defective and has to be replaced.
9-4
Code 40
Description
Possible causes and corrective action
The bus controllers fail to Possible causes: run within approx. 2 minutes 1. 500MBA01/500SCM01 2. Check jumper J1 on the 500CMP01/500CSP01 Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Check 500MBA01 according to Table 9.15 on Page 9-20. Check 500CSM01 according to Table 9.16 on Page 9-21. Check that jumper J1 is in place
on the 500 CMP01 (see Section 3).
Check that jumper J1 is not inserted on the 500CSP01 (see Section 3).
50
System does not respond
Possible causes: 1. 2. Process bus failure No caps fitted on unused 500SCM01 channels Fit caps on unused 500SCM01 opto-couplers.
Corrective action: Step 1: 60 Invalid 500SCM01 configuration displayed on the local control unit
Possible causes: 1. 2. Wrong 500SCM01 configuration in the 500CMP01-500MBA01 settings The 500SCM01 modules are in the wrong slots in the CU rack Check the 500SCM01 settings. Check that the 500SCM01 is in the correct slot.
Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: 65 System start-up stops as the SIG subsystem starts
Possible causes: 1. 500CSP01 or other modules configured but not inserted Either insert the missing module or deactivate it using REBWIN.
Corrective action: Step 1: 70 Load database is displayed on the HMI
Possible causes: 1. No database available Download database to the protection system using REBWIN. Corrective action: Step 1:
80
All the CU subsystems have Possible causes: initialised, but ITT_Ready 1. 500BIO01 is in the CU rack but and BBP_Ready do not deactivated appear in the event list Corrective action: Step 1: Remove 500BIO01.
9-5
Code 100
Description The system resets as soon as it is started
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. The process bus is not operating
Corrective action: Step 1: Check that the cycling times on the 500MBA01 and in the database are the same. Check the device ID (99) and the node_ID on the bus controller (see 500MBA01 settings). Check the 500SCM01 configuration in the 500CMP01/500MBA01 settings. Check the optical fibre link between the bus controller 500MBA01 and the 500SCM01. Check that two ribbon cables go from the 500CMP01 to the TRM. Check that one ribbon cable goes from the 500CSP01 to the TRM. Check that the TRM jumpers agree with the setting instructions. 500CIM01 or 500CSP01 is inserted but deactivated
Step 2:
Step 3:
Step 4:
Step 5: Step 6: Step 7:
Step 8:
105
The system start-up procedure stops at Check database
Possible causes: 1. 500MBA01 incorrectly fitted
Corrective action: Step 1: Check that the 500MBA01s are in the correct slots (see Setting Instructions).
110
The CU 500BIO01s have initialised, but are not writing events in the event list.
Possible causes: 1. 500BIO01 incorrectly configured
Corrective action: Step 1: Check the version of the 500BIO01 firmware using REBLoad. Check the device and node IDs. Check that the binary inputs are calibrated. Check that the auxiliary supply voltage is as given in the database.
Step 2: Step 3: Step 4:
115
CU resets after TIM starts
Possible causes: 1. PBI defective
Corrective action: Step 1: Replace the PBI.
9-6
Code 120
Description CU is ready and the bay units can be switched on
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. CU is ready. Switch on the bay units. Corrective action: Step 1:
Table 9.2 9.2.1.2.
Starting the central unit
While starting the bay unit BU02

Code 10 Description Possible causes and corrective action LED on PSM not lit although Possible causes: system switched on 1. Aux. supply failure 2. Fuse blown Check power supply. Check fuse. Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: 20 The bay unit LEDs do not flash while starting. 1. 2.
Possible causes: Defective local control unit cable Defective local control unit Check the HMI cable. The local control unit may also be defective and have to be replaced. Check in the CU event list whether it started successfully.
Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2:
30
Bay unit does not start
Possible causes: 1. 2. 3. Optical fibre link defective Defective 500SCM01 Device/node ID incorrect Check the optical fibre link to the CU. Check that the optical fibre link goes to the correct MVB segment. Check that the 500SCM01 channel and bay unit nodes agree. Check the BAP device and node IDs. Check the 500SCM01.
Step 3:
Step 4: Step 5: 35 System signals BBP start failed
Possible causes: 1. Probably wrong DSP software version loaded Corrective action: Step 1: Check DSP software version.
9-7
Code 40
Description All the bay units of an MVB segment do not start
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. Defective 500MBA01 2. Defective 500SCM01 3. Defective CPU Corrective action: Step 1: Switch off all the bay units on the respective segment. Step 2: Switch on the CU. Step 3: Check the CPU. The CU has started correctly when LED1 and LED2 on the associated 500MBA01 are lit. If not: - PBI defective - ribbon cable defective - TRM jumper incorrect Step 4: Check the 500SCM01.
50
A bay unit resets after starting
Possible causes: 1. Wrong device/node ID 2. BU not calibrated 3. Feeder deactivated but BU switched on Corrective action: Step 1: Check the device and node IDs on other units. Especially if a BAP has been replaced, the device or node ID may be wrong. Try to read the available binary and analogue inputs on the BU and verify the results. Step 2: Calibrate the inputs. Step 3: Check that the bay units of deactivated feeders are switched off.
60
The bay units generate an isolator alarm
Possible causes: 1. Wrong device/node ID 2. Isolator/CB incorrectly connected 3. Incorrectly calibrated binary inputs Corrective action: Step 1: Check the device and node IDs. Step 2: Check that the auxiliary supply voltage is as given in the database. Step 3: Check that the isolators and circuit-breakers are correctly connected. Step 4: Calibrate the binary inputs.
Table 9.3
Starting the bay units while starting the REBWIN operator program
9-8
9.2.1.3.
While starting the REBWIN operator program

Code 10 Description Communication cannot be established Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. COM port error IP Serial failure Defective ribbon cable Defective local control unit Defective serial cable Check that the correct COM port is being used. Check that no other application is already using the COM port (e.g. the mouse). Check that the right cable is being used. Check that REB500 is in the Ready status for the REBWIN link. Check that IP Serial installed on the 500CMP01 is running properly. Check that the two ribbon cables between 500CMP01 and TRM are fitted. The local control unit has a serial interface for the LCD and one for a PC. The latter may be faulty although the LCD works. Check the PC connection.
Step 3: Step 4:
Step 5:
Step 6:
Step 7:
20
No events although connected on-line
Possible causes: 1. HMI sessions Delete all sessions. Close REBWIN. Restart REBWIN. Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:
30
Only events from one bay unit
Possible causes: 1. Probably connected to just one bay unit Close REBWIN. Connect to CU. Restart REBWIN. Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:
Table 9.4
Starting the REBWIN operator program
9-9
9.2.2.
General faults in operation You may observe a fault, but cannot shut the system down (e.g. the system is selectively blocked). Check the signals and display on the local control unit to see what is blocking the system.
Code 10 Description System operating correctly Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. Operating conditions Corrective action: Step 1: No corrective action necessary. 20 The protection has tripped Possible causes: 1. BBP 2. BFP 3. EFP 4. OCDT 5. PDF 6. External trip Corrective action: Step 1: Save events. Step 2: Save the fault. Step 3: Reset trips. Step 4: Inform the engineer responsible. 30 An alarm is generated Possible causes: 1. Isolator image 2. Differential current 3. Hardware failure Corrective action: Step 1: Save events. Step 2: Save the fault. Step 3: Proceed to the next failure (Code 40). 40 Differential current alarm Possible causes: 1. C.t. or c.t. circuit fault 2. Busbar image error 3. Hardware failure Corrective action: Step 1: Check the feeder currents (phase relationship, see Section 8.1.6.2. Differential current alarm). Step 2: Compare with the actual load conditions. Step 3: Verify the isolator positions. Step 4: Check that the correct isolator contacts are in use and that Q1 and +2 are not reversed. Step 5: Check that both switch positions are configured. Step 6: Replace the bay unit.
9-10
Code 50
Description Isolator alarm
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. 2. Incorrect isolator or circuit-breaker auxiliary contact signals Auxiliary isolator supply failure
Corrective action: Step 1: Check the signal voltages at the binary inputs and the positions of the isolator auxiliary contacts and correct as necessary.
60
Only general alarm generated
Possible causes: 1. System or hardware failure 2. SCS communication failure 3. SCS time synchronisation 4. Synchronisation period shorter than a minute Corrective action: Step 1: Replace CPUs. Step 2: Replace the 500MBA01s. Step 3: Check LON or IEC103 communication. Step 4: Change SCS time synchronisation.
70
General alarm plus isolator alarm on a bay unit
Possible causes: 1. Communication failure Corrective action: Step 1: Check the 500SCM01 according to Table 9.16 on Page 9-21. Step 2: Check the 500MBA01 according to Table 9.15 on Page 9-20. Step 3: Check the bay unit.
80
General alarm plus isolator alarms on several bay units
Possible causes: 1. Communication failure Corrective action: Step 1: Check the 500SCM01 according to Table 9.16 on Page 9-21. Step 2: Check the 500MBA01 according to Table 9.15 on Page 9-20.
90
General alarm plus fan alarm
Possible causes: 1. 2. Defective fan Fan power supply failure
Corrective action: Step 1: Check the fan power supply. Step 2: Replace the fan.
9-11
Code 100
Description General alarm plus power supply alarm (redundant power supplies only)
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. Defective power supply unit (PSU)
Corrective action: Step 1: Check whether the green LED on the PSM03 is lit. Step 2: Check the station battery supply. Step 3: Check the fuse. 110 System restarts without reason (yellow LED flashes and the main menu is displayed on all the units) Possible causes: 1. The self-supervision function detected a fault and restarted the system or the system detected a supply voltage failure and restarted itself. Corrective action: Step 1: No corrective action necessary.
Table 9.5 9.2.3.
General faults in operation
System function failures The following table gives explanations for most of the system functions:
Code 10 Description Bay unit fails to trip Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Function initiating the trip not active on the particular bay unit Blocked tripping relay Tripping blocked by isolator or differential current alarm Overcurrent check feature active and fault current below pick-up Trip signal not assigned to the particular bay (bay and bay unit are not necessarily the same) Bus-tie breaker with 2 c.ts and intertripping failure (both c.ts must be assigned to the same process bus) The Block output relays command also blocks the protection functions in the bay units, e.g. breaker failure, overcurrent and end fault algorithms are not processed. Check that the function initiating tripping is active on the particular bay unit. Enable the tripping relays. Check for an active differential current alarm.
6.
7.
Corrective action: Step 1:
Step 2: Step 3:
9-12
Code
Description
Possible causes and corrective action Step 4: Step 5: Step 6: Step 7: Check for an active isolator alarm. Check the overcurrent check feature. Check that the tripping command goes to the right bay unit. Check that both sets of c.ts on the bus-tie breaker are assigned to the same process bus.
Table 9.6
Code 30
System function failures

Description
Time synchronisation by the Possible causes: minute impulse does not 1. Time synchronisation via IEC103 or function LON active (minute impulse synchronisation does not function when one of the two interbay bus protocols is configured) Corrective action: Step 1: Delete the protocol from the configuration if minute impulse synchronisation is necessary.
40
OC and CR events via IEC103
Possible causes: 1. OC events (opto-coupler inputs regardless of signals configured) and CR events (relay outputs regardless of signals configured) are not supported by the generic IEC103 protocol and if configured prevent the 500CIM01 software from starting. Delete the IEC103 configuration for the events.
Corrective action: Step 1: 50 500CIM01 resets sporadically
Possible causes: 1. Defective LON Check LON bus and install Corrective action: Step 1: properly.
60
500CIM01 appears to start Possible causes: correctly but communication 1. Defective 500CIM01 fails Corrective action: Step 1: Replace 500CIM01.
Table 9.7
500CIM01 failures
9-13
Code 10
Description Instable differential current
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. Incorrect power system frequency setting
Corrective action: Step 1: 20 Busbar protection fails to trip Check the power system frequency setting using REBWIN.
Possible causes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. BBP function not activated BBP blocked by Block BBP input BBP blocked by an alarm Protection zone without c.ts making busbar protection impossible REB500 detects the circuit-breaker status and any configured CLOSE command and the CB is between the c.ts and the busbars.
Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Check that the BBP is activated. Check the 500BIO01 input on the CU. Check that the BBP is not blocked by the differential current alarm. Check that an isolator alarm is not preventing tripping. Verify the CB position.
Step 4: Step 5: 30 Protection zone measurement produces invalid values
Possible causes: 1. 2. Protection zone without c.ts making busbar protection impossible BU not functioning
Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Check that the protection zone has c.ts. Check the alarm on the CU which shows which BUs are operating and which are not.
30
Phase comparison measurement fails to block BBP
Possible causes: 1. Phase comparison algorithm inactive because the bay units are detecting less than 2 currents above the configured pick-up setting.
Corrective action: Step 1: No corrective action necessary.
9-14
Code 30
Description Measurement always active regardless of whether circuit-breaker is open or closed
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. CB close command not configured and therefore interpreted as active whether the aux. contact is open or closed and the measurement is always active.
Corrective action: Step 1: Configure the CB close command.
Table 9.8
Busbar protection failures
Code 30
Description Trip fails
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. 2. 3. BFP not activated in bay unit Block output relays is active and BFP cannot operate Current below pick-up
Overcurrent check feature active and current too low End fault protection is a separate REB500 protection function. Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Activate BFP. Check whether Block output relays active. Adjust the pick-up setting. Verify the overcurrent check feature.
Table 9.9
Breaker failure protection failures
9-15
Code 30
Description Trip fails
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EFP not activated in bay unit Block output relays is active and EFP cannot operate Current below pick-up Overcurrent check feature active and current too low CB close command not configured and therefore interpreted as active whether the aux. contact is open or closed and the EFP function cannot be activated. Activate EFP. Check whether Block output relays active. Adjust the pick-up setting. Verify the overcurrent check feature. Configure the CB close command.
Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5:
Table 9.10
Code
End fault protection failures

Description
10
Trip fails
Possible causes: 1. PDF not activated in bay unit 2. Block output relays is active and PDF cannot operate 3. Voltage below pick-up 4. Overcurrent check feature active and current too low Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Activate PDF. Check whether Block output relays active. Adjust the pick-up setting. Verify the overcurrent check feature.
Table 9.11
CB pole discrepancy function failures
9-16
Code
Description
50
Disturbance recorder fails to operate
Possible causes: 1. Disturbance recorder deactivated because last buffer register filled while reading disturbance recorder data Corrective action: Step 1: Activate disturbance recorder.
Table 9.12 9.2.4.
Disturbance recorder failures
REBWIN errors The REBWIN operator program can malfunction and generate the following error messages:
Code 102
Description Write_Session_Exist
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. 2. Same function accessed by a second PC (e.g. uploading events) Connection between PC and protection system terminated without closing REBWIN
Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Wait until the session of the second PC has been terminated. Select MMC session manager in the REBWIN Tools menu, close all sessions and restart REBWIN, making sure that no other PC is connected to the protection system.
103
Invalid_Session
Possible causes: 1. See Code 102
Corrective action: Step 1: 1004 TDB_Protocol_Error 1. See Code 102. Possible causes: Communication failure or internal SW error
Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Check the connections to the protection system. Repeat the operation and consult ABB should the problem persist.
9-17
Code 1006
Description TDB_Buffer_Error
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. Internal SW error Restart PC and REBWIN operator program. Repeat the operation and consult ABB should the problem persist. Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2:
2002
TGR_Is_Busy
Possible causes: 1. Function not executed Corrective action: Step 1: Repeat execution of function.
2003
TGR_No_Session
Possible causes: 1. Forcing statuses only possible in test mode
Corrective action: Step 1: Active test mode. 2004 TGR_Address_Not_Handle d Possible causes: 1. Configuration data in database and actual system configuration do not agree
Corrective action: Step 1: Check database in REBWIN (correct station). 2005 TGR_Configuration_Error Possible causes: 1. Invalid data in database Corrective action: Step 1: Download database to the protection system again. 2006 TGR_Not_Responding Possible causes: 1. 2. 3. No connection between CU and BU System not ready (during start-up) Addressed unit switched off or defective
Corrective action: Step 1: Check optical link between CU and BU. Step 2: Step 3: xxxx 1. Wait until system ready. Check unit.
Possible causes: Internal software error Corrective action: Step 1: Report failure to ABB.
Table 9.13
Error messages generated by the REBWIN operator program
9-18
9.2.5. 9.2.5.1.
Hardware failures 500CMP01/500CSP01/500CIM01

Code 10 Description LEDs lit as follows:
FAIL STAT
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. Unit operating properly No corrective action necessary. Corrective action: Step 1:
RUN
SCON
LAN
FUSE
SCSI
VME
20
Red Fail LED lit:

FAIL STAT
Possible causes: 1. Unit probably in monitor mode The respective MVMEs are in the Reset/Monitor mode. Check that no external devices (PC or modem) are connected to or communicating with REB500. Reset system. Corrective action: Step 1:
RUN
SCON
LAN
FUSE
SCSI
VME
Step 2:
Step 3: Replace unit if above unsuccessful. 30 Fuse LED lit:

FAIL STAT
Possible causes: 1. Defective fuse No corrective action necessary as fuse not used. Corrective action: Step 1:
RUN
SCON
LAN
FUSE
SCSI
VME
Table 9.14
500CMP01/500CSP01/500CIM01 failures
9-19
9.2.5.2.
500MBA01
Code 10 Description LEDs 1 and 2 lit: Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. 500MBA01 operating properly No corrective action necessary. Corrective action: Step 1:
5
20 Only LED 1 lit:
6
Possible causes:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Defective connection between 500MBA01 and 500SCM01 500SCM01 not operating 500MBA01 not configured Defective 500MBA01 Check connection between 500MBA01 and 500SCM01. Check the 500SCM01 according to Table 9.16 on Page 9-21. Check 500MBA01 device and node IDs.
Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:
Table 9.15 9.2.5.3. 500SCM01

Code 10
500MBA01 failures
Description All 500SCM01 LEDs lit:
Possible causes and corrective action Possible causes: 1. Protection system operating properly No corrective action necessary. Corrective action: Step 1:
9 10
20 Only LEDs in right-hand column lit: Possible causes: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Corresponding 500MBA01 not operating Defective connection between 500MBA01 and 500SCM01 500SCM01 not configured 500SCM01 in wrong slot Associated Tx line interrupted Defective 500SCM01
9 10
9-20
Code
Description
Possible causes and corrective action Corrective action: Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5: Check that the respective 500MBA01 is operating. Check connection between 500MBA01 and 500SCM01. Configure the 500SCM01. Check the 500SCM01 slot and correct as necessary. If only some of the LEDs in the left-hand column are not lit, only some of the channels are defective and therefore attempt to use any serviceable channels that are available. Replace the 500SCM01.
Step 6: 30 Only LEDs in left-hand column lit: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Possible causes: Corresponding channel not used Corresponding BU not connected Corresponding BU switched off Optical fibre link to BU interrupted Associated Rx line interrupted None if channel indeed not used. Check BU connection. Switch BU on. Check the optical fibre link. Attempt to use a serviceable Rx channel that is available. Replace the 500SCM01.
9 10
Step 3: Step 4: Step 5: Step 6:
60
All LEDs flicker
Possible causes: 1. Defective 500SCM01 Replace the 500SCM01. Corrective action: Step 1:
70
Process bus failure
Possible causes: 1. Caps missing from unused channels Check caps on unused channels and fit as necessary. Corrective action: Step 1:
Table 9.16
500SCM01 failures
9-21
9.3.
Replacing units
Caution: Units and modules may only be replaced with the permission of the engineer responsible for the protection system.
9.3.1.
Procedure The best time to replace assemblies is when the station is out of operation, but even in this case, care must be taken that no unintentional operation of switchgear can take place (danger to persons close to the item of plant). While the station is in operation, care must be taken that the station is still adequately protected when REB500 is switched off.
Caution: Power supply units may never be inserted or withdrawn with the auxiliary supply connected. Therefore place the switch on the front of the power supply unit in the off position and unplug the green connector on the end of the battery cable. It is insufficient to simply switch off the unit. The other modules may only be inserted or withdrawn when the switch on the front of the power supply unit 500PSM03 in the off position or there is no power supply unit fitted.
9-22
9.3.2.
Replacing modules in the central unit

Slot Module Backplane 500CUB01 ID = 2 1 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Backplane 500CUB02 ID = 5 1 20 4 5 7 8 10 11 -12 -15 13 14 16 17 18 19
500PSM03 500PSM03 500CMP04 500TRM02/500MBA01 500CSP04(1) 500TRM02 / 500MBA01 / 500SCM01 500CSP04(2) 500TRM02 / 500MBA01 / 500SCM01 500CSP04(3) 500TRM02 / 500MBA01 / 500SCM01 500CSP04(4) 500TRM02 / 500MBA01 / 500SCM01 500CSP04(5) / 500CIM04 500TRM02/03 / 500MBA01 / 500SCM01 500MBA01 / 500SCM01 500MBA01 / 500SCM01 500BIO01 / 500MBA01 / 500SCM01 500BIO01
After replacing a 500CMP04, 500CSP04, 500CIM04, 500MBA01 or 500BIO01 module, it is necessary to reconfigure the communication addresses (device and node IDs). The corresponding procedure is as follows: 1 Switch off the CU. 2 Connect a PC to the LHMI on the CU. 3 Start the REBLoad program which is in the same directory as REBWIN. 4 Select Open project database in the File menu and load the system configuration file.
9-23
Figure 9.1
System configuration file dialogue
5 Click on the <Check> button, after which REBLoad waits for communication to be established with the CU. 6 Switch on the REB500 CU. 7 REBLoad checks the CU configuration on the basis of the system configuration file. Correctly configured boards appear green and incorrectly configured boards red. 8 Click on the <Start> button to completely reconfigure the CU. 9 Refer to Section 9.4. Restoring the system to operation for the remainder of the procedure. 9.3.3. Replacing a bay unit After replacing a bay unit it is only necessary to reconfigure the device and node IDs (see Section 8.3.2. Replacing a bay unit).
9-24
9.3.4.
Report Record all modules that are replaced in a report and update the report every time a module is replaced.
9.4.
Restoring the system to operation
Caution: The protection system may only be restored to operation with the permission of the engineer responsible for it.
The protection system starts and initialises automatically when the power supply unit is switched on.
9.5.
Returning modules for repair Defective modules should be shipped accompanied by a full description of the failure, wherever possible in the original packing or in packing that affords adequate protection from moisture, vibration and electrostatic discharge to your ABB company or agent or to the following address: ABB Power Automation Ltd., Haselstrasse 16/122 CH-5401 Baden Switzerland
9-25
June 00
10.
10.1. 10.2. 10.3. 10.3.1. 10.3.2. 10.3.3. 10.3.4. 10.4.
Storage, decommissioning and disposal

Safety instructions..................................................................10-2 Storage ..................................................................................10-2 Decommissioning...................................................................10-2 Switching off...........................................................................10-2 Disconnecting the instrument transformers............................10-3 Disconnecting auxiliary circuits ..............................................10-3 Dismantling ............................................................................10-3 Disposal .................................................................................10-3
10-1
10.
10.1.
Storage, decommissioning and disposal

Safety instructions Caution: Before removing REB500 from operation, make sure that the station is adequately protected by other protection devices and systems.
Caution: After REB500 has been removed from operation, surrounding items of plant may still be live. Therefore take the necessary precautions to make the working area safe. 10.2. Storage The equipment may never be stored outdoors. The protection cubicle and other components must be stored in a clean, dry, closed room which is not subject to wide fluctuations of temperature. The equipment packing is designed for a certain maximum storage period. The original packing must be replaced or at least the desiccate in the packing checked and replaced if necessary should the maximum storage period is exceeded. Special longterm storage packing includes hygrometers which are visible through openings. The permissible storage temperature range is 40 C to +85 C. Refer to the general ABB documentation for detailed storage instructions. 10.3. Decommissioning Danger: When designing the station, it must be taken into account that the REB500 system can be switched off. REB500 may also be connected to other protection systems and the absence of its output signals may cause them to trip and open circuit-breakers unintentionally. 10.3.1. Switching off To switch off the REB500 system, place the switches on the power supply units in the central unit and the bay units in the off position and withdraw the green power supply connectors.
10-2
10.3.2.
Disconnecting the instrument transformers C.ts Danger: C.t. circuits must never by open-circuit. When disconnecting the REB500 input circuits from the c.ts, the main c.t. circuits must be short-circuited first at the isolating and shorting terminals. Even when the whole station is switched off, c.t. circuits should never be left open-circuit. V.ts Danger: When the station is in operation, there is a dangerous voltage across the v.ts. Therefore use appropriately insulated tools to open the v.t. circuits. The connections to the v.ts must be correspondingly insulated and may never be shortcircuited. Even when the whole station is switched off, take care when disconnecting v.t. circuits and insulate the connections.
10.3.3.
Disconnecting auxiliary circuits Disconnect the auxiliary circuits (signal inputs and outputs, tripping circuits) one at a time and insulate each one. Dangerous voltages may also be involved in this case as well (signal voltage range 36 V to 312 V).
10.3.4.
Dismantling The central unit and bay unit equipment racks and housings can be removed from the cubicles, after which the cubicles can also be removed. Danger: When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.
10.4.
Disposal Observe local regulations concerning the disposal of electrical waste.
10-3
We recommend removing the boards from the racks. The housings and cubicles can then be disposed of as old iron and only the boards as electrical waste. Remove any NiCd batteries from the boards and dispose of them separately as batteries.
10-4
REB 500 1MRB520259-Uen / Mod. A
June 2000
11.
11.1. 11.1.1. 11.1.2. 11.1.3. 11.1.3.1. 11.1.3.2. 11.1.3.3. 11.1.3.4. 11.1.3.5. 11.1.3.6. 11.2. 11.2.1. 11.2.2. 11.2.3. 11.3. 11.3.1. 11.3.2. 11.3.3. 11.4. 11.4.1. 11.4.2. 11.4.3. 11.5. 11.5.1. 11.5.2. 11.6. 11.6.1. 11.6.1.1. 11.6.2. 11.6.3.
Options
Breaker back-up protection ....................................................11-3 Function of the breaker back-up protection............................11-3 Available signals for the breaker back-up protection..............11-5 Configuration of the breaker back-up protection ....................11-7 Breaker back-up protection in stations equipped with an bypass busbar............................................11-9 Trip redirection .......................................................................11-9 Current setting......................................................................11-10 Grading a two-stage breaker back-up protection .................11-12 Grading a one-stage breaker back-up protection .................11-15 Logic type.............................................................................11-15 End fault protection ..............................................................11-16 Function of end fault protection ............................................11-16 Available signals for end fault protection..............................11-18 Configuration of the end fault protection ..............................11-19 Time-overcurrent protection .................................................11-20 Time-overcurrent protection function....................................11-20 Available signals for time-overcurrent protection..................11-21 Configuration of time-overcurrent protection ........................11-22 Circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection .........................11-24 Circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection function............11-24 Available signals for circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection .................................................11-25 Configuration of the circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection .................................................11-26 Extended disturbance recorder ............................................11-28 Function of the extended disturbance recorder....................11-28 Available signals for the expanded disturbance recorder.....11-28 Release of the trip command ...............................................11-30 Release of trip through internal undervoltage function .........11-32 Configuration - voltage transformer......................................11-33 Release of trip with the aid of external enabling input "31805_External release BB-zone" ......................................11-34 Overcurrent release of the trip command.............................11-34
11-1
11.7. 11.7.1. 11.7.2. 11.7.3. 11.7.3.1. 11.7.3.2. 11.7.3.3. 11.7.3.4. 11.7.3.5. 11.7.3.6. 11.8. 11.8.1. 11.8.2. 11.8.2.1. 11.8.2.2. 11.8.2.3. 11.8.3. 11.8.3.1. 11.8.3.2. 11.8.3.3. 11.8.4. 11.8.4.1. 11.8.4.2. 11.8.4.3. 11.8.4.4. 11.8.4.5. 11.8.5. 11.8.5.1. 11.8.5.2. 11.8.5.3. 11.8.5.4. 11.8.5.5. 11.9. 11.9.1. 11.9.2. 11.9.3. 11.9.3.1.
Neutral current measurement ..............................................11-36 Function of neutral current measurement ............................11-39 Configuration of neutral current measurement .....................11-39 Calculations and verification ................................................11-40 Calculating the total burden PB ............................................11-40 Calculating the actual overcurrent factor n' ..........................11-40 Checking the stability in the case of an external fault...........11-41 Calculating the setting of IKmin ............................................11-41 Checking the trip action in the case of busbar short circuit (ground fault)........................................................................11-41 Example ...............................................................................11-42 Interbay bus (IBB) connection ..............................................11-45 Introduction ..........................................................................11-45 Hardware..............................................................................11-46 Basic components................................................................11-46 LON hardware configuration ................................................11-48 IEC 60870-5-103 hardware configuration ............................11-49 Common IBB functions ........................................................11-50 Basic IBB configuration ........................................................11-50 REB500 event configuration ................................................11-52 Transfer of differential current values...................................11-53 LON......................................................................................11-55 Installing a LON node...........................................................11-55 Addressing ...........................................................................11-56 Configuration........................................................................11-57 Commands via the LON IBB ................................................11-59 Displaying status information (events) .................................11-59 IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................11-65 Introduction ..........................................................................11-65 General functions .................................................................11-65 Disturbance recorder............................................................11-68 Generic REB500 functions...................................................11-68 Special information and instructions for configuring the control system ................................................................11-76 Interfaces .............................................................................11-79 Serial interfaces (RS 232) ....................................................11-79 Fibre optic connection ..........................................................11-79 Modem connection...............................................................11-80 Remote access via modem ..................................................11-80
11-2
11.
Options
The following protection functions can be integrated into REB500 as options:
11.1. 11.1.1.
Breaker back-up protection Function of the breaker back-up protection The circuit breaker is the last and most important link in the protection chain. The purpose of the breaker backup protection is to take the right action should the circuit-breaker fail to execute the trip command. This involves tripping the nearest circuit breakers surrounding the fault, which are mainly in the same station may also include one at the remote end of a line (intertripping). The principle of the breaker backup protection function is based on monitoring the time the fault persists after a trip command has been issued to the circuit breaker and it has been enabled by the main protection. The breaker backup protection function can be enabled phaseselectively via two separate inputs. All three phases can be enabled via up to 6 different inputs and the currents of all three phases monitored. Operation of the breaker backup protection can alternatively be enabled by an internal time-overcurrent function (by selecting the appropriate logic using the REBWIN operator program) and a trip command from the busbar protection. The internal signals are shown on a grey background in the block diagram of the breaker backup protection (Figure 11.1). The inputs are on the left and the outputs on the right. The input signal is a tripping signal generated by the central unit that was initiated by the busbar intertripping function (BBP, BFP t2 etc.)
11-3
I L1 1) This switch is closed in Version of the logic 3) Pay attention to the transfer trip function 4) For the Logic, version 4, overriding the timer t2 2) Set by means of the REBWIN operator program Timer t1
I L1 > setting
I L2
I L2 > setting
I L3
I L3 > setting
I MAX (L1, L2, L3) > setting
23315_BFP trip L1
11-4
S 1 R &
Timer t1
&
11105_External TRIP
OCDT_trip 1)
Figure 11.1
Timer t1
PDF_trip
23320_BFP trip L2
Trip-intertrip
13740_Start BFP L1L2L3/1
13745_Start BFP L1L2L3/2 23325_BFP trip L3
&
43305_BFP trip t1 (CU) Timer t1 23305_BFP trip t1 23105_BFP TRIP
13710_Start BFP L1/1
&
&
&
Intertrip 43310_BFP trip t2 (CU) 23310_BFP trip t2
Timer t1 active 4)
& & &
Timer t2 2)
3)
23335_Trip by BFP Transfer trip impulse width 3) off 23110_BFP remote TRIP 23405_BFP blocked
13705_External Start BFP
Timer t2 active 1
13205_Block BFP (BU) BFP blocked
Block diagram of the breaker backup protection (logic type 1)
HEST 985010 C
33210_Block BFP (CU)
&
43405_BFP blocked
The following internal REB500 functions can start the breaker failure function in all three phases: Busbar protection function An external trip command Time-overcurrent, providing logic 3 is configured Circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection, providing logic 3 is configured. 11.1.2. Available signals for the breaker back-up protection Binary input signals
Remarks Signal response Slow Disturb. rec.: Trigger? Record? no
33210_Block BFP
BFP
Table 11.1
Binary inputs on the central unit
Signal response
Used for disturbance rec.: Trigger? Record? yes yes yes yes yes
13205_Block BFP 13605_Trip transferred 13705_External start BFP 13710_Start BFP Lp/x 1371513735 13740_Start BFP L1L2L3/x 1374513765
fast slow fast fast fast
Table 11.2
Binary inputs on the bay units
11-5
Binary output signals

Display on local control panel Signal type Configure on n BIO module Used for disturbance rec.: Trigger? Record? no
43305_BFP trip t1
<Date / Time > BFP trip T1 Bay unit x red <Date / Time > BFP trip T2 Bay unit x red BFP blocked *) Flashes yellow
43310_BFP trip t2
no
43405_BFP blocked
no
Table 11.3
Binary output signals on the central unit

Display on local control panel Signal type Configure on n BIO module Used for disturb. rec.: Trigger? Record? TR, R
Protection function
23105_BFP TRIP
BFP
<Date / Time > BFP trip T1 Red None <Date / Time > BFP trip T1 Red <Date / Time > BFP trip T2 red BFP trip L1 Red BFP trip L2 Red BFP trip L3 Red none
23110_BFP remote TRIP 23305_BFP trip t1
BFP BFP
S S
2 1
TR, R TR, R
23310_BFP trip t2
BFP
TR, R
23315_BFP trip L1 23320_BFP trip L2 23325_BFP trip L3 23330_Trip transferred
BFP BFP BFP all
S S S S
1 1 1 1
TR, R TR, R TR, R TR, R
11-6
Protection function
Display on local control panel
Signal type
Configure on n BIO module
Used for disturb. rec.: Trigger? Record? TR, R TR, R
23335_Trip by BFP
23405_BFP blocked
BFP BFP
none BFP blocked Flashes yellow
T S
1 1
Table 11.4
Binary outputs on the bay units
11.1.3.
Configuration of the breaker back-up protection The breaker backup protection has two adjustable timers. At the end of time t1, a second attempt is made to trip the breaker, which has failed, to trip; at the end of time t2 the surrounding breakers are tripped. A transfer-tripping signal to the remote station generated either at the end of time t1 or t2 can also be enabled using the REBWIN operator program. The currents of the three phases are measured individually and compared with the pick-up setting, which is identical for the three phases. The timers can also be started independently of the overcurrent check and the main protection inputs via an external input (signal 13705_Ext. Start BFP). For safety reasons, a normally-open auxiliary contact on the circuit breaker should be connected in series with the external control signal applied to this input. Since there are three separate t1 timers for the individual phases, the REB500 breaker backup protection responds correctly to an evolving fault. Logic 4 can be used in stations with 2 redundant REB500 units, one for busbar and the other for breaker failure protection. In this case, the special input 13765_Start BFP L1L2L3_6 on the REB500 for breaker failure protection is used to instantly initiate intertripping after t1 independently of the time setting of t2.
11-7
Parameter BFP active

Setting (per current transformer)
Min.
Max.
Default inactive
Step
Unit
0,1
2,0
1,2
0,1
IN
Timer 1 active Timer 2 active Timer t1 Timer t2 Intertripping pulse duration Logic type 10 0 100 5000 5000 2000
active active 100 150 200 10 10 10 ms ms ms
Table 11.5 Detail
Parameters for setting breaker back-up protection
Figure 11.2
Breaker back-up protection
In the Detail view , the breaker back-up protection can be activated per bay: Intertripping (remote trip) can be applied after completion of either timer t1 or t2.
11-8
For a description of the different logic types, see Section 11.1.3.6 Logic type. 11.1.3.1. Breaker back-up protection in stations equipped with an bypass busbar Where the busbar system includes a bypass busbar and the breaker back-up function in bay unit BU_0 is excited by an external signal, bay unit BU_0 trips the whole busbar 2 in the above diagram instead of just circuit breaker Q9. This can be prevented if the circuit breaker Q9 in bay unit BU_9 has its own current transformer.
Busbar 1 Busbar 2
Q0
Q9
Bypass busbar
BU_0
BU_9
Figure 11.3
Bypass busbar
11.1.3.2.
Trip redirection If a circuit breaker is unable to trip (e.g. air pressure to low), the trip redirection function redirects its trip signal to other circuit breakers. The trip redirection function is basically independent of the breaker failure protection, but uses the intertripping output signal 23110_BFP and the trip by BFP signal 23335_Trip by BFP. A low-current check feature can be configured for the trip redirection function so that redirection only takes place when the respective feeder is conduction a certain current. The overcurrent check feature is used for this purpose (regardless of whether it is otherwise configured or not). Providing the trip redirection function is active, a tripping command is not issued locally to the circuit breaker in question.
11-9
13605_Trip redirection
&
&
23110_BFP intertrip
23335_Trip by BFP IL1 IL1 > setting Intertrip (CU) IL2 IL3 IL2 > setting IL3 > setting
BFP Trip (internal)
OCDT Trip (internal)
PDF Trip (internal)
11105_EXT.TRIP
BBP TRIP (internal)
HEST 985035 C
Figure 11.4 11.1.3.3.
Trip redirection
Current setting If the pick-up current of the breaker backup function is set too low there is a risk that the breaker backup protection will not reset quickly enough after a circuit breaker has been successfully tripped. This can be the result of decaying oscillations in the c.t. secondary circuit. Conversely the breaker backup protection may fail to operate if the setting is too high. This situation could arise, for example, due to severe c.t. saturation when the secondary current falls below the setting and the breaker backup protection resets. Recommendations now follow which enable the pick-up current of the breaker backup protection to be correctly set in relation to the c.t. data (n') and the set time. Basically, the current setting (IE) should be less than the minimum fault current IKmin of the corresponding feeder. Just to satisfy this condition, the setting would be:
IE 0.8 IK min = IN IN
This setting may be too high for conventional iron core c.ts because the measurement may not function correctly even at low fault currents due to transient components in the fault current. A failure of the breaker to operate will always be detected, but tripping could be delayed.
11-10
Iron core transformers (Class TPX) and transformers with residual flux air gap (Class TPY) It is necessary to know the transient overcurrent factor (n*) in order to design a scheme for operation with these c.ts. This is calculated from the effective overcurrent factor n' as follows:
n' = n PN + PE PB + PE
n* =
n' 1 + 2 f TN
After obtaining the transient overcurrent factor (n*), the settings are given by: a) Assuming n* <
0.8 IK min , IN IE n* IN
the current setting is
b)
Assuming n* >
0.8 IK min , IN IE 0.8 IKmin IN IN
the current setting is
Note: TPX and TPY transformers differ, in respect of transient characteristics, by a small remanence in the case of the TPY type. With regard to transient over-dimensioning, TPX and TPY hardly differ.
11-11
Calculation example
C.t. data: Ratio Rated burden PN Losses PE Rated overcurrent factor n Lead burden: Bay unit burden: Rated frequency f: Power system time constant TN: Minimum fault current IKmin: n' = 20
n* =
600/5 A 15 VA 7 VA 20 10 VA < 0.1 VA 50 Hz 80 ms 450 A
15VA + 7VA = 25.88 10VA + 7VA
25.88 = 0.99 1 1 + 2 50 0.08s s 0.8 IK min 0.8 450 A = = 0 .6 , IN 600A

IE 0.8 IK min , i.e. IE = 0.5 IN IN IN
Since n* = 0.99 >
the setting becomes
Linearised current transformers (TPZ)
Since these c.ts are scarcely subject to saturation, the setting is only based on the minimum fault current for the feeder:
IE 0.8 IK min = IN IN
11.1.3.4.
Grading a two-stage breaker back-up protection
Timer t1 is started 33 ms after the breaker backup protection receives a starting signal from the main protection. A second attempt is made to trip the circuit breaker and the timer t2 is started at the end of the set time t1. Should the circuit breaker again fail to trip within the set time of t2, the surrounding breakers are intertripped. Intertripping to the opposing side can be configured after completion of timer t1 as well as after t2.
11-12
Minimum setting:
Minimum setting for t1 Minimum setting for t2 Maximum tripping time t1 (at min. setting of t1) Maximum tripping time t2 (at min. setting of t1 and t2) where t1 > tCB + 18 ms + tRes t2 > ta+ tCB + 18 ms + tRes tCB + 18 ms + tRes + ta 2 * (tCB + 56 ms)
tCB = circuit-breaker operating time plus arc ignition time
ABB Power Automation Ltd. recommends an additional margin of 20 ms on the above minimum settings.
Caution: The correct operation of the breaker back-up protection can only be ensured when the above mentioned minimal time-settings are adhered to.
Example: The minimum setting for t1 with a circuit breaker operating time (tCB) of 40ms is: tCB + 18 ms + tRes = 40 + 18 + 20 = 78 ms. That results in a maximum tripping time of : tCB + 18 ms + tRes + ta = 40 + 18 + 20 + 22 = 100 ms.
11-13
Start of fault Measurement by main protection Backup protection start (main protection trip) Second attempt to trip circuit-breaker Trip bus section (intertripping)
te
t1
ta
t2
ta
t CB
t V t marg
t CB
t V t marg
Figure 11.5 Legend:

t1 t2 ta tCB tV tmarg
Breaker back-up protection time grading
timer t1 timer t2 delay time between timing stage and trip command (max. 22ms) circuit-breaker tripping time plus arc extinction time reset time of current measurement *) safety margin (>20 ms, general safety margin)
The above sequence (Figure 11.5) only runs all the way through if the circuit breaker has failed. Should the starting signal from the main protection disappear or the breaker backup protections own current measurement reset during the course of t1 or t2, the sequence is discontinued and the timer in question resets. The commands issued by the timers t1 and t2 cannot be executed if the timers are not started and run to the end of their set times. Setting the timer t1 or t2 to 0 ms means that the corresponding function is executed as soon as the starting conditions are fulfilled.
11-14
The recommended minimum settings for t1 and t2 are necessary to allow time for the busbar protection to reset after the circuit breaker has opened. *) This reset time is 18 ms and is not to be confused with the reset time from the data sheet. This refers to the reset of the output relay after the current decays after a successful trip to 0.
11.1.3.5. Grading a one-stage breaker back-up protection
A one-stage breaker backup protection is achieved by setting timer t2 to zero. Providing the starting conditions are fulfilled, the current check function is picked up and time t1 has expired, trip signals go to the bays own breaker, the surrounding breakers and via a transfer tripping channel to the remote end of the feeder.
11.1.3.6. Logic type
The internal breaker back-up protection can be changed for special applications. The breaker back-up protection scheme described here, is the logic-type 1. Alternative logics: 2. 3. Reserved for special applications, no description available. The breaker failure protection can also be started by the tripping signals from the time-overcurrent and circuit breaker pole discrepancy protections. Otherwise logic type 3 corresponds to type 1. The signal 13765_Start BFP L1L2L3_6 initiates, after BFP t1 irrespective of the setting for BFP t2, an intertripping. Otherwise logic type 4 corresponds to type 1.
4.
11-15
11.2. 11.2.1.
End fault protection Function of end fault protection
The end fault protection detects faults between a circuit breaker and the c.ts which cannot be cleared by the busbar protection on its own.
Pick-up delay t 0
CLOSE coil
CB "OPEN" auxiliary contact
&
EFP timer 0 (36 ms)
24305_EFP trip
44305_EFP trip (CU)
&
CB close command 1) IL1 > EFP setting 1) IL2 > EFP setting 1) IL3 > EFP setting
24105_EFP remote TRIP 2) Intertripping pulsewidth
24405_EFP blocked 14205_Block EFP 34215_Block EFP (CU) EFP blocked 44405_EFP blocked (CU)
1) EFP = end zone fault Typical setting 1.2 I N when engineering scheme 2) The signal "EFP remote TRIP" is available for transfer tripping. Its duration can be set using the operator program under Settings/System response.
Figure 11.6
Block diagram of the end fault protection with the current transformers on the line side
11-16
1) I L1 > EFP setting 1) I L2 > EFP setting 1) I L3 > EFP setting EFP timer 0 Pick-up delay t 0 (36 ms) 24105_EFP remote TRIP 44305_EFP trip (CU)
24305_EFP trip
&
EFP intertrip
CLOSE coil
CB "OPEN" auxiliary contact
&
CB close command
24405_EFP blocked 14205_Block EFP 34215_Block EFP (CU) EFP blocked
44405_EFP blocked (CU)
1) EFP = end zone fault Typical setting 1.2 IN when engineering scheme N
Figure 11.7
Block diagram of the end fault protection with the current transformers on the busbar side
To ensure that the end fault protection bases its decision on an effective image of the circuit breaker status, the signal circuit breaker open is delayed while the circuit breaker is actually opening. If a current is measured when the circuit breaker is open, a tripping command is issued after a further delay (set to 36 ms). The purpose of this timer is to enable a circuit breaker close command to be detected that is subject to internal signal transit times and breaker contact bounce times.
11-17
11.2.2.
Available signals for end fault protection Binary input signals

Remarks Signal response slow Disturbance rec.: Trigger? Record? no
34215_Block. PZM
PZM
Table 11.6

Signal response Disturbance rec.: Trigger? Record? yes
14205_Block. PZM
fast
Table 11.7
Binary inputs on the bay unit

44305_trip PZM
<Date / Time > trip PZM Bay unit x Red PZM blocked *) Flashes yellow
44405_PZM blocked
no
Table 11.8
Binary outputs on the central unit

Display on local control panel Signal type Configure on n BIO module Disturbance rec.: Trigger ? Record? TR, R
Protection function
24105_PZM Remote TRIP 24305_PZM trip
PZM
<Date / Time > PZM trip Red <Date / Time> PZM trip Red PZM blocked Flashes yellow
PZM
TR, R
24405_PZM blocked
PZM
TR, R
Table 11.9
11-18
11.2.3.
Configuration of the end fault protection
The following parameters can be set for the end fault protection using the REBWIN operator program:
Parameter EZP active Pick-up delay Pick-up setting 0.1 0.1 10.0 2.0 Min. Max. Default inactive 0.4 1.2 0.1 0.1 S IN Step Unit
Table 11.10
Parameters for setting end fault protection
To avoid false tripping after the circuit-breaker has opened, the delay for the end fault protection must be set longer than the two timer stages of the breaker backup protection (i.e. > timer t1 + timer t2). All bays are listed in the overview.
Detail
Figure 11.8
End fault protection
In the detail view, the end fault protection per bay can be activated and the on delay can be set. (This on delay only has meaning with the opening of the circuit breaker.)
11-19
11.3. 11.3.1.
Time-overcurrent protection Time-overcurrent protection function
The time-overcurrent function operates entirely independently of the other protection functions in each of the bay units
45805_OCDT Start (CU) Timer I L2 > setting
I L1 > setting
S
OCDT delay
25105_OCDT TRIP
I L3 > setting 1) I L1 < setting * RR 1) I L2 < setting * RR 1) I L3 < setting * RR
25305_OCDT trip
43305_OCDT trip (CU)
&
25405_OCDT blocked 15210_Block OCDT 35220_Block OCDT (CU) OCDT blocked 45405_OCDT blocked (CU)
1) RR = reset ratio (OCDT) Typical setting 0.95 when engineering scheme
Figure 11.9
Block diagram of the time-overcurrent function
The time-overcurrent function does not intertrip the respective busbar protection zone.
11-20
11.3.2.
Available signals for time-overcurrent protection
Remarks
Signal response slow
Disturbance rec.: Trigger? Record? no
35220_OCDT blocked
OCDT
Table 11.11

Signal response Used for disturbance rec.: Trigger? Record? yes
15210_OCDT blocked
fast
Table 11.12

45305_OCDT trip
<Date / Time > OCDT trip Bay unit x Red OCDT blocked *) Flashes yellow None
45405_OCDT blocked 45805_OCDT start
S S
2 2
no no
Table 11.13
11-21
Protection function
Signal type
Configure on n BIO module
Disturbance rec.: Trigger? Record? TR, R
25105_OCDT TRIP
OCDT
<Date / Time > IMAX trip Red <Date / Time > IMAX trip Red OCDT blocked Flashes yellow
25305_OCDT trip
OCDT
TR, R
25405_OCDT blocked
OCDT
TR, R
Table 11.14
11.3.3.
Configuration of time-overcurrent protection
The operating program REBWIN offers the following parameters for setting time-overcurrent protection.
Parameter OCDT active

Pick-up value Delay
Min.
Max.
Default Inactive
Step
Unit
0,1 0
20,0 10000
2,0 2000
0,1 10
IN ms
Table 11.15
Parameters for setting time-overcurrent protection
All bay and current transformer details, are shown in the overview.
11-22
Detail
Figure 11.10 Time-overcurrent protection In the detail view, the time-overcurrent protection can be activated per bay and the pick-up setting can be set.
11-23
REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Mod. A
11.4. 11.4.1.
Circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection Circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection function
The circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection is a local protection function in the bay unit which supervises that the three circuitbreaker poles open and close simultaneously. The tripping condition is fulfilled when at least one of the phase currents is higher than setting and the difference between the phase currents (discrepancy factor) exceeds a given minimum for the set time.
I L1 > PDF_CPF *I MAX
IMAX
(greatest of
I L2 > PDF_CPF *I MAX I L3 > PDF_CPF *I MAX
1 &
PDF timer t 0
I L1 , I L2 , I L3)
I MAX > PDF_CPL

M A X
27305_PDF Trip
17710_Start PDF
& &
47305_PDF Trip 27105_PDF TRIP
PDF starting configured
27405_PDF blocked 17205_Block PDF
1
37205_Block PDF
PDF blocked
Figure 11.11 Block diagram of circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection To verify a pole discrepancy, the current criteria as well as the condition of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts, must be taken into account (plausibility check). From the Figure 11.11: the output signal of the function is enabled by the binary input "17710_Start PDF". If the input "17710_Start PDF" is not parameterised, then this function is released. The circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection function does not intertrip the respective busbar zone. Caution: Without a plausibility check, the opposing breaker can be affected under certain conditions.
11-24
11.4.2.
Available signals for circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection Binary input signals
Remarks Signal response slow Disturbance rec.: Trigger? Record? no
37205_Block PDF
PDF
Table 11.16
Signal response
Used for disturbance rec.: Trigger? Record? yes yes
17205_Block PDF 17710_Start PDF
fast fast
Table 11.17

47305_PDF trip
<Date / Time > PDF trip Bay unit x Red PDF blocked *) Flashes yellow
47405_PDF blocked
no
Table 11.18
11-25
Protection function
Signal type
Disturbance rec.: Trigger ? Record? TR, R
27105_PDF TRIP
PDF
<Date / Time> PDF trip Red <Date / Time> PDF trip Red PDF blocked Flashes yellow
27305_PDF trip
PDF
TR, R
27405_PDF blocked
PDF
TR, R
Table 11.19
11.4.3.
Configuration of the circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection
Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection settings:

Parameters PDF enabled
Setting Delay Discrepancy factor
Min.
Max.
Default Disabled
Step
Unit
0.1 100 0.01
2.0 10000 0.99
0.2 1500 0.6
0.1 100 0.01
* IN ms * Imax
Table 11.20
Setting parameters of the circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection
Where single-phase auto-reclosure is being applied on a line, the time delay of the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection must be set longer than the total auto-reclosure cycle time. The discrepancy factor is the maximum permissible difference between the amplitudes of two phases. All bays are listed in the overview.
11-26
Detail
Figure 11.12 Circuit breaker pole discrepancy protection
11-27
11.5. 11.5.1.
Extended disturbance recorder Function of the extended disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder that is integrated in the busbar protection can record bay unit currents, internal and external binary signals and optionally also voltages. The following options are available:
Analogue channels Recording time Choice of sampling rate for 50Hz / 60Hz 2400 Hz 2880 Hz 1,5 s X X 6s 10 s 1200 Hz 1440 Hz 3s 12 s 20 s 600 Hz 720 Hz 6s 24 s 40 s
Options Standard Option 1 Option 2
4x currents X X X
4x voltages
Table 11.21
Recording times of the disturbance recorder options
Providing only currents need to be recorded, the available recording time is doubled in the case of options 1 and 2. The data for each bay unit and record can be saved to a file on the PC in the standard ComTrade format. The data are then available for viewing and evaluation using the ABB WinEve program
11.5.2. Available signals for the expanded disturbance recorder Binary input signals
Remarks Signal response Disturbance recorder: Trigger? Record? no
36705_General start DR
DR
slow
Table 11.22
11-28
Signal response 16705_Start DR_x 1671016750 fast
Used for disturbance rec.: Trigger? Record? yes
Table 11.23

Protection function 26805_DR ready 26810_DR memory full 26815_DR recording
26820_DR record available
Display on local control panel None None None None
Signal type S S S S
Disturbance rec.: Trigger? Record? TR, R TR, R TR, R TR, R
DR DR DR DR
Table 11.24
11-29
11.6.
Release of the trip command
The effect of both the internal low voltage check as well as the general release input signal per protection zone, on the different protection functions can be defined in a configuration matrix. In the matrix, the vertical columns are the release criteria and in the horizontal rows are the affected functions.
Functionality Only U< 1) Only External Release Input 2) Release criteria U< AND External release SS
3)
U< OR External release SS 3)
Release of the related bay function 4)
BBP_L1L2L3 BBP_L0 BFP EFS OCDT PDS ext. TRIP BB zone (CU)PJB Zone (UC) Ext. TRIP BB zone (BU) Ext.TRIP
Table 11.25
REB500 release criteria
default values
1) 2)
can only be selected if U< is configured can only be selected if input 31805_External release BB-zone is configured can only be selected if U< AND input 31805_External release BBzone is configured. can only be selected if U AND/OR input 31805_External release BBzone is configured.
3)
4)
11-30
Figure 11.13 Low voltage check - overview
Figure 11.14 Low current check trip
11-31
Figure 11.15
11.6.1.
Low voltage check - detailed view
Release of trip through internal undervoltage function
In general, a short circuit on a busbar causes a voltage dip. The undervoltage function senses this dip and can be used to release the trip function according to Table 11.25. The voltage dip caused by a fault must be lower than a certain alarm level. This level can be set with the use of the user software (providing that the undervoltage check function has been activated during the engineering phase). The undervoltage check function operates per protection zone. If all voltages (phase-earth and/or phase-phase according to the connection) are higher than the setting of the undervoltage criteria, then the trip function of each bus zone and their connected circuit breaker will be blocked. If a protection zone has not been allocated a voltage transformer (e.g. an open isolator), the undervoltage function of this protection zone will be released. If the breaker back-up protection is started by the trip of an external distance protection, it can occur that the voltage dip caused by a remote short circuit (line fault), does not reach the set undervoltage criteria. It is therefore normally recommended that the trip of the breaker back-up protection be made independent of the low voltage check function. Should the voltage check function be selected in spite of the drawbacks, then the voltage dip setting must be verified by a network calculation.
11-32
The allocation of the voltage transformer within the busbar image proceeds similar to the allocation of current transformers and circuit breakers. The position of the auxiliary contacts of the miniature circuit breakers which protect the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer, are not taken into account. If the miniature circuit breaker is opened, the low voltage check function corresponding to the particular busbar zone is activated by REB500. If a protection zone has been assigned multiple voltage transformers (undervoltage measurements), then all the low voltage release signals are wired in an AND configuration. This means that a missing voltage caused either by an open miniature circuit breaker or an interruption of the transformer circuit does not lead to the release of the affected zone. When an invalid voltage measurement is established (bay unit is switched off / power failure), then the low voltage release of the affected bay is activated so that the protection is not blocked.
11.6.1.1. Configuration - voltage transformer
This menu item appears only if voltage transformers have been physically built in. Changes to the voltage transformer description as well as the voltage transformer transformation ratio are shown in the overview diagram:
Figure 11.16 Menu Configuration voltage transformer
11-33
In the input field "Markings", the description can be expanded or changed. The transformation ratio consists of nominal primary and secondary ratios that can be entered into the input field "Transformer ratio". The connection configuration of the voltage transformers is entered into the input field "Connection".
11.6.2. Release of trip with the aid of external enabling input "31805_External release BB-zone"
This input enables the tripping of individual busbars in accordance with Table 3.1 (see also Section 3.3.2.6). Before this function is used at least one signal "31805_External release BB-Zone" must be configured. If busbars are interconnected (e.g. closed longitudinal isolator), they are only released if the corresponding signals "31805_ External release BB-Zone" are active and logically linked together (logical AND ).
11.6.3. Overcurrent release of the trip command
The over current release is applicable for the tripping commands of the busbar protection respectively intertripping commands (also applicable for end fault and breaker back-up protection). If the measured feeder current value lies under the adjustable setting level of the over current release function, then the tripping of the circuit breaker in the affected feeder will be prevented.
IL1 IL2 I L1 >
I L2 > I L3 >
1 &
21110_Trip
IL3
BBP trip BBP trip BBP trip
ITT 1
HEST 005016 C
Figure 11.17 Diagram overcurrent release If a trip results from the busbar protection and the pick-up setting of the over current release is not exceeded, then a tripping of the affected feeder is prevented. However, the trip action concerned generates an event in the central unit and displays the result on the local display unit of the CU (Local HMI). See also Section 3.3.3 "Intertripping system".
11-34
The current pick-up setting can also be used for trip redirection independent of whether the overcurrent release function is configured or not. Overview
Figure 11.18 Overcurrent release - overview Detailed view
Figure 11.19 Overcurrent release - detailed view
11-35
11.7.
Neutral current measurement
NOTE: Only in cases of impedance grounded networks will the neutral current monitoring be activated upon the clients request.
The configuration of the busbar protection in impedance grounded networks must take the following physical conditions into account: Limited single-phase to ground fault current levels (Ikmin 1ph and k-factor values are possibly lower than the operating range of the phase measurement system). With single phase faults on the busbar, current flows away from the busbar because of the relatively high short circuit impedance (Ib, see also Figure 11.20 "Impedance grounded network"). The phase measurements of a stabilizing current directional comparison protection system does not trip in this case. In order to detect single phase faults in impedance grounded networks and considering the comments already mentioned above, an additional fourth measurement system (neutral measurement I0) is included in.
+Ib
Ik = 2Ib k= Ik+Ib Ik L1 L2 L3
HEST 985008 C
|Ik+Ib-Ib| |Ik+Ib|+|Ib|
k = 0,5
Figure 11.20 Impedance grounded network
11-36
At a fault current Ik corresponding to twice the load current Ib, flowing in the affected phase L1, the restraining factor k is only 0.5 (Figure 11.20). Thus the restrained amplitude comparison function cannot detect the internal fault at the usual k setting of 0.80. Furthermore, the current is flowing away from the busbar so the phase comparison measures a phase-angle of approximately 180 degrees thus preventing the trip command. Therefore the neutral current I0 has to be measured as well and evaluated together with the restrained amplitude comparison and the phase comparison functions. The neutral current evaluation is only necessary by phase-toground faults and should only be used for these faults. The monitoring of the conductor currents serves as the measuring criteria. Whether it is included in the evaluation or not depends on the levels of the phase currents. Even if the phase currents do not drive the c.ts into saturation, their ratio errors can still produce an apparent neutral current on the secondary side. The neutral current is therefore only evaluated when none of the phase currents exceeds a set value (typically 5 IN). This prevents the neutral current from being evaluated for phase-to-phase and three-phase faults. Finally, the harmonic level is monitored as added security that the neutral current can only be evaluated when there is definitely no influence due to c.t. saturation. This feature also prevents the evaluation of the neutral current during transformer inrush currents.
Caution: To ensure in all cases a problem free blocking of the neutral current monitoring function during current transformer saturation the inductive load on the current transformer must be reduced as much as possible. This means that under no circumstances are electromechanical relays or similar devices allowed in the current transformer circuit.
For exact dimensioning or setting of the neutral current measurement systems, detailed site data are absolutely essential. Per busbar section: IKS3max TS3max IKS3min max. phase fault current for 3-phase short circuit
time constant of the direct current component of lS3max
max. phase fault current for 3-phase short circuit
11-37
TS3min
time constant of the direct current component of IKS3min
IKS1max
TS1max

time constant of the direct current component of IKS1max
IKS1min
TS1min

Per feeder: IKA1max TA1max IBAmax INprim INsec PN n UK PE RCT l A PBG RBG max. phase fault current for single phase short circuit time constant of the direct current component of IKA1max max. load current current transformer primary rated current current transformer secondary rated current current transformer rated power overcurrent factor of the current transformer knee-point voltage of the current transformer current transformer losses resistance of the secondary winding length of the current transformer secondary wiring (single length) square area of the current transformer wiring sum of the burden of all connected devices sum of the burden resistors of all connected devices
The following points must be checked: Stability of the l0 measuring system for external faults Smallest allowed base current (trigger level) for the differential current comparison Saturation point of the transformer relevant to the necessary operating range of the neutral current measurement (the transformer should not saturate in the operating range of the l0 measurement).
11-38
11.7.1.
Function of neutral current measurement
Neutral measurement is used chiefly in resistance earthed networks. The resistor (or resistors) very often limits the singlephase phase fault current to a value which lies below the operating range of the phase measurement system. Also, in the case of single phase faults on the busbars, currents flow away from the busbars because of the relatively high short circuit impedance. The phase measurement of a current stabilizing directional comparison protection does not trip in this case. A fourth measuring system namely, neutral measurement, is used to detect single phase faults in resistance earthed networks. The best technical solution for detecting neutral currents is with the use of core-balance current transformers that encompass all three phases. If these are not available, then the neutral current is determined by the sum of the three phase currents. This is known as the Holmgreen-circuit. In this case, the main current transformers, power system time constant, the short circuit currents as well as the "Inrush" currents of the transformers, must be checked with regard to the requirements of the neutral measurement of the REB500.
11.7.2. Configuration of neutral current measurement
The following data are required for the interpretation of the neutral current measurement: Necessary data required Per busbar section: IKS3max TS3max IKS3min TS3min IKS1max TS1max IKS1min TS1min max. phase fault current for 3-phase short circuit time constant of the direct current component of IKS3max min. phase fault current for 3-phase short circuit
max. phase fault current for single phase short circuit time constant of the direct current component of IKS1max min. phase fault current for single phase short circuit time constant of the direct current component of IKS1min
11-39
Per feeder: IKA1max TA1max IBAmax INprim INsec PN n UK PE RCT l A PBG RBG
11.7.3.
max. phase fault current for single phase short circuit time constant of the direct current component of IKA1max max. load current current transformer primary rated current current transformer secondary rated current current transformer rated power overcurrent factor of the current transformer knee-point voltage of the current transformer current transformer losses resistance of the secondary winding length of the current transformer secondary wiring (single length). square area of the current transformer secondary wiring sum of the burden of all connected devices sum of the burden resistors of all connected devices
Calculations and verification
For every feeder the following calculations and checks must be carried out:
11.7.3.1. Calculating the total burden PB
l 2 PB = PBG + 2 IN sec 56 A
or when RBG is given

PB = RBG +
l 56 A
2 2 IN sec
11.7.3.2.
Calculating the actual overcurrent factor n'

P + PE n' = n N PB + PE
If RCT is given instead of PE
11-40

2 PE = R CT IN sec
If UK is given instead of n n=
11.7.3.3.
UK IN sec PN + PE
Checking the stability in the case of an external fault
For every feeder, the following 3 conditions must be fulfilled:

1.
n n
IK1Smax 5 INprim IK1Smax 5 INprim
2.
3.
n 10 for TS3 80ms n 40 for 80ms < TS3 120ms n 100 for 120ms < TS3 300ms TS3 the greater value of TS3max and TS3min
11.7.3.4.
Calculating the setting of IKmin
Ikmin 0.7 IBmax IBmax is the highest load current of all feeders. To ensure that no spurious tripping occurs in the case of current transformer circuit faults, a setting of 1.2 Ibmax is recommended.
11.7.3.5. Checking the trip action in the case of busbar short circuit (ground fault)
To ensure that the trip action, in the case of a busbar short circuit, is not blocked by a harmonic blocking condition, the following conditions must be fulfilled for each feeder:
n' 710 TA1max 1 e INprim IA
0.025 TA1max
IA
= the greater value of IKB and 5 x INprim
IKB = the vector sum of IKA1max and IBAmax
11-41
11.7.3.6.
Example
Rated voltage UN: 50 kV Data per busbar section (both sections have the same values)
IKS3max TS3max IKS3min TS3min IKS1max TS1max IKS1min TS1min kA ms kA ms kA ms kA ms 13.8 32 7 32 4.9 1.8 -
Data per feeder

Feeder IkA1max TA1max IBAmax INprim / Insec PN n PE PB VA VA VA kA ms A 01 4.9 600 600/1 25 20 2.45 0.3 230 300/1 25 20 1.75 0.3 120 150/1 15 20 0.96 0.2 02 0 03 0 05 4.9 600 600/1 25 20 2.45 0.3 170 300/1 25 20 1.75 0.3 120 150/1 15 20 0.96 0.2 06 0 07 0
No details are given about direct current time constants in the case of single-phase faults, therefore the maximum values have been roughly estimated. Assumption: Feeders 01 and 05 supply IKS1max to the busbars Positive sequence impedance RL101 of line 01: 1,59 Positive sequence impedance RL105 of line 05: 1,08
The sum of the resistances in parallel is = 0.644
11-42
UN 3 I KS1min
50 = 0.0511H 3 1.8 314
TS 1min =
L L 0.0511 = 0.0793 s 0.644 R RE
Calculation of n'
Feeder PN n PE PB
P + PE n' = n N PB + PE
01 25 20 2.45 0.3 199
02 25 20 1.75 0.3 260
03 15 20 0.96 0.2 275
05 25 20 2.45 0.3 199
06 25 20 1.75 0.3 260
07 15 20 0.96 0.2 275
Checking the stability in the presence of an external fault

Feeder Inprim n IK1Smax
I K1Smax 5 I Nprim n I K1Smax 5 I Nprim
01 600 199 4'900 1.64 o.k. 13'800 4.6 o.k. 32 o.k.
02 300 260 4'900 3.27 o.k. 13'800 9.2 o.k. 32 o.k.
03 150 275 4'900 6.54 o.k. 13'800 18.4 o.k. 32 o.k.
05 600 199 4'900 1.64 o.k. 13'800 4.6 o.k. 32 o.k.
06 300 260 4'900 3.27 o.k. 13'800 9.2 o.k. 32 o.k.
07 150 275 4'900 6.54 o.k. 13'800 18.4 o.k. 32 o.k.
IK3Smax
I K 3Smax 5 I Nprim n I K 3Smax 5 I Nprim
TS3 n' 10
Calculating the setting of IKmin

Feeder t IBAmax 01 600 02 230 03 120 05 600 06 170 07 120
11-43
Thus follows: Lowest possible setting: Recommended setting:
IBmax = 600 A IKmin = 0.7 600 = 420 A IKmin = 1.2 600 = 720 A
Tripping of the busbars - short circuit

Feeder Inprim n IBAmax IKA1max TA1max KB IA 01 600 199 600 4.9 0.0793 5500 3'000 02 300 260 230 0 03 150 275 120 0 05 600 199 600 4.9 0.0793 5500 3'000 76.2 06 300 260 230 0 07 150 275 120 0
1 e 710 T A1 max I Nprim I A

n' 710 TA1max I A
0 .025 T A1 max
76.2
1 e I Nprim
0 .025 TA1 max
o.k.
o.k.
11-44
11.8. 11.8.1.
Interbay bus (IBB) connection Introduction
An interface is optionally available for connecting the numerical busbar protection to a station control system or station monitoring system (SCS/SMS).
SCS/SMS
Network Control
LON IEC-60870-5-103
3) Modem
C
Un B its a RE.58. y
E
Un B its a RE.316 y
2)
C E
Un B its a y
Un B a its y
Un B a its y
Un B its a y
1)
Network Control
REBWIN
Figure 11.21 Overview of REB500 interfaces Figure 11.21 Overview of REB500 interfaces shows the communication interfaces provided on REB500: 1. REBWIN connected to the HMI interface at the front of the central unit or a bay unit for commissioning, maintenance etc., of the REB500 system. 2. REBWIN permanently connected via a modem or optical fibre cable to the interface at the back of the central unit (remote HMI) 3. Interbay bus interface.
11-45
In contrast to feeder control and protection bay units, REB500 is equipped with only a single interbay bus interface via which all the REB500 bay units in the entire station communicate. This has to be taken into account by the various bus protocols.
11.8.2. 11.8.2.1. Hardware Basic components
REB500 can support a maximum of two IBB interfaces at the same time and these are configured in the database while engineering the protection scheme. Suitable communication protocols are LON and IEC 60870-5-103. The simultaneous use of two LON or two IEC-103 interfaces is not possible. Physically, the interface is two extra modules 500CIM01 or 500CIM04 and 500TRM03 which, depending on the backplane in use, are inserted into the following slots in the central unit: Backplane 500CUB01: CIM module in SLOT 15 and 500TRM03 in SLOT 16 Backplane 500CUB02: CIM module in SLOT 13 and 500TRM03 in SLOT 14
500CIM01/04
To enable REB500 to communicate via an interbay bus, a processor module 500CIM01 or 500CIM04 (basic processor module 500CPU02 or 500CPU04) and a connector module 500TRM03 have to be fitted in the central unit. In the case of a LON bus, a sub-module 500LBI01 (or 500LBI02) is also plugged onto the 500CIM01/04 module (see Section 11.8.2.2 Hardware).
11-46
D C
B A
Figure 11.22 500CPU02 / 500CPU04

500TRM03
Function:
Optical interface for communication with the station control system. The 500TRM03 is an electrical-to-optical signal converter. Rotary configuration switch. Either no configuration or configuration by the software. The serial module in socket A on the 500CIM01/04 is connected to the optical send/receive interface 2,The IP-LON module in socket B on the 500CIM01/04 is connected to the optical send/receive interface 1, LON
Standard REB500 configuration.
Settings: 0: 1:
2:
The serial channel on the frontplate of the 500TRM03 is connected to optical channel 2, IEC103. The IP-LON module in socket B on the 500CIM01/04 is connected to the optical send/receive interface 1, LON. 3-15: LON cable: spares A ribbon cable is supplied that is inserted into socket B on the 500CIM01/04 and socket B on the 500TRM03.
11-47
IEC-103 cable: An RS-232 cable (25 pin Sub-D plug to 9 pin Sub-D plug) is supplied that is inserted into "Serial port 2" on the 500CIM01/04 and the socket marked "SER" on the 500TRM03.
Serial Sub-D Optical 2 Optical 1 Rotary switch
C D
A B
Figure 11.23 500TRM03

11.8.2.2. LON hardware configuration
Where LON is being used as the IBB protocol, the following hardware has to be installed in the central unit: 1 x CIM module (500CPU02 or 500CPU04) 1 x LON BUS interface (500LBI01 = TEWS TIP813-10, 500LBI02) 1 x ribbon cable 1 x 500TRM 03 Remove all the jumpers on the 500LBI01. Connect up the ancillary hardware as shown in Figure 11.24 "Ancillary hardware needed for a LON IBB" and then install it in the central unit, taking care that the 500LBI01(or 500LBI02) is inserted into SOCKET B on the CIM module and the ribbon cable connects the 500TRM03 also to SOCKET B on the CIM module.
11-48
LON bus interface Ribbon cable
SOCKET B
CIM module Service pin
500TRM03
LON BUS optical Tx and Rx
Figure 11.24 Ancillary hardware needed for a LON IBB Use an optical fibre cable with a core diameter of 62.5 m and a connector Type BFOC/2,5 for the connection between the optical LON bus interface on the 500TRM03 and the star-coupler or SCS. The cable cores have to be transposed when interconnecting two devices (i.e. the optical LON output Tx on the 500TRM03 must go to the optical input Rx on the star-coupler or SCS and the optical LON input Rx on the 500TRM03 must come from the optical output Tx on the star-coupler or SCS).
11.8.2.3. IEC 60870-5-103 hardware configuration
1 x CIM module (500CPU02 or 500CPU04) 1 x 500TRM03 1 x IEC-103 connecting cable An RS-232 serial cable (25 pin Sub-D plug to 9 pin Sub-D plug) is supplied for connecting the 500CIM01/04 and the 500TRM03. It is inserted into Serial port 2 on the 500CIM01/04 and the
11-49
socket marked SER on the 500TRM03 as shown in Figure 11.25. A standard optical fibre interface with a Type BFOC/2,5 connector is provided. The corresponding connector is Opt. 2 located on the 500TRM03 in the central unit. A data transfer rate of either 9600 Bit/s or 19,200 Bit/s can be chosen.
Figure 11.25 Ancillary hardware needed for IEC-60870-5-103

11.8.3. 11.8.3.1. Common IBB functions Basic IBB configuration
The dialogue for configuring the communication is accessed by selecting the menu item Communication in the Settings menu of the user program REBWIN.
11-50
Figure 11.26 Dialogue for configuring the communication The parameters must be defined before configuration of the complete communications system is started. The field Sync source defines which protocol is used to synchronise the REB500 from an external source. LON:
Setting Clock address: Clock warning address: Bus line: Node address: Significance Predefined LON network variable. Does not normally have to be changed. Predefined LON network variable. Does not normally have to be changed. Number of the LON IBB (where several exist) {0..2}. Distinguishes between REB500s, if several are connected to the same LON segment. The node address can be, but does not have to be identical to the LON node address {0..63}. When this is active, the REB500 time is synchronised via the LON bus (clock address, clock warning address) Default setting 1023 1022 1 1
Sync source:
active
Table 11.26
LON configuration
11-51
IEC-103:
Setting Address: Baud rate: Significance IEC-103 station address (on link layer) Data transfer rate 9600 or 19200 Baud {1..254} Default setting 1 9600
Table 11.27
11.8.3.2.
IEC-103 configuration
REB500 event configuration
For changes in status generated by REB500 to be transferred as events to an SCS/SMS, the corresponding signals must be configured as events using the dialogue that opens after selecting the REBWIN menus Configuration / Binary module / Configuration of events (see Figure 11.27). To which IBB an event is sent is determined by selecting the appropriate checkbox IBB 1 or IBB 2 when configuring the signal.
Figure 11.27 Configuring signals as events Diagnostic and system events are always available for transfer whichever protocol is in use and cannot be configured. If both IBB 1 and IBB 2 are used, an event can be assigned to both interfaces.
11-52
11.8.3.3.
Transfer of differential current values General description
To keep the load on the IBB as low as possible, the bus zone differential currents are checked cyclically, but only actually transferred via the bus if the value has changed. Example:
Diff. current
Zero limit
Values trans0 ferred to the SCS
100
200
Figure 11.28 Transmitted values and the zero limit To stabilise the display during normal operation, differential currents below the zero limit (dead band) count as zero and are transferred as such. Providing the condition for transmitting a current value is fulfilled, all the differential currents belonging to the respective zone are sent to the SCS/SMS.
Detailed description of the delta/dead band algorithm
Conditions to be fulfilled for transmitting differential currents as events to the SCS:

Transmit conditions:
diff = diff + | new current value - old current value | if | diff | > delta then diff = 0 if | new current value | < dead band then old current value = 0, send 0 else old current value = new current value, send new current value
11-53
Delta value:
Delta defines how big the integral of the changes in the value of the measurement (see condition below) has to be for a new value to be transferred via the bus. The dead band on the other hand is simply the threshold below which a value counts as zero.
Dead band value:
Differential current measurements are configured in the REB500 database and cannot be changed using either REBWIN or REBCON. The significance of the differential current parameters is as follows: Update period: - Determines how often the differential current measurement has to be updated. - Applies to all bus zones. - Delta per bus zone for phases L1, L2 and L3.
Delta value L1_L2_L3:
Dead band value L1_L2_L3: - Dead band per bus zone for phases L1, L2 and L3. Delta value L0: Dead band value L0: Enable diff. currents: - Delta per bus zone for the neutral current L0. - Dead Band per bus zone for the neutral current L0. - Enables polling of the bus zone differential currents.
The tables below show the interrelationships, units, default settings and the ranges and setting intervals (steps) of the parameters:
Parameter Update Period (sec.) Bus zone 1..n Default: 60 Range: 0 - 1000 Step: 1
Table 11.28
11-54
Parameter Enable diff. currents (yes/no) Delta value L1_L2_L3 (A)
Bus zone 1
Default: Yes Default: 10 Range: 0 - 65535 Step: 1
Bus zone 2
Yes Default: 10 Range: 0 - 65535 Step: 1
Bus zone n
No Default: 10 Range: 0 - 65535 Step: 1
Dead band value L1_L2_L3 (A)
Default: 5 Range: 0 - 65535 Step: 1
Delta value L0 (A)
Default: 10 Range: 0 -65535 Step: 1
Dead band value L0 (A)
Table 11.29
Note: Only those neutral currents L0 of the various bus zones are transferred to the SCS that were correspondingly configured at the time the scheme was engineered. Caution: Delta and Dead band settings that are too low result in a high data load on the bus. For this reason, care should be taken to set reasonable values. 11.8.4. 11.8.4.1. LON Installing a LON node
When a LON bus interface is put into operation for the first time, it is not configured and so the first task is to do so using the LON network managers program. A suitable LON network managers program is the LON Network Tool. The service telegram to permit configuration to be carried out is transmitted by the LON bus interface (500LBI01) when the button marked LON on the 500TRM03 is pressed (see Figure 11.23).
11-55
11.8.4.2.
Addressing
The identification of the REB500 events and the mapping to the corresponding process objects in the SCS database is done on the basis of the station address (2 Byte, also referred to as unit address) and the object address (2 Byte), both of which are included with every event telegram.
Station address (unit address)
In most cases, there will only be one REB500 per substation and therefore only one IBB connection (to the central unit). The 2 Byte station address (unit address) is composed as follows: HighByte = LowByte = Physical bus line on the REB500 { 0 1 2 } Node address { 063 }. This address must be unique on the particular IBB as it is used to construct the station address (unit address). It may be the LON node, but does not have to be. Where several REB500s are connected to an SCS, this address also distinguishes between them.
The address can be entered using REBCON, the engineering tool (see Section 11.8.3.1).
Object address
The object address defines a REB500 event, measurement or command. It is composed as follows: Events: HighByte LowByte where: = 32 x Node_Id + Device_Id REB500 HW unit (e.g. BU23, BIO in Slot 4) = Event_Config_Id Event_Config_Id = event number
Measurements (differential currents): HighByte LowByte = 32 x Node_Id + Device_Id REB500 HW unit = ((Buszone_Id 1) * 4) + Phase_Id
11-56
where:
Device_Id = Device_Id of CMP (generally 1) Node_Id = Node_Id of CMP (generally 1) Buszone_Id = bus zone number Phase_Id = 1 for L1 2 for L2 3 for L3 4 for L0
Commands:
HighByte LowByte where:
= 32 x Node_Id + Device_Id REB500 HW unit = 128 + Command_Id (command number) Device_Id = Node_Id = Device_Id of CMP (generally 1) Node_Id of CMP (generally 1)
Command_Id = command number, e.g. 1 for resetting LEDs and latched relays
Caution: Every time the configuration is changed, the event numbers are regenerated (consecutive numbers). All the event numbers can thus change if the event configuration is changed.
11.8.4.3.
Configuration Configuring the LON IBB protocol and time synchronisation
Refer to Section 11.8.3.1 for the basic configuration. The station address (unit address) is determined by selecting the bus line and the node address (see Section 11.8.4.2). Activating the Sync. Source checkbox (only for a LON IBB) means that the REB500 time is synchronised via the LON IBB. Be sure that only one IBB is being used for synchronisation. Time is synchronised via the LON IBB with the aid of two predefined LON network variables (Clock and Clock warning) having a fixed selector. The selector identifies the function of the network variable (time synchronisation in this case). REB500 recognises 1024 network variables that are stored in a table with 1024 entries (01023).
11-57
The table includes the selectors and other settings determining the functions of the network variables (input or output, service type, address table index etc.). The default setting for time synchronisation via the LON IBB is determined by the entries for the network variables 1022 and 1023, i.e. for this mode of synchronisation, it is only necessary to refer to these entries in the Communication menu (Clock addr.: 1023 and Clock warning addr.: 1022). Should some other entry (other network variable) be used for time synchronisation, a LON network management program (e.g. LON Network Tools) has to be used first to reconfigure the network variables for time synchronisation via the LON IBB (selector, input etc.) and then the number of the network variable (table entry) has to be entered in the Communication menu (Clock addr.:, Clock warning addr.:). This procedure is not recommended for this reason.
Configuring events for the LON IBB
REB500 generates the following types of events for transfer via the LON IBB (see Section 11.8.3.2):
1
Signal events (single-point indication). Format: DMCD type 129 Single-point information without time tag [LAG 1.4] DMCD type 130 Single-point information with time tag [LAG 1.4]
Isolator and circuit-breaker position events (double-point indication) Format: DMCD type 131 Double-point information without time tag [LAG 1.4] DMCD type 132 Double-point information with time tag [LAG 1.4]
Diagnostic events and system events Format:
DMCD type 139 Pulse counter value with time tag [LAG 1.4] The LON protocol supports five event filters that can be addressed by the SCS while communication is being initiated with it (see SCS manual). The various filters serve the following purposes:
11-58
Filter 0: Filter 1: Filter 2: Filter 3: Filter 4:
Enables all events that were configured for the LON IBB including diagnostic events. Enables all events that were configured for the LON IBB including diagnostic events. Enables all events that were configured for the LON IBB including diagnostic events. Enables all events that were configured for the LON IBB excluding diagnostic events. Enables all events that were configured for the LON IBB excluding diagnostic events.
Configuring measurements (differential currents) for the LON IBB
REB500 makes four differential currents (L0, L1, L2, L3) per bus zone available for transmission via the LON IBB (see Section 11.8.3.3): Format: DMCD type 137 Short measured value with floating point but without time tag DMCD type 138 Short measured value with floating point but without time tag The object addresses for the various differential currents are determined using the relationship given in Section 11.8.4.2.
11.8.4.4. Commands via the LON IBB
REB500 makes a command available for resetting latched relays. The same command resets the tripping LEDs on the frontplate display. The definition of the command is as follows: Double command DMCD type 46 where S_E = 0 or 3 and SCS = 2 (command qualifier) The command number (Command_Id) for determining the object address (see Section 11.8.4.2) is 1.
11.8.4.5. Displaying status information (events) Diagnostic information
Internal system diagnostic signals are transferred as pulsecounter type signals (32 Bit = 4 Byte).
11-59
Format: DMCD type 139 Pulse counter value with time tag The significance of the BCR Bytes are as follows:
Byte number Byte 3 (HB) Byte 2 Significance Always 0 Init = 1 Major error = 2 Minor error = 4 Not ready = 8 Ready = 16 Last wish = 32 Shutdown = 64 No status =1 28 Byte 1 Byte 0 (LB) Class { 0..40 }, defines the SW subsystem Error number { 0..255 }
Table 11.30 Class:

0 = BBP 1 = ITT 2 = BCF 3 = DIA 4 = TGR 5 = EMI 6 = LMI 7 = DAC 8 = TIM 9 = DBS 10 = SIG 11 = EVR 12 = RFS 13 = SPR 14 = MBA 15 = OCP
BRC Bytes
16 = BFP 17 = DRR 18 = MPL 19 = EFP 20 = PDF 21 = BOC 22 = BPP 23 = DIE 24 = DRD 25 = EVA 26 = GPI 27 = LAC 28 = IAC 29 = CMD 30 = LPL 31 = TRC
11-60
Status information
Events for the SCS are configured using either REBWIN or REBCON. Every time the configuration is changed, the event numbers are regenerated (consecutive numbers). All the event numbers can thus change if the event configuration is changed. This task is performed by an ACCESS application to prevent having to recalculate the station (unit) and object addresses manually every time the events are reconfigured or changed. The data input for the ACCESS application is the REBWIN or REBCON database file <filename>.mdb and the REB500 system database attribut.sdb. The ACCESS application determines the new addresses using the algorithms. The output generated by the ACCESS application is a text file (export file) with the default extension <filename>.exp which contains all the information necessary. The file has the following structure: Lines 1 and 2 Line 3 Line 4 onwards = Station, DB versions etc. = Column header = Data
The columns are separated by a semicolon ;. The LON station (unit) address is in column 11and the LON object address in column 12 of the text file (export file). The export file is created during the engineering process. The following three pages show an example of an export file from the ACCESS application, Table 11.31.
11-61
Lines 1 and 2
Module REB500 Type of IBB LON Station Addr. 257 REBWIN REBCON DB DB Date Version Version Version 4.10 4.10 V0.00AR 1998-11-10 Export Date 98-12-17 Export Tool Version AI 98-12-11 V2.10
Station Name
Bay Name
Device Name A1
4. Field
5. Field
Signal Name EVENT
Technical Signal Identifier BU 1 5 500BIO01
Event Text 11210_Block. Ausgangsrelais
Signal Text 11210_Block. Ausgangsrelais
Signal Type Unit
Object Address 9239
LON NV Index
LON NV Bit Number
Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU
A1
EVENT
BU 1
500BIO01
A1
EVENT
BU 1
500BIO01
A3
EVENT
BU 3
500BIO01
A3
EVENT
BU 3
500BIO01
CU
EVENT
CU Rack1 500BIO01 CU Rack1 500BIO01 CU Rack1 500BIO01
20
CU
EVENT
20
CU
EVENT
20
Single Point Indication Type 0 11610_Ext. 11610_Ext. Single Rckstellung Rckstellung Point Indication Type 2 11620_Revision_1-Ein 11620_Revision_1-Ein Single Point Indication Type 2 15210_Blockierung UMZ 15210_Blockierung UMZ Single Point Indication Type 2 17205_Blockierung SPD 17205_Blockierung SPD Single Point Indication Type 2 42315_SSS Auslsung L1 42315_SSS Auslsung L1 Single Point Indication Type 2 42320_SSS Auslsung L2 42320_SSS Auslsung L2 Single Point Indication Type 2 42325_SSS Auslsung L3 42325_SSS Auslsung L3 Single Point Indication Type 2
LON Event Bay-Bay Filter Nr. FALSE 15
Function Nr. 1
REB GI FALSE
9253
FALSE
15
TRUE
9243
FALSE
15
TRUE
18189
FALSE
15
TRUE
18186
FALSE
15
TRUE
8975
FALSE
15
TRUE
8976
FALSE
15
TRUE
8977
FALSE
15
TRUE
11-63
Station Name
Bay Name
Device Name CU
4. Field
5. Field
Signal Name EVENT
Technical Signal Identifier CU Rack1 500BIO01 BU 1 7 19
Event Text
Signal Text
Signal Type Unit
Object Address 8715
LON NV Index
LON NV Bit Number
Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage BBP257 mit 2 Seg. 4 BU
A1
EVENT
500AIP01
CU
EVENT
CU Rack1 500CPU02 BU 2 5
A2
EVENT
500BIO01
A2
EVENT
BU 2
500AIP01
A3
EVENT
BU 3
500BIO01
A3
EVENT
BU 3
500AIP01
A4
EVENT
BU 4
500BIO01
A4
EVENT
BU 4
500AIP01
CU
EVENT
CU Rack1 500CPU02
11
CU
MV_DIFF I1
43305_SVS Auslsung t1 43305_SVS Auslsung t1 Single Point Indication Type 2 AIP(7) AIP(7) System Diagnosis Monitoring (PC) CSP(7) CSP(7) System Diagnosis Monitoring (PC) BIO(5) BIO(5) System Diagnosis Monitoring (PC) AIP(7) AIP(7) System Diagnosis Monitoring (PC) BIO(5) BIO(5) System Diagnosis Monitoring (PC) AIP(7) AIP(7) System Diagnosis Monitoring (PC) BIO(5) BIO(5) System Diagnosis Monitoring (PC) AIP(7) AIP(7) System Diagnosis Monitoring (PC) CIM(11) CIM(11) System Diagnosis Monitoring (PC) BZ1.L1 BZ1.L1 Measurement A Floating Point
LON Event Bay-Bay Filter Nr. FALSE 15
Function Nr. 3
REB GI TRUE
9728
FALSE
FALSE
16640
FALSE
FALSE
17408
FALSE
FALSE
17920
FALSE
FALSE
18176
FALSE
FALSE
18432
FALSE
FALSE
18688
FALSE
FALSE
18944
FALSE
FALSE
57344
FALSE
FALSE
8449
FALSE
15
TRUE
11-64
Station Name Testanlage mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage mit 2 Seg. 4 BU Testanlage mit 2 Seg. 4 BU
Bay Name BBP257 BBP257 BBP257 BBP257 BBP257 BBP257 BBP257 BBP257
Device Name CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU
4. Field
5. Field
Signal Name
Technical Signal Identifier
Event Text BZ1.L2 BZ1.L3 BZ1.L0 BZ2.L1 BZ2.L2 BZ2.L3 BZ2.L0
Signal Text BZ1.L2 BZ1.L3 BZ1.L0 BZ2.L1 BZ2.L2 BZ2.L3 BZ2.L0
Signal Type Unit Measurement Floating Point Measurement Floating Point Measurement Floating Point Measurement Floating Point Measurement Floating Point Measurement Floating Point Measurement Floating Point Command Type 0 A A A A A A A
Object Address 8450 8451 8452 8453 8454 8455 8456 8577
LON NV Index
LON NV Bit Number
MV_DIFF I2 MV_DIFF I3 MV_DIFF I0 MV_DIFF I1 MV_DIFF I2 MV_DIFF I3 MV_DIFF I0 CMD_RES ET
LON Event Bay-Bay Filter Nr. FALSE 15 FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Function Nr. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
REB GI TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE
Table 11.31
Example of an ACCESS application export file
11-65
11.8.5. 11.8.5.1.
IEC 60870-5-103 Introduction
Busbar protection is not one of the types of protection defined in IEC 60870-5-103. Nevertheless, the commands and signals of the REB500 system are modelled as far as possible on functions defined in the IEC recommendation. The functional scope of the station protocol is therefore reduced. The backup protection functions breaker failure, time-overcurrent and end fault that are optionally available with REB500 are also supported. According to the IEC recommendation, usage of the private range is only permitted regarding the compatibility of existing devices. For this reason, additional REB500 functions that are not defined in the recommendation were implemented according to the future-oriented generic part of IEC 60870-5-103. Refer to IEC 60870-5-103 for an explanation of the various abbreviations.
11.8.5.2. General functions
The tables below define the functional scope of REB500 according IEC 60870-5-103. The details are to be found in the recommendation itself.
System functions in monitoring direction
INF <0> <0> <2> <3> <4> <5> Description End of general interrogation (polling) Time synchronisation Reset frame control bit (FCB) Reset CU Start/restart Power on GI TYPE 8 6 5 5 5 5 COT 10 8 3 4 5 6
Table 11.32
System functions in monitoring direction
Notes: The information number 0 refers to the global function type and is the same for all system functions. The information numbers 2 to 5 are used with FUN in relation to the main function of a protection system.
11-65
Status signals in monitoring direction

INF <18> <19> <20> Description Protection active LED reset Blocks the supervisory equipment GI x x TYPE COT 1 1 1 1,9 11 9,11 REB500 signal configuration 41810_In service (CU output) 21805_In service (BU output) 31810_ext_reset (CU input) 11610_ext_reset (BU input) 31215_Block.IEC Master_Direction (CU input)
Table 11.33
Status signals in monitoring direction
Supervisory signals in monitoring direction

INF <47> Description General alarm GI x TYPE COT 1 1,9 REB500 signal configuration 41805_Alarm (CU output)
Table 11.34
Supervisory signals in monitoring direction
Disturbance signals in monitoring direction

INF <68> Description General trip GI TYPE COT 2 1 REB500 signal configuration 42305_BBP trip (CU output) 21110_TRIP (BU output) 21305_Trip (BU output) <69> <70> <71> <85> Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Breaker failure 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 42315_BBP trip_L1 (CU output) 23315_BFP trip_L1 (BU output) 42320_BBP trip_L2 (CU output) 23320_BFP trip_L2 (BU output) 42325_BBP trip_L3 (CU output) 23325_BFP trip_L3 (BU output) 43305_BFP trip_t1 (CU output) 43310_BFP trip_t2 (CU output) 23305_BFP trip_t1 (BU output) 23310_BFP trip_t2 (BU output) <90> Trip I> 2 1 45305_OCDT trip (CU output) 25105_OCDT TRIP (BU output) 25305_OCDT trip (BU output) <92> Trip IN> 2 1 42310_BBP_trip_L0 (CU output)
Table 11.35
Disturbance signals in monitoring direction
11-66
Generic functions in monitoring direction

INF Description GI (x) TYPE 10 10 11 10 COT 42,43 42,43 42,43 1,2,9,11,12,42,43
<240> Read headings of all defined groups <241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group <242> Not used <243> Read the directory of a single entry <244> Read the value or attribute of a single entry
Table 11.36
Generic functions in monitoring direction
Generic functions in control direction

INF <240> <241> <242> <243> <244> Beschreibung Read headings of all defined groups Read values or attributes of all entries of one group Not used Read the directory of a single entry Read the value or attribute of a single entry TYPE 21 21 21 21 COT 42 42 42 42
Table 11.37
Generic functions in control direction
Commands in control direction

INF <19> Description LED reset TYPE 20 COT 20
Table 11.38
Commands in control direction
11-67
11.8.5.3.
Disturbance recorder
Disturbance data are uploaded and displayed in accordance with the IEC recommendation with the following exceptions: a) REB500 supports a maximum of 15 records per bay unit, but only the first (oldest) eight in the queue can be displayed in accordance with the recommendation. Of the records that are displayed, only the oldest can be deleted or uploaded. This is determined by the REB500 principle. The time stamp invalid Bit (IV) in a disturbance record is always set, because the CIM module is unaware of the synchronisation status at the instant of the record.
b)
c)
11.8.5.4.
Generic REB500 functions Displaying status information (events) Diagnostic information
Status and diagnostic information is generated by the various REB500 application software modules and transferred spontaneously as events every time the status changes. A separate group exists for diagnostic information with an entry for every subsystem of the REB500 system software REBSYS.
11-68
Diagnostic event group

ENTRY No. 0 (Heading) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Group 64 (0x40) Diagnostic information BPP (Busbar protection) ITT (Intertripping) BCF (Binary input and output configuration facility) DIA (Diagnostic) TGR (Test generator) EMI (External man/machine interface) LMI (Local man/machine interface) DAC (Data access) TIM (Time management) DBS (Database system) SIG (Signal processor) EVR (Event recording) RFS (Remote file system) SPR (Signal pre-processing and recording) MBA (Multi-function bus administrator) OCP (Overcurrent protection) BFP (Breaker failure protection) DRR (Disturbance recorder) MPL (Multi functional process bus library) EFP (End-fault protection) PDF (Pole discrepancy function) BOC (Binary input/output control) BPP (Binary pre-processing) DIE (Diagnostic extensions) DRD (Disturbance recorder dispatcher) EVA (Event and alarm handling) GPI (General purpose interface) LAC (LON application converter) IAC (IAC application converter) CMD (Command processor) LPL (LON protocol layer) TRC (Traceability)
Table 11.39
Diagnostic event
The ASDU 10 Generic data is used with the following attributes:

CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU FUNCTION TYPE 1 0 / 1..59 254 Spontaneous REB500 CU / REB500 BU GENeric function type
11-69
With the exception of the header (entry 0), the current values of the entries are not available on request. The response to the corresponding generic read command is therefore COT 43 invalid data response to generic read command. The current value of the group header (entry 0) corresponds to the number of subsystems in the REB500 system software.
COD <10> Description <1> Current value
Data type <1> <3>

OS8ASCII
Length 21 1
Number 1 1
Value / Significance Diagnostic information Number of SW subsystems
UI
Table 11.40
Directory entry for GIN 0x4000 (header)
All the other entries in this group consist of the following attributes that are needed to describe a diagnostic event generated by one of the software subsystems. The status of a diagnostic event is indicated by an ASCII string which can have one of the following values: Initialising Major error Minor error Not ready Ready Last wish Shutdown
No status The error code is assigned by the application when the status changes and precisely describes the cause of the error.
COD <10> Description <1> Data type <1> OS8ASCII Length Number Value / Significance 3 29 12 1 7 1 1 1 1 1 BPP (example) (Includes the following three definitions) Status Error code Time stamp (CP56Time2a)
Current value <23> DATASTRUCTURE <1> OS8ASCII <3> UI <14> BINARY TIME
Table 11.41
11-70
Directory entry for GIN 0x40 (xx)
The following table gives an example of the ASDU 10 Generic Data that is transferred spontaneously for a diagnostic event.
0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Spontaneous <1> REB500 CU/BU No. GEN <254> Read value of single entry <244> <0> {1, 0, 0} 40 H 01 H Current value <1> DATA STRUCTURE <23> 29 1,0 <1> OS8ASCII 12 1,0 Major Error <3> UI 1 1,0 Error code (UI1) <14> BINARY TIME 7 1,0 0 0 0 1 Type Identification Variable Structure Qualifier Cause Of Transmission Common Address of ASDU Function type Information number Return information identifier Number of generic data sets Generic identification number Kind of description
DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT
DATA UNIT 10 IDENTIFIER SQ=1, SQ_No.= 1 COT <0 .. 59> INFORMATION FUN INF OBJECT RII NGD {NO, COUNT, CONT} GIN Example KOD
GDD GDD 1 GID 1 (example) GDD 2 GID 2 GDD 3
Time stamp (CP56Time2a)
GID 3
Table 11.42
TYPE IDENTIFICATION: Generic data
Status information
All the status information relating to binary input and output signals, internal signals (single-point indications - SPI) and switchgear positions (double-point indications - DPI) that are configured in REB500 for transfer via IEC60870-5-103, but are not covered by the compatible part of the IEC recommendation are transferred as generic data. An entry is made in the table for every event configured using REBWIN or REBCON for transfer via IEC 60870-5-103. Since there can be more events per type (SPI or DPI) than the maximum number of entries a group can have (255), the system reserves additional groups as necessary. By this means, up to 1020 events per event type can be defined in the generic part.
11-71
Entry No.
Group No. 66 (0x42) to Group No. 69 (0x45)
Group No. 70 (0x46) to Group No. 73 (0x49) Double-point indications Indication #1 Indication #2 Indication #255
0 (Heading) 1 2 255
Single-point indications Indication #1 Indication #2 Indication #255
Table 11.43
Group for displaying status information (SPI and DPI)
The ASDU 10 Generic data is used with the following attributes:

CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU FUNCTION TYPE 1 0 / 1..59 254 Spontaneous REB500 CU / REB500 BU GENeric function type
With the exception of the header (entry 0), the current values of the entries are not available on request. The response to the corresponding generic read command is therefore COT 43 invalid data response to generic read command.
Entries for single-point indications
COD
<10> Description <1>
Data type
<1>
OS8ASCII
Length Number
24 1 1 1
Value / Significance
"Single-point indications
Number of SPI defined in this group
Current value <3>
UI
Table 11.44
COD <10> Description <1>
Data type <1>

OS8ASCII
Length 20
Number Value / Significance 1 1 1 Event text defined by user (Includes the following two definitions) OFF (1) / ON (2)
Current value <23> DATA STRUCTURE 14 <9> DOUBLE POINT INFORMATION 1
<14> BINARY TIME
Table 11.45
11-72
The following table gives an example of the ASDU 10 Generic Data that is transferred spontaneously for a single-point indication.
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Spontaneous <1> REB500 CU/BU No. GEN <254> 1 0 0 1
Type Identification Variable Structure Qualifier Cause Of Transmission Common Address of ASDU Function type Information number Return information identifier Number of generic data sets Generic identification number
10 SQ=1, SQ_No.= 1 COT <0 .. 59> FUN
DATA UNIT IDENTIFIER
INFORMATI ON
Read value of single entry <244> <0> { 1, 0, 0} 42 H 01 H Current value <1> DATA STRUCTURE <23> 14 1,0 <9> DOUBLE-POINT INFORMATION 1 1,0 0 0 0 0 0 <0 .. 3> <14> BINARY TIME 7 1,0
Kind of description
DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT
INF OBJECT RII NGD { NO, COUNT, CONT} Group <46H .. 49H> Entry <1 .. 255> KOD GDD GDD 1 GID 1 GDD 2
GID 2
Table 11.46
TYPE IDENTIFICATION : Generic data
Entries for double-point indications

COD <10> Description <1> Data type <1>
OS8ASCII
Length Number 24 1 1 1
Value / Significance "Double-point Indications Number of DPI defined in this group.
Current value <3>
UI
Table 11.47
COD <10> Description <1> Data type <1>

Length Number 20 14 1 1 1 1 Value / Significance Event text defined by user (Includes the following two definitions) TRANSIENT (0) / OFF (1) / ON (2) / ERROR (3) 7 1 Time stamp (CP56Time2a)
OS8ASCII
Current value <23> DATASTRUCTURE <9> DOUBLE POINT INFORMATION

WITH TRANSIENT
AND ERROR <14> BINARY TIME
Table 11.48

11-73
The following table gives an example of the ASDU 10 Generic Data that is transferred spontaneously for a double-point indication.
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Spontaneous <1> REB500 CU/BU Unit No. GEN <254> Read value of single entry <244> <0> { 1, 0, 0} 46 H 01 H Current value <1> DATA STRUCTURE <23> 14 1,0 <11> DOUBLE POINT INFORMATION WITH TRANSIENT AND ERROR 1 1,0 0 0 0 0 0 <0 .. 3> <14> BINARY TIME 7 1,0 0 0 0 0
Type Identification Variable Structure Qualifier Cause Of Transmission Common Address of ASDU Function type Information number Return information identifier Number of generic data sets Generic identification number DATA UNIT 10 IDENTIFIER SQ=1, SQ_No.= 1 COT <0 .. 59> INFORMATION FUN INF OBJECT RII NGD { NO, COUNT, CONT} Group <46H .. 49H> Entry <1 .. 255> KOD
Kind of description
DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT
GDD
GDD 1 GID 1 GDD 2
GID 2
Table 11.49
TYPE IDENTIFICATION : Generic data
Display of busbar differential currents
The differential currents are displayed for each corresponding busbar zone (1..32) (see Section 11.8.3.3). The ASDU 10 Generic data is used with the following attributes: CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU 1 0 Spontaneous REB500 CU
254 GENeric function type FUNCTION TYPE The group number 75 (0x4B) is used to display busbar differential currents and is therefore only assigned to the central unit (CAA = 0).
COD <10> Description <1> Current value Data type <1> <3>
OS8ASCII
Length Number 21 1 1 1
Value / Significance "Differential currents Number of valid entries
UI
Table 11.50
Directory entry for GIN 0x4B00 (header)
11-74
The number of valid entries corresponds to the number of busbar zones and thus limited to the range [132]. Each of the entries 132 in the group relates to a given busbar zone.
COD <10> Description <1> Current value Data type <1>
OS8ASCII
Length Number 3 2 2 1 1 3,4
Value / Significance SS1 example (Includes the following two definitions)

Field with 3 / 4 measurements CP16 {OV,ER,RES,MVAL}
<23> DATA
STRUCTURE
<12> MEASURAND
WITH QUALITY DESCRIPTOR
<14> BINARY TIME <9> <6> Unit Factor <1> <4>

OS8ASCII
7 1 4
1 1 1
Time stamp (CP56Time2a) A 32 Bit integer
Table 11.51
Directory entry for GIN 0x4B (xx)
The description has a maximum length of 16 characters. The current value is a field with three (L1, L2, L3) or four (L1, L2, L3, L0) measurements and the associated time stamp. The effective number of measurements is determined by how the REB500 is configured.
OV Overflow
This Bit is set to <1> whenever an overflow occurs or the measurement is not assigned. It is normally therefore set to <0>. This Bit indicates whether a measurement is valid or not (measurement valid <0>, measurement invalid <1>). Spare for future use. Contains the actual measurement in fixed decimal point format.
ER Error flag
RES Reserved MVAL
The factor is a 32 Bit integer for calculating the original value. The following table gives an example of the ASDU 10 Generic Data that is transferred spontaneously for displaying the differential currents of a given bus zone.
11-75

0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Spontaneous <1> REB500 CU GEN <254> Read value of single entry <244> <0> { 1, 0, 0} 4B H 01 H Current value <1> DATA STRUCTURE <23> 21 1,0 <12> MEASURAND WITH QUALITY DESCRIPTOR 2 3,0 OV ER RES MVAL (4..8) MVAL (9..16) OV ER RES MVAL (4..8) MVAL (9..16) OV ER RES MVAL (4..8) MVAL (9..16) <14> BINARY TIME 7 1,0 0 1 0 0 0 0

DATA UNIT 10 IDENTIFIER SQ=1, SQ_No.= 1 COT <0> INFORMATION FUN INF OBJECT RII NGD { NO, COUNT, CONT} Group Entry <1 .. 32> KOD
Type Identification Variable Structure Qualifier Cause Of Transmission Common Address of ASDU Function Type Information number Return information identifier Number of generic data sets Generic identification number
Kind of description
DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT DATA TYPE DATA SIZE NUMBER, CONT
GDD GDD 1 3 or 4 (including measurement L0) GID 1a GID 1b GID 1c
DATATYPE DATASIZE NUMBER, CONT
GDD 2
GID 2
Table 11.52
11.8.5.5.
Special information and instructions for configuring the control system Private range
None of the functions in the private range are used.

Common Address of ASDU
The fourth octet in the DATA UNIT IDENTIFICATION FIELD of an ASDU determines the COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU. It normally has to be the same as the station address on the link layer. Exceptions are permitted where additional COMMON ASDU ADDRESSES are needed because of multiple instances of functions. In the case of REB500, this exception allowed in the IEC recommendation is used in order to be able to address the central unit and the bay units via a single physical connection. COMMON Address of ASDU - CAA 0 159 255
11-76
Central unit Bay unit Global address
Disturbance recorder, binary signal transfer
Binary signals transmitted in disturbance records only have numbers and no designation. The assignment of numbers to signal names is given in the COMTRADE file <filename>.CFG which can be uploaded, for example, from a bay unit using REBWIN.
Signal configuration instructions
1 2 3
OC and CR events are not supported and if one is configured, the CIM module software will not start. If none of the configured IBB protocols is set as a time sync source the CIM module software will not start. Should the same logical signal be configured on two different BIO modules in a bay unit, only one of them should be relayed to the IEC-103 bus. A configuration that is duplicated produces two indistinguishable events which can cause some confusion. The response is reflected by REBWIN which also generates two events.
Cause of transmission
With the exception of 42 (generic writing command), all the possible causes of transmission are supported in the command direction. In the supervisory direction, they are all supported with the exception of 7 (test mode), 12 (local control unit) and 44 (return confirmation of a generic write command).
11-77
Type identification
The type identification defines the type of ASDU that has been transferred.
TYPE <1> <2> <5> <6> <8> <10> <11> <23> <26> <27> <28> <29> <30> <31> Description time-tagged message time-tagged message with relative time Identification Time synchronisation General interrogation termination Generic data Generic identification List of recorded disturbances Ready for transmission of disturbance data Ready for transmission of a channel Ready for transmission of tags Transmission of tags Transmission of disturbance values End of Transmission
Table 11.53
Information in the supervisory direction
TYPE <6> <7> <10> <20> <21> <24> <25>
Description Time synchronisation General interrogation (polling) Generic data General command Generic command Order for disturbance data transmission Acknowledgement for disturbance data transmission
Table 11.54
Information in the command direction
11-78
Timeouts
1 2
Protocol time-out < 50ms as defined in the IEC recommendation applies for the protocol. When a command to upload the disturbance recorder data is issued, the data have to be transferred from the bay unit to the central unit first before they are transferred via the IEC bus. The timeout from the instant the upload command is issued to the receipt of the data varies in relation to the length of the disturbance record. The following applies: STS timeout < 2.5 minutes per 1 second of disturbance record data (4I+4U, 2400Hz)
Once the transfer of disturbance recorder data has started, the timeout changes to: Transfer timeout < 1 Minute
11.9. 11.9.1.
Interfaces Serial interfaces (RS 232)
A serial cable can be used for interfacing with the user interface PC.
11.9.2. Fibre optic connection
Two electro-to-optical converters as well as two fibre optical cables (single core) are needed for the connection between REB500 and the user interface PC. Depending on the distance involved either optical cable with a synthetic or with a glass core can be used. For distances up to 30 m fibre optic cables with synthetic cores can be used. Complete adapter sets (2 converters incl. fibre optic cable), can be ordered as accessories under the following numbers:
Type YX216a-1 (4 m) YX216a-1 (10 m) YX216a-1 (30 m)
Order Number 7433 1640 - AA 7433 1640 - BA 7433 1640 - CA
Identification number HESG448522 R1 HESG448522 R2 HESG448522 R3
11-79
For distances greater than 30 m, we recommend fibre optic cables with glass cores 62,5/125 m and commercially available converters e.g. Hirschmann OZDV 2451 G (Hirschmann order no. 943 299-021). The converter on REB500 should be configured as DCE, and the converter on the PC (incl. 25-pin on 9-pin adapter) as DTE.
11.9.3. Modem connection
In order to communicate between a PC with REBWIN to a REB500 via a telephone line, a modem is required on both sides. Commercially available modems are to be used because ABB does not supply these as accessories. We recommend that you study the manual of the modem carefully to ensure easy commissioning as well as problem free operation.
11.9.3.1. Remote access via modem Modem connection
The modem is connected to the REB500 CMP SERIAL PORT 2 by a standard 25-pin cable. Connections 2 (Tx) and 3 (Rx) are crossed.
Caution: To exclude EMC interference, the modem may only be connected via a commercially available galvanic RS232 insulator.
Modem configuration
In order to configure the modem, a terminal program on the PC is required (e.g. The standard Microsoft Terminal which comes with every Windows version) This program must be configured to the COM port to which the modem is connected (e.g. COM 1). Both modems: Firstly, the correct functioning of the modems must be checked. On the command AT<Enter> the modem should respond with OK (or 0). The communication parameters must be configured to 9600 Baud, 8 bit, no parity, 1 stop bit.
11-80
Software- and hardware handshakes must be disabled. The appropriate AT command is to be taken from the modems instruction manual. REB500 modem: This modem should be used in the Automatic Call-back mode. For this, most modems use the command AT SO=3, where 3 represents the number of calls PC modem: The signal DTR (Data Transmission Ready) must be deactivated in the modem on the PC side. This is necessary so that operation can be changed from Terminal mode to REBWIN mode without interrupting the connection. The appropriate AT commands are to be taken from the modems instruction manual. For the REB500 we recommend a modem with an automatic call-back feature. When such a modem receives a call, the caller has to identify himself by means of a password. With positive identification the connection in interrupted and the modem calls back a number belonging to the password. This ensures that access to the protection device is only gained from authorised sites. The passwords and their numbers are configured in the modem on REB500. The appropriate AT commands are to be taken from the modems instruction manual. Modem suppliers usually supply configuration software which enables the easy setting of these passwords and telephone numbers. At the end, changes made must be saved in the internal memory. The appropriate AT command is to be found in the modems instruction manual.
11-81
REB500
June 2000
12.
12.1. 12.2. 12.3. 12.4. 12.4.1. 12.4.2. 12.4.3. 12.4.4. 12.4.5. 12.4.6. 12.4.7. 12.4.8. 12.4.9. 12.5.
GLOSSARY
Terms and Meaning ..............................................................12-2 Keyword index........................................................................12-8 External connections of REB500 (Example) ........................12-23 Important Information ...........................................................12-27 Bay unit blocking signals ......................................................12-27 Reading central unit events..................................................12-27 Reading the disturbance recorder ........................................12-27 Time synchronisation ...........................................................12-27 OC and CR events via IEC-103 ...........................................12-27 TRC Minor Error 184............................................................12-27 Reports ................................................................................12-28 Disturbance records of switchgear positions........................12-28 REBWIN V5.0 ......................................................................12-28 Test protocols.......................................................................12-29
12-1
REB500
12.
12.1.
GLOSSARY
Terms and abbreviations A ALG_ ASIC Backplane Output General signal Application specific integrated circuit PCB or panel at the rear of an electronic equipment rack with the connectors between the modules. Busbar Busbar protection Busbar protection signal Section of busbar bounded by circuitbreakers which can be isolated by the protection Breaker failure protection Breaker failure protection signal Breaker pole discrepancy protection Bay Unit Independently operating section of the process bus with its own CPU. Data format for disturbance according to IEEE C 37.111 Phase Central processing unit Reductions factor due to the time constant of the power system Central unit
12-2
Meaning
BB BBP BBP_ BB zone
BFP BFP_ BPD BU Bus segment COMTRADE Conductor CPU CR CU
recorder
REB500
Current comparison Comparison of differential and restraint currents i.e. the energy flowing towards and away from a protected unit DAC Default Device_Id DIA Differential Current Idiff DSP E EFS EFS_ EFS_CPL Engineering Data Accessor Setting used if no other setting chosen ID of a communication unit connected to a MVB segment Diagnosis Geometric sum of all the currents of a busbar section Digital signal processor Input Earth fault protection Earth fault protection signal Earth fault protection pick-up setting System design and configuration by ABB Power Automation Ltd., or another authorized ABB company. Some parameters cannot be changed subsequently by the user (e.g. The activation of licensed software options) Records changes in the status of binary signals Event recorder Power system frequency Internal signal processing approximately 8ms as opposed to slower signals of 13ms Bay unit (PCB)
Event memory EVR F Faster signal input FE
12-3
REB500
Front-plane Bus board Ib IDiff IE Irstnt IK IKmin IKMS IKR IN Increment INT Interbay bus Irstnt ITT IQ Jumper K LCD LED LON Mask/unmask
PCB with plug-in base for module Load current Differential current Current level setting Restrain current Fault current Minimun fault current of a feeder Minimun fault current on a busbar Reduced fault current Rated current Count forwards Internal Station bus zone Intertripping Transverse current Bridge Stabilising factor Liquid crystal display Light emitting diode Interbay bus protocol A part of system or otem of plant that was masked using REBWIN (appears weakly in
12-4
REB500
the diagram. Eg. In preparation for a future extension of a station) has no Influence on the protection.Master Main control unit Master Maximal prolongation Minimum fault current Ikmin at point A MMK Fault current from the weakest source for a fault at point A (Man-Machine-Communication) Local control unit with LED`s, service buttons and text display Multifunction process bus Rated ratio Effective overcurrent factor Geometric sum of the three phase currents or the current measured by a neutral current c.t Number of the MVB bus segments within REB500 (16) Time-overcurrent protection Time-overcurrent protection signal Optical fibre conductor C:t. burden at IN Personal computer C.t. losses Records currents, voltages and signals Main control unit
MPB N n` Neutral current I0
. Node_ID OCDT OCDT_ OFC PB PC PE Perturbograph
12-5
REB500
Phase comparison
Phase relationship between currents measured in the same phase at different locations C.t. rated power REB500 configuration and control program installed on a PC Absolute sum of all the currents of a bus Reset ratio (overcurrent) Signal display followed corresponding event by the
PN REBWIN Restrain current RV Signal setting Slave Slow signal input SPD
Subordinate unit controlled by the master Signal duration >128 ms plus contact bounce filter time Breaker pole discrepancy protection
stabilisation factor k Quotient of differential (operating) and restraint currents STS STS_ SVS SVS_ SYS_ System wide t1 t1d t2 t2d Disturbance recorder Disturbance recorder signal Breaker failure protection Breaker failure protection signal System signal In the central unit and all bay units Delay t1 (SVS) Timer t1 tolerance (SVS) Delay t2 (SVS) Timer t2 tolerance (SVS)
12-6
REB500
ta tCB te th Time stamp TN to tRes Trigger tV UMZ UMZ_ WINEVE max
Rise time (maximum prolongation) Circuit-breaker opening time Contact bounce processing time filter and internal
Prolongation time (maximun) Date and time Power system time constant at the busbars Operating time (maximum prolongation) Back-up time Event that starts the disturbance Reset time (SVS current measurement) Time-overcurrent protection Time-overcurrent protection signal ABB disturbance recorder data evaluation program Phase shift (phase comparison) Tripping phase shift (phase comparison)
12-7
REB500
12.2.
Keyword index A Administrator Ambient conditions Analogue section Analogue/digital converter Ancillary function Application Application example Arc Arrow button Assembly replacement Assignment Auxillary contact Auxillary supply voltage B Back plate Back-up equipment Batteries Baud Bay unit Bay unit Bending radius Binary channels Binary inputs Binary input-output module Binary outputs Block diagram Blocking reaction Blocking scheme 3 8 3 3 3 3 6 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 see under Chapter 4 6 3 3 3 4 5 3 3/4 9 3 3 7
12-8
REB500
Blocking Breaker back-up protection Breaker pole discrepancy protection Bus controller Bus segments Busbar image Busbar protection Busbars Bus-tie breaker Buttons Bypass isolator Bypass operation C Cabinet/cubicle Cabinet/cubicle earth Calculations Cancel Central installation Central unit Circuit-breaker Circuit-breaker designation Circuit-breaker inspection Circuitry Clock time Close CMP Communication interface Communications parameter Compensated COMTRADE
8 11 11 3 3 3 5 3 3 3 5 5
6 6 5 4 3 3 3 5 5 6 3 4 3 3 8 3 4
12-9
REB500
CSP C-Button Configuration Contact bounce filter Contact mode Contacts in series Control Control unit Convention Current comparison Current transformer Cycle D Data bases Debug mode Device structure Diagnosis Differential Current Differential current alarm Differential current measurement Distributed installation Double busbar Double busbar with transfer bus
3 3 4/5 3 5 3 4 8 3 3/5 3/5 3
4 4 5 3 3 3/5/8 3 3 3 3
E
Earthing bars E-Button Electrically insulated Enable/disable End fault protection Event buffer 6 3 3 3 11 3
12-10
REB500
Event configuration Event list External fault External fault with current transformer saturation External release Extras
5 4 3 3 3 4
F
FAIL File Flashover gap Free star-point (isolated) Front-plane bus board Function abbreviations Fundamental frequency components FUSE Fuse 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
G
Ground concept 6
H
Hardware interface Hierarchy 9 3
I
IBB IEC 60870-5-103 Impedance grounded Input range Inputs Inspection Install location 11 11 3 3 3 3 6
12-11
REB500
Installation mode Installation mode Interface Interface module Interfaces Interferences Internal fault Intertripping Intertripping system Isolator alarm Isolator designation Isolator replica Isolator supervision
4 3 3 3 11 9 3 3 3 3/8 5 3 3
J
Jumper J1 Jumper J20 Jumper J22 3 3 3
L
LAN Local control unit LON Loss of supply Low voltage check 3 3 11 3 3
M
Main contact Main menu points Main window Maintenance Master CPU Master bus administrator 3 3 4 3 3 3
12-12
REB500
Maximum amount Maximum prolongation MBA Measuring principle Menu structure Miniature circuit-breaker Minimal contact bounce filter Minimum Minute pulse MMK Modem Modem link Modem link Mounting version Mouse
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 7 3 7 3 4
N
Name category Network earthing Neutral current supervision Neutral measurement Normal operation 3 3 3 / 11 11 8
O
Object-oriented model Off line OK On/off switch Operating in parallel Operator program Optical Optical fibre cable
12-13
3 4 4 3 3 4 3 6
REB500
Optical fibre conductor Optical fibre conductor cable Optical interface Optical receiver Optical star coupler Opto-coupler Opto-coupler number Opto-electrical converter Output power Output relay Output voltage Overcurrent release
3 3 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 3
P
Password PC Perturbograph Phase angle Phase comparison Plant diagram Plant diagrams Plant objects Power supply module Power system frequency Primary supply Process bus Protection zone Push buttons 4 3 5 / 11 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 7 3 3 4
R
REBWIN Receiver 3/4 3
12-14
REB500
Reclaim time RE-commissioning Record Redundancy Relay output Release Release the trip command Remote control Remote tripping Repair Reports Reset Restart Restore Restraint current Restraint factor Reverse current Ring bus configuration RS485 RUN
5 9 5 3 5 11 3 11 5 9 4 8 8 4 3 3 5 3 3 3
S
Sampling rate SBA SCON Screen holder Secondary injection Security tip Self monitoring Sender / receiver Serial interface 3 3 3 6 7 2 3 3 3
12-15
REB500
Serial interface SERIAL PORT 2 Setting Setup Shipment damage Signal Signal concept Signal contact Signal duration Signal nomenclature Signal number Signal output Signal recording Signal response Simulation mode Single busbar Slave bus administrator Slave CPU Solidly grounded Stability Stability test Stand-by operation Star coupler module Start-up phase STAT Station control system Station ground Station layout Stopbit Storage Supervision
3 3 4 4 7 3 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 7 3 3 8 3 3 6 3 3 10 3
12-16
REB500
Switching ban Switching sequence System response
3 7 5
T
Technical overview brochure Test Test Test generator Test mode Time delay Time stamp Time synchronization Time-overcurrent protection Tolerance Transformer terminals Transition module Transverse current Trigger condition Trip redirection Tripping channels Tripping commands Tripping contacts Tripping threshold Tripping time Trips T-zone 3 4 4 3/4 3 5 3 3 11 12 3 3 5 5 8 3 3 3 3 3 8 3
U
Un-install Upgrade User software
12-17
4 3 3
REB500
V
View VME Voltage transformer inputs Voltage transformer terminals 4 3 3 3
W
Waste disposal 10
Z
Zone trip 3
12-18
REB500
Numerics 1 Circuit-breaker configuration 1 Breaker scheme 11110 11205 11201 11215 11505 11510 11530 11605 11610 11615 11620 11655 11660 11765 13205 13605 13705 13710 13740 14205 15210 16705 17205 17710 21105 21110 21115 21305
12-19
see under Chapter 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
REB500
21405 21410 21805 21810 21815 22405 23105 23110 23305 23310 23315 23320 23325 23330 23335 23405 24105 24305 24405 25105 25305 25405 26805 26810 26815 26820 27105 27305 27405 31105 31205
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
12-20
REB500
31210 31215 31505 31805 31810 31815 31820 31825 32205 33210 34215 35220 36705 37205 41305 41310 41405 41410 41505 41805 41810 41815 41820 41825 41830 41835 42305 42310 42315 42320 42325
12-21
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
REB500
42405 43305 43310 43405 44305 44405 45305 45405 45805 47305 47405 500BIO01 500BU02 500CIM04 500CMP04 500CSP04 500IPS01 500MBA01 500PBIO1 500PSM03 yellow LED green LED red LED 500SCM01 500TRM02 500TRM03
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3/9 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
12-22
REB500
12.3.
External connections of REB500 (Example) The connection diagrams of REB500 are function specific and drawn according to the current norm: plus up, minus down. The diagrams that follow, show the correlation between the external connections. Additionally, some recommendations (non binding) are made. The connection of the current transformers always leads to questions. In principle, descriptions like P1 and P2 etc. don`t play any role. The connection of the bus-tie breaker current transformers deserves special attention and is shown as an example. An example is given of the connection between the battery and the REB500 including the connected circuits. In the example, it is also recommended how the circuits should be protected.
L1 L2 L3
L1
L2
L3
+U
Batt. Q0
Close command
-U Batt.
T1
Q0 Open
Q0 Closed
Q0 (Close command)
Bay unit
-F391 A9 A10 A13 A14
OC05
OC06
OC07
OC08
GROUP 3
A11
A12
GROUP 4
A15
-U Batt.
HEST 005049 C
Figure 12.1
Typical connection diagram for circuit-breaker image
12-23
L1
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 +U Batt. II I
L2
L3
L1
II
L2
12-24
- T1
L3
In case the ground conn ectio n of the current t ran sfo rme rs face the circuit breaker. Then the C.T. conn ectio ns to the bay unit must be reversed
GND
L1 L2
L3
Q1
Q2
Se e CB-Image See CB-Image
L1
L2
L3
GND
-T1
*2. Bay un it only required With couplers havin g two C.T.s
Q1 Ope n
Q1 Clo se d
Q2 Op en
Q2 Closed B ay unit Feede r
- F391 I1 I2 I3
I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
I9
I10 I11 I12
-F391 I1 I2 I3
I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
I9
I10 I11 I12
-F391
A1
A2
A5
A6
-F391 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5
I6 I7 I8
I9
I10 I11 I12 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N OC01 OC02 OC03 OC04
HEST 005046 C
IL2 IL3 IL0 IL1 IL2 IL3
1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N
1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N
IL1
IL0
GROUP 1
A3
Figure 12.2 Typical connection diagram (isolator, current transformer) for a feeder and a bus-tie breaker with a transformer (variant with 2 transformers)
A4 GRO UP 2 A7 A8
IL1
IL2
IL3
IL0
Ba y unit (Coupler bus-section II*)
REB500
Bay unit Coup ler bu s-se ction I + II (Coupler bus-section I*)
-U Ba tt.
REB500
Wiring 1,5mm 2

Redundant Power Supply (Option)
Station DC supply Short circuit protection 25A
DC supply short circuit protection 10A 1
Central unit Power supply
(2)
+ -
Battery B1 10A 1 Bay unit BU1 (2) Power supply
Battery B2
+ -
BU2
(2)
BU3
(2)
BU4
(2)
Upto 6 BU's 10A Next 6 BU's
Trip circuit Coil 1 BU1 + other protection Trip circuit Coil 2 BU1 + other protection Trip circuit Coil 1 BU2 Trip circuit Coil 2 BU2
Isolator image BU1 If B1 fails during operation, then the last isolator image will be valid as long as the image does not change.
Isolator image BU2
+ Battery B3 Indication
If B1 fails during operation then the indications are still available from the B3 power supply. Information!!
HEST 005048 C
Figure 12.3 Typical connection diagram of the DC distribution (battery supply) for a centralized REB500
12-25

Wiring 1,5mm2
Redundant Power Supply (Option)
REB500
Station DC supply short circuit protection
DC supply short circuit protection 10A
Central unit 1
(2)
+ -
Battery B1 4A Bay unit 1 Bu1 (2) Power supply
Battery B2
+ -
Other Protection
4A 1 BU2 (2) Power supply
4A 1 BU3 (2) Power supply
BU4 (2) Power supply Other BU's
Trip circuit Coil 1 BU1 + other protection Trip circuit Coil 2 BU1 + other protection Trip circuit Coil 1 BU2 Trip circuit Coil 2 BU2
Isolator image BU1 If B1 fails during operation the isolator image last know will be valid as long as the image does not change
Isolator image BU2
+ Battery B3 Indications
If B1 fails during operation then the indications are still available from the B3 power supply. Information!!
HEST 005047 C
Figure 12.4 Typical connection diagram of the DC distribution (battery supply) for a decentralized REB500
12-26
REB500
12.4.
Important Information (Software version V5.00)
12.4.1.
Bay unit blocking signals If the input 31210_Block output relays is set on the central unit, the bay units do not process the protection functions BFP, EFP and OCDT locally. The associated blocking signals 23405_BFP blocked, 24405_EFP blocked and 25405_OCDT blocked therefore reset.
12.4.2.
Reading central unit events Events stored in the central unit remain intact in the event of a supply failure for at least 24 hours. Should the supply be interrupted for a longer period or the energy reservoir be defective, the contents of the event memory are invalid. If they are uploaded by REBWIN when the system is in operation again, the invalid data can block the protection and cause it to reinitialise. To avoid this, the event memory must be deleted in such cases before it is read.
12.4.3.
Reading the disturbance recorder Should the last available buffer memory (configured as FIFO) become full while reading the disturbance recorder data, the disturbance recorder function is disabled and has to be explicitly enabled again.
12.4.4.
Time synchronisation The minute impulse cannot be used to synchronise the time in the various units if one of the two IBB protocols is configured.
12.4.5.
OC and CR events via IEC-103 OC events (any physical opto-coupler input regardless of signal) and CR events (any physical relay output regardless of the signal configured) are not supported by the IEC-103 protocol (generic). Therefore if they are configured in spite of this, the 500CIM01 software will not start.
12.4.6.
TRC Minor Error 184 Most hardware components are equipped with a non-volatile memory containing what is termed traceability data such as date of production, index serial number etc. The consistency of these data are checked whenever REB 500 is started and a TRC minor error 182 message generated should an error be found.
12-27
REB500
12.4.7.
Reports A printer driver must be installed under Windows before it is possible to display pre-defined reports on the screen. The printer does not, however, have to be actually connected to the PC. The reports preview cannot display pages with numbers higher than 99.
12.4.8.
Disturbance records of switchgear positions The disturbance recorder does not record the positions of circuitbreakers and isolators, because when fitted with two auxiliary contacts (for CLOSED and OPEN) they can have more than two statuses (open, in motion, closed and undefined). The disturbance recorder functions and the evaluation software can only process binary signals (i.e. signals that only have two possible values). A possible alternative is to configure one of the x_Start DR_n signals to be in parallel with the CLOSED auxiliary contact on the isolator.
12.4.9.
REBWIN V5.0 In Section 4.5.35 Tools / Version its written, that the user has the possibility of changing the index and its description. Adding a version description text longer than 100 characters for revision index information will cause a program crash. In Section 5.4.3 Busbar protection (settings and calculations) the setting parameter for the stabilizing factor k are given. If in WINDOWS the Decimal Symbol in Regional Settings is set to comma, the value of k cannot be set. K can only be set according to U.S. standard, i.e. by means of a point, e.g. 0.8 and not 0,8.
12-28
REB500
12.5.
Test protocols Test record type REB500 (test bay) (subject to alterations) Test sheet type REB500 (commissioning) (subject to alterations)
12-29
REB500
12-30
ABB Power Automation AG/Ltd

TEST PROTOKOLL / Test Record:
nderung Seite: :
1/16
REB500
Fabrikations-Nr. ZE.......
Stammdaten / Regular data

Kunde Client ...............................
Nenndaten / Nominal data

Anlage Installation ....................... Schutzobjekt Protected Object ............. Bestell-Nr. Order-No. ........................ Gerte-Nr. Equipment-No. ................ Schema-Nr. Diagram-No..................... Fabrikations-Nr. Fabrication-No................. Netzspannung Main voltage ......................... Nennstrom Nominal current .................... Nennspannung Nominal voltage.................... Netzfrequenz Nominal frequence ............... Hilfsgleichspannung Auxiliary voltage ................... Spannung Eing.-Befehle Input-Signal voltage.............. VAC A V HZ VDC VDC
Geprft Tested
Freigegeben Released
Prfdatum Testdate
Kundenabnahme durch ... Factory acceptance test by ...
00-11-02 Abnahmedatum Date of FAT
Edit: 00-06-09
Based on: File HEADPROT_c_r5 Mod. C

nderung Seite: :
2/16
REB500
Durchgefhrte Tests / Checks done
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Mechanische Kontrolle Mechanical check .................................................................................................................................. bereinstimmung mit den Arbeitsdokumenten Marking, correct items included............................................................................................................. Anlageerdung Protective earthing................................................................................................................................. Relais und Einschbe Relays and plug-in units ........................................................................................................................ Hochspannungsprfung und Isolationswiderstand Dielectric test and insulation resistance ................................................................................................ Kreis Hochspannung Circuit High voltage Wechselstrom AC-current Wechselspannung AC-voltage Gleichspannungskreise DC-circuit Auslsung und Signale Tripping and signals Eingangsbefehle Input commands Netzeingang Main voltage Erde Earth Tested according to IEC 255-5, Class C (1977) Widerstand Resistance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Speisung Supply.................................................................................................................................................... Schnittstellen Interfaces ............................................................................................................................................... Funktionsprfung Operational test ..................................................................................................................................... Zubehr und Reservematerial Accessory and spare part...................................................................................................................... Schlusskontrolle Final check ............................................................................................................................................

nderung Seite: :
3/16
REB500
Fabrikations-Nr. Fabrication-No................................................
Bentzte Messmittel / Measurment instruments used

Bezeichnung Designation Multimeter Ana. Multimeter Dig. Timer Multimeter Ana. Multimeter Ana. Multimeter Dig. Multimeter Dig. Zeitmesser Multimeter Dig. Timer Hochsp.Prfgert Isolationsmesse Prfturm 1 REB500 Prfturm 2 REB500 Hochsp. Prfst. Isolationsmesse Multimeter Ana. Multimeter Dig. Multimeter Dig. Zeitmesser A-Quelle + Timer Typ Type Unigor 3n Fluke 85 TM200 Unigor 1n Unigor 3n Fluke 8024A Fluke 85 TM 2 Fluke 85 TM200 P 6S Metriso 5000 APTS-VISTAR APTS-VISTAR P 5S/Metr. 5000 Metriso 500 Unigor 3n Fluke 8024A MA 5D TM 2 Harald Programma Inventar-Nr. Inventory-no. 032320 032140 I-ES110475 021188 015042 015143 110302 026335 110304 I-ES110476 023320 020285 110425 I-ES110481 007146 020273 009123 018999 016887 026334 110477 Bemerkung Remark

nderung Seite: :
4/16
REB500
Fabrikations-Nr. Fabrication-No................................................ Einstellungen SSS / settings BBP: Prfungen SSS / tests BBP In Beilagen protokolliert / recorded in enclosures ................................................................................................. Zustzliche Funktionalitten / additional functions: Ext. Auslsung / ext. Trip ......................................................................................................................................
konfiguriert und geprft configured and tested
Ext. Freigabe / ext. release ...................................................................................................................................

Auslseumleitung / trip redirection........................................................................................................................

Trenneralarm / isolator alarm................................................................................................................................

Revision, Wartung / revision, maintenance...........................................................................................................

Blockierungen / blocking .......................................................................................................................................

berstromfreigabe / Overcurrent check................................................................................................................

Unterspannungsfreigabe / Undervoltage check....................................................................................................

Einstellungen SSS / settings BBP: Kurzschlusstrom / Phase fault current Ikmin................................................................................................ Kurzschlusstrom L0/ Phase fault current L0 Ikmin....................................................................................... k-Faktor / k-factor............................................................................................................................................... Differenzstromalarm / Differentialcurrent alarm Idiff ................................................................................... Zeitverzgerung Idiff / Time delay Idiff ............................................................................................................. Trennerlaufzeit / Isolator running time........................................................................................................... Ansprechwert berstromfreigabe >I / pick up value overcurrent check >I ............................................... Ansprechwert Unterspannungsfreigabe <U / pick up value Undervoltage check <U ............................
A A % s s x IN x UN
Based on: File r5pc_BBP Mod. D

nderung Seite: :
5/16
REB500
Fabrikations-nr ZE / Fabrication-no CU Kupplungsblockierung / Blocking of the coupler: Kupplung Coupler Schalter offen Breaker open Trenner Isolators Abgang Feeder Parallelbetrieb parallel operation Bemerkung Remark
Based on: File r5pc_blockcoupler Mod. C

nderung Seite: :
6/16
REB500
Fabrikations-nr ZE / Fabrication-no CU Kupplungsfunktion / coupler function: Externer Fehler / external fault..................................................................
Kupplung/coupler
.................................................
Keine Auslsung/no trip
Kupplung mit 1/2 Wandler / coupler with 1/2 ct:

Fault BB1 BB2
Diagrammbeschreibung / description of diagram BB1: BB2: ................................. .................................
Abgang/Feeder 1: ........................
Coupler Feeder1 Feeder2
Abgang/Feeder 2: ........................ Kupplung/Coupler: .......................
Fehlerhafter Schienenteil lst unverzgert aus / faulty busbar trips immediatly ................................................... Mitnahme auf umliegende Schienenteile / intertriping on surrounding busbars ................................................... Kupplungsnachholzeit / coupler reclaim time......................................................... ms ms
eingestellt/set gemessen/measured
Fault BB1 BB2
Diagrammbeschreibung / description of diagram BB1: BB2: ................................. .................................
Abgang/Feeder 1: ........................
Coupler Feeder1 Feeder2
Abgang/Feeder 2: ........................ Kupplung/Coupler: .......................
Fehlerhafter Schienenteil lst unverzgert aus / faulty busbar trips immediately ................................................. Mitnahme auf umliegende Schienenteile / intertripping on surrounding busbars ................................................. Kupplungsnachholzeit / coupler reclaim time......................................................... ms ms
eingestellt/set gemessen/measured tcycle = 8 ms
t measure t set + t trip + (2 t cycle )

Kupplung mit 2 Wandler / coupler with 2 cts: Fehler zwischen Wandlern / fault between cts
...........................................................................................
sofortige Ausl. beide Seiten/immediate trip both sides Based on: File r5pc_coupfunc Mod. C
Kupplung/coupler

nderung Seite: :
7/16
REB500
Fabrikations-nr ZE / Fabrication-no CU
1 Sammelschiene / 1 bus system Wandler vorhanden / CTs available

CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4 CT5 CT6
DTT 1 Busbar I CB A CT1 CT2 CT3 CB B
DTT 2 Busbar II CB C CT4 CT5 CT6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
DTT: direct transfer trip CT: current transformer CB: circuit breaker
Fehler / Fault 1 4 7 10
CB A
DTT 1
CB B
DTT 2
CB C
Busbar I
Busbar II
Bemerkung / Remark
CB A closed and faulty CB A open CB B closed and faulty CB A closed and faulty CB B open CB C closed and faulty CB B closed and faulty CB C open CB C closed and faulty
DTT: direkte Fernauslsung Busbar: Sammelschiene Bemerkungen / Remarks:
CT: Stromwandler CB: Leistungschalter closed and faulty: geschlossen und ein Kurzschluss open: geffnet
Based on: File r5pc_diameter Mod. C

nderung Seite: :
8/16
REB500
Fabrikations-nr ZE / Fabrication-no CU K-Wert Messung / K-Value measurement: K-Wert / K-Value: K =
(I ) (I )
Abgang 1 Feeder 1 Strom 1 Current 1 A A A Strom 1 Current 1 A A A Strom 1 Current 1 A A A Strom 1 Current 1 A A A Strom 1 Current 1 A A A Strom 1 Current 1 A A A Strom 1 Current 1 A A A
Einstellung / Setting: 0.8
Phase Phase L1 L2 L3 Phase Phase L1 L2 L3 Phase Phase L1 L2 L3 Phase Phase L1 L2 L3 Phase Phase L1 L2 L3 Phase Phase L1 L2 L3 Phase Phase L1 L2 L3
Schiene Busbar
Abgang 2 Feeder 2
Strom 2 Current 2 A A A Strom 2 Current 2 A A A Strom 2 Current 2 A A A Strom 2 Current 2 A A A Strom 2 Current 2 A A A Strom 2 Current 2 A A A Strom 2 Current 2 A A A
K-Wert K-Value
Abweichung Difference % % % Abweichung Difference % % % Abweichung Difference % % % Abweichung Difference % % % Abweichung Difference % % % Abweichung Difference % % % Abweichung Difference % % %
Schiene Busbar
Abgang 1 Feeder 1
Abgang 2 Feeder 2
K-Wert K-Value
Schiene Busbar
Abgang 1 Feeder 1
Abgang 2 Feeder 2
K-Wert K-Value
Schiene Busbar
Abgang 1 Feeder 1
Abgang 2 Feeder 2
K-Wert K-Value
Schiene Busbar
Abgang 1 Feeder 1
Abgang 2 Feeder 2
K-Wert K-Value
Schiene Busbar
Abgang 1 Feeder 1
Abgang 2 Feeder 2
K-Wert K-Value
Schiene Busbar
Abgang 1 Feeder 1
Abgang 2 Feeder 2
K-Wert K-Value
Based on: File r5pc_kvalue Mod. C

nderung Seite: :
9/16
REB500
Fabrikations-nr ZE / Fabrication-no CU Mitnahme / Intertriping: Schienenteil Busbar sect. Ref Abgang Ref Feeder Abgang / Kupplung Feeder / Coupler Fehler intern Internal fault Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Fehler extern External fault No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip Bemerkung Remark
Trip: Auslsung
No Trip: Keine Auslsung
Based on: File r5pc_intertrip Mod. C

nderung Seite: :
10/16
REB500
Strschreiber / disturbance recorder: Konfiguriert / configured ........................................................................................................................................ Aktiviert / aktiv ....................................................................................................................................................... Einstellungen / settings Anzahl Aufzeichnungen / number of records ...........................................................................................................2 Bei Speicherberlauf / in case of event overflow ....................................................
FIX FIFO
......................................... ......................................... .........................................

4 x Spannung/voltage
Grundfrequenz / main frequency ............................................................................

50 Hz 60 Hz
Analoge Kanle / analog channels..........................................................................

4 x Strom/current
Binre Triggersignale / binary trigger signals..........................................................

konfiguriert configured
.........................................
nicht konfiguriert not configured
Abtastrate / sampling frequency Grundfrequenz nominal frequency 50 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 720 Hz 60 Hz 1440 Hz 2880 Hz
Abtastrate
sampling rate Aufzeichnungs-Dauer recording duration 1.5 s 3s 6s 10 s 12 s 20 s 24 s 40 s
st st st o1 o2 o1 o2 o1 = Option 1 o1 o2 o2 = Option 2 o1 o2 o1 o2 st st
st o1 o2
st = Standard
Based on: File r5pc_distrec Mod. C

nderung Seite: :
11/16
REB500
Fabrikations-nr ZE / Fabrication-no CU Schalterversager-Schutz SVS / breaker failure protection BFP Prfung SVS / tests BFP: Ext. Anregung / ext. start ......................................................................................................................................
Ext. Anregung ohne Strom / ext. start without current ..........................................................................................

Auslsung SVS nach T1 / trip BFP after T1..........................................................................................................

Auslsung SVS nach T2 / trip BFP after T2..........................................................................................................

Fernauslsung SVS / remote trip BFP ..................................................................................................................

Blockierung SVS / block BFP................................................................................................................................

Signalisierung SVS / signalisation BFP.................................................................................................................

Einstellungen SVS / settings BFP: SVS aktiv in Feld / BFP activ in feeder .............................................................................................
alle / all
Verzgerungszeit / time delay Verzgerungszeit / time delay
T1 T2
100 ms .............................................................................................
aktiv / activ
200 ms .............................................................................................
aktiv / activ
Ansprechwert SVS / current setting BFP ....................................................................................................... 1.2 x IN Fernauslsung konfiguriert nach / remote trip configured after ..............................
T1
.........................................
T2
Logik Typ / logic type ..............................................................................................

1
................
2
....................
3
Based on: File r5pc_BFP Mod. C

nderung Seite: :
12/16
REB500
Fabrikations-nr ZE / Fabrication-no CU Endfehler-Schutz / end fault protection: Prfung EFS / tests EFP: Auslsung EFS / trip EFP .....................................................................................................................................
Mitnahme EFS / interrip EFP ................................................................................................................................

Fernauslsung EFS / remote trip EFP ..................................................................................................................

Blockierung EFS / block EFP................................................................................................................................

Signalisierung EFS / signalisation EFP.................................................................................................................

Einstellungen EFS / settings EFP: EFS aktiv in Feld / EFP activ in feeder................................................................ .......................................
alle / all
Ansprechwert */ pick up value * ..................................................................................................................... 1.2 x IN Ansprechverzgerung bei Schalterffnung/ pick up value time delay on opening cb................................ ms
* Nur einstellbar durch ABB Power Automation AG / can just be set by ABB Power Automation Ltd Based on: File r5pc_EFP Mod. C

nderung Seite: :
13/16
REB500
berstrom-Schutz / overcurrent protection: Prfung UMZ / tests OCDT: Auslsung UMZ / trip OCDT .................................................................................................................................
Fernauslsung UMZ / remote trip OCDT ..............................................................................................................

Blockierung UMZ / block OCDT............................................................................................................................

Signalisierung UMZ / display OCDT .....................................................................................................................

Einstellungen UMZ / settings OCDT: UMZ aktiv in Feld / OCDT activ in feeder ........................................................... .......................................
alle / all
Zeitverzgerung / time delay...................................................................................................................... Ansprechwert / pick up value ....................................................................................................................
ms x IN
Based on: File r5pc_OCDT Mod. C

nderung Seite: :
14/16
REB500
Schalterpoldiskrepanzschutz/ Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection: Prfung SPD / tests PDF: Ansprechen SPD / operate PDF ...........................................................................................................................
Blockierung SPD / block PDF ...............................................................................................................................

Signalisierung SPD / signalisation PDF ................................................................................................................

Einstellungen SPD / settings PDF: Diskrepanzfaktor / Discrepancy factor ................................................................................................... Zeitverzgerung / time delay...................................................................................................................... Ansprechwert / pick up value .................................................................................................................... x Imax ms x IN
Based on: File r5pc_

nderung Seite: :
15/16
REB500
IEC 60870-5-103 Schnittstelle / interface Aktivierung / activation ............................................................................................

IBB 1
.........................................
IBB 2
CIM Node ID; Device ID............................................................................................ 7............................................0

Node Device
IEC-103 address ................................................................................................................................................ Baudrate.................................................................................................................................................................... Kommunikation geprft / communication tested...................................................................................................

Mit IEC-103 Simulations-SW / by IEC-103 simulation tool
Bemerkung / remark:
LON Kommunikation / communication Aktivierung / activation ............................................................................................

IBB 1
.........................................
IBB 2
CIM Node ID; Bus line.........................................................................................

Node
....................................
bus line
Clock address .................................................................................................................................................... Clock warning address....................................................................................................................................... Sync. source ......................................................................................................................................................... Kommunikation geprft / communication tested...................................................................................................
Mit LON Tool / by LON tool
Bemerkung / remark:
Based on: File r5pc_COMM Mod. C

nderung Seite: :
16/16
REB500
Fabrikations-nr ZE / Fabrication-no CU Datenblatt / data sheet 1MRB 520256-Bde / Ben (Mrz / March 2000) Prfanweisung / test instruction 1KHF 060260/A Konfiguration / Configuration: Konfigurierte Funktionen / functions configured: Sammelschienenschutz SSS / busbar protection BBP......................................................................................... L0-Messung / L0 measurment .............................................................................................................................. Schalterversagerschutz SVS / breaker failure protection BFP ............................................................................. Endfehlerschutz EFS / end fault protection EFP................................................................................................... berstromzeitschutz UMZ / time-overcurrent protection OCDT ........................................................................... Schalterpol-Diskrepanz-Schutz SPD / CB pole discrepancy function PDF .......................................................... Strschreiber STS/ disturbance recorder DRR..................................................................................................... LON-Interface / LON interface .............................................................................................................................. IEC-Interface / IEC interface ................................................................................................................................. ? / ? ....................................................................................................................................................................... Softwareversionen / software versions: REBWIN (MMI) ...................................................................................................................................................5.00 REBCON (Config.-SW).......................................................................................................................................5.00 REBSYS (Firmware) ...........................................................................................................................................5.00 SiMon (Base-SW) ..................................................................................................................... 3.41 ..................3.43
CU BU
SS-Konfiguration / BB configuration: Anzahl Schienen / number of buses ........................................................................................................................2 Anzahl Abgnge bestckt, Reserve / number of feeders equipped, spare..........................................................0, 0 Anzahl Lngstrenner / number of section isolators ..................................................................................................0 Anzahl Kupplungen bestckt, Reserve / number of coupler equipped, spare ...... 0, 0................ ....................
Anzahl/number 1 ct 2ct
REB500 Aufstellung / REB500 setting: Zentral / centralized.......................................................................................................................... ..................... Dezentral / decentralized ...................................................................................................................................... Aufbau Einheiten / structure of units: Redundante Speisung ZE / redundancy supply CU ............................................................................................. Redundante Speisung FE / redundancy supply BU.............................................................................................. BIO in ZE / BIO in CU ..............................................................................................................................................1 Konfigurationsdatei / setfile: Name / name ..........................................................................................................................................
.mdb
ZE=Zentraleinheit .........CU=Central Unit ..........FE=Feldeinheit ............ BU=Bay Unit................ SS=Sammelschiene.....BB=Busbar Based on: File r5pc_config Mod. D
TEST SHEET
STATION: Busbar protection type REB500
Check list Kind of check General specification Check of transport damage Visual check of external wiring Check of cubicle / relay earthing Check of supply voltage (DC) Check of settings (calculated by ....) Check of current transformer circuits Check of voltage transformer circuits Check of allocation of bus section and device ID Secondary injection with test set type ...... Isolator auxiliary contacts (Isolator image) Coupler breaker aux. contacts / Manual close Integrated breaker failure protection Breaker failure protection starting (external) Check of input signals Check of signalling circuits / alarms Check of tripping circuits Stability check System time setting Final check Remarks
Page:
Reb5_E1203_Testsheet.doc / 00-07
Commissioning
BAL/IBS
Page
see sep. print out
If non ABB Power Automation Ltd test sets were used, note type, number, calibration date:
Client Date: Signature: Date: Signature:
TEST SHEET
General datas Nominal voltage of the protected station ............... kV
Page:
Commissioning
BAL/IBS
Type of installation (Double busbar, 1 system ...) ................................................................................... Air insulated (AIS) ................................................................................... Gas insulated (GIS) ................................................................................... Software version ................................................................................... ................................................................................... ................................................................................... ................................................................................... ................................................................................... ................................................................................... ................................................................................... ................................................................................... ...................................................................................
Used drawings (Designation, no. and modification index)
Check of power supply Type of battery grounding (Minus grounded, floating, symmetrically grounded at high impedance ...) Measured voltages: First battery: Plus to minus Plus to ground Ground to minus ............... V ............... V ............... V Second battery: not applicable Plus to minus ............... V Plus to ground ............... V Ground to minus ............... V ................................................................................... ...................................................................................
Check of auxiliary contacts

Isolator end-position "OPEN" Isolator end-position "CLOSED"
Condition of isolator switching sequence fulfilled: Yes No Remarks: .................................................................................... .................................................................................... .................................................................................... .................................................................................... .................................................................................... .................................................................................... ....................................................................................
Isolation gap Closed auxiliary contact (N/O)
Open auxiliary contact (N/C)
Auxiliary contact must be closed Auxiliary contact ideally closed Auxiliary contact must be open
TEST SHEET
Binary input/output module 500BIO01 Central unit, Slot .......... Binary inputs OC01
OC01 OC02 OC03 OC04 OC05 OC06 OC07 OC08 OC09 OC10 OC11 OC12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Page:
Commissioning
BAL/IBS
Function/Remarks .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................
checked
OC02 OC03 OC04 OC05 OC06 OC07 OC08 OC09 OC10 OC11 OC12
................................................................................................... .................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................
Tripping and signalling contacts

1 2 CR01 CR02 CR03 CR04 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CR05 10 11 12 CR06 13 14 15 CR07 CR08 CR09 16 17 18
CR01 CR02 CR03 CR04 CR05 CR06 CR07 CR08 CR09
.................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................
TEST SHEET
2
nd
Page:
Commissioning
BAL/IBS
Binary input/output module 500BIO01 (if equipped only) Central unit, Slot ..........
Binary inputs OC01

OC01 OC02 OC03 OC04 OC05 OC06 OC07 OC08 OC09 OC10 OC11 OC12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Function/Remarks .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................
checked
OC02 OC03 OC04 OC05 OC06 OC07 OC08 OC09 OC10 OC11 OC12
................................................................................................... .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. Function/Remarks checked
Signalling Contacts
1 2 CR01 CR02 CR03 CR04 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CR05 10 11 12 CR06 13 14 15 CR07 CR08 CR09 16 17 18
CR01 CR02 CR03 CR04 CR05 CR06 CR07 CR08 CR09
.................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................
TEST SHEET
Bay unit 500BU02 Feeder .................................. Binary inputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A
Page:
Commissioning
BAL/IBS
Function/Remarks OC01 OC02 OC03 OC04 OC05 OC06 OC07 OC08 OC09 OC10 OC11 OC12 OC13 OC14 OC15 OC16 .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................
checked
OC01 OC02 OC03 OC04 OC05 OC06 OC07 OC08
OC09 OC10 OC11 OC12 OC13 OC14 OC15 OC16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
................................................................................................... .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. ...................................................................................................
TEST SHEET
Bay unit 500BU02 Feeder .................................. Tripping and signalling contacts
1 C 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Page:
Commissioning
BAL/IBS
Function/Remarks
checked
CR01 CR02 CR03 CR04 CR05 CR06 CR07 CR08
.................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................
CR01
CR02 CR03 CR04 CR05 CR06 CR07 CR08
CR9 CR10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CR09 CR10 CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16
.................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................
CR11 CR12 CR13
CR14 CR15 CR16
TEST SHEET
STATION: Busbar protection type REB500 Commissioning
Page:
BAL/IBS
Secondary injection: Check of the input current transformers Measurement of pick-up values IKmin Setting: Ikmin L1, L2, L3 ............... A Ikmin N ............... A
Each current transformer has to be measured Feeder [ABB No.] Current transformer ratio [A/A] L1,L2,L3 L0 Injection to bus Nominal value [A] L1,L2,L3 L0 L1 Measured Value [A] L2 L3 L0
Remarks:
TEST SHEET
STATION: Busbar protection type REB500 Commissioning
Secondary injection: Check of the input voltage transformers
Page:
BAL/IBS
Feeder [ABB No.]
Voltage transformer ratio [kV/V] L1,L2,L3 L0
Voltage injected [V] L1,L2,L3 L0 L1
LMI / HMI display Voltage [kV] L2 L3
L0
Remarks:
TEST SHEET
Stability check Bus / Bus section ............... Feeder [ABB No.] open on bus ..... open on bus ..... open on bus ..... open on bus ..... open on bus ..... open on bus ..... open on bus ..... open on bus ..... open on bus ..... open on bus ..... Remarks: Primary current [A] L1 L2 L3 ..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... ---..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... ---..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... LMI / HMI display Feeder current [A] L1 L2 L3 L0 ..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... ---..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... ---..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .....
Page:
Commissioning
with primary injection with load current
BAL/IBS
LMI / HMI display Differential current [A] L1 L2 L3 L0 ..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... ---..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... ---..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... --..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .....
Delete data
Notification Form for Errors in this Document Dear User, We are always endeavouring to improve the quality of out technical publications and would like to hear your suggestions and comments. Would you therefore please fill in this questionnaire and return it to the address given below. ABB Power Automation Ltd Technical Publications Dept. NSV-6 Haselstrasse 16 / 65/1 CH-5401 Baden Fax +41 56 205 28 00 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Concerns publication: 1MRB520259-Uen (REB 500 V5.0)
Have you discovered any mistakes in this publication? If so, please note here the pages, sections etc.
Do you find the publication readily understandable and logically structured? Can you make any suggestions to improve it?
Is the information sufficient for the purpose of the publication? If not, what is missing and where should it be included?
Name Company Postal code Town
Date
Country
Notification Form for Equipment Faults and Problems Dear User, Should you be obliged to call on our repair service, we kindly as you to attach a note to the unit describing the fault as precisely as possible. This will assist us to carry out the repair swiftly and reliably and you will gain the benefit. Please attach a completed form to every unit and forward them to the address below. ABB Power Automation Ltd Repair Centre Eingang West, Warenannahme Terminal CA CH-5401 Baden Switzerland -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Equipment data: Unit type: Serial No.: HE .................................. In operation since: Reason for return: (tick where applicable) Overfunction No function Outside tolerance Abnormal operating temperature Sporadic error Unit for checking
Remarks/Description of fault:
Customer: Address: Please contact: Phone:
Date:
Fax:
Notification Form for Software Errors and Problems Dear User, It is common experience that software does not always function as expected for all applications. A precise description of the problem and observations will help us to improve and maintain the software to your benefit. Please complete this form and send it together with any supporting information or documents to the address below. ABB Power Automation Ltd Software Support Group NST Haselstrasse 16/122 CH-5401 Baden Switzerland --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Unit/ REB 500 SW version: MMC operator program (PC) SW version:
Problem: Program error (unit/system) Manual error other: Can the error be reproduced at will?
Program error (MMC/PC) Suggestion for improvement yes no
Particulars of hardware and software (system configuration, type of PC etc.):
Problem located? Suggested changes enclosed?
yes yes
no no
The following are enclosed (floppy with settings etc.): Floppy other: Description of problem: Unit/system settings, file name:
Customer: Address: Please contact: Phone:
Date:
Fax:
DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM: (continuation)
___________________________________________________________________ ACTION (internal use of ABB Power Automation Ltd, Dept. NST only) Received by: Answered by: Problem solved? yes Date: Date: no
Week Name Position Consequence ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IMPORTANT NOTICE! The busbar protection REB 500 may only be installed, operated and maintained by trained personnel. Experience has shown that reliable operation of our products is assured, providing the information and recommendations contained in these Operating Instructions are adhered to. It is scarcely possible for the instructions to cover every eventuality that can occur when using technical devices and systems. We would therefore request the user to notify us directly or our agent of any unusual observations or of instances, in which these instructions provide no or insufficient information. In addition to these instructions, any applicable local regulations and safety procedures must always be strictly observed both when connecting up and commissioning this equipment. Any work such as insertion or removal of soldered jumpers or setting resistors, which may be necessary, may only be performed by appropriately qualified personnel. We expressly accept no responsibility for any direct damage, which may result from incorrect operation of this equipment, even if no reference is made to the particular situation in the Operating Instructions.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Haselstrasse 16/122 CH-5401 Baden/ Switzerland Telephone +41 56 205 77 44 Telefax +41 56 205 55 77 Home page www.abb.com/substationautomation
Printed in Switzerland (0011-0000-0)
ABB Automation Products AB S-72171 Vsters Sweden Telephone +46 21 32 13 00 Telefax +46 21 14 69 18
ABB Transmit Oy Relays and Network Control Postfach 699 FIN-65101 Vaasa, Finnland Telephone +358 10 224 000 Telefax +358 10 224 1094
ABB Power T&D Co. 4300 Coral Ridge Drive Coral Springs, Fla. 33065 USA Telephone +1 954 752 6700 ext. 2461 Telefax +1 954 345 5329

Reb5 E

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Reb5 E

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

1MRB520259-Uen Edition June 2000

3. Structure, function and technical specification

4. External operator program (REBWIN)

5. Configuration and settings

6. Errection and installation

8. Operation and maintenance

10. Storage, decommissioning and disposal

REB 500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

ABB Power Automation Ltd

ABB Power Automation Ltd

REB 500 1MRB520529-Uen / Rev. A

REB 500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

ABB Power Automation Ltd

ABB Power Automation Ltd

REB 500 1MRB520529-Uen / Rev. A

REB 500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

ABB Power Automation Ltd

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

ABB Power Automation Ltd

ABB Power Automation Ltd

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

Note: This symbol draws attention to a potentially damaging situation.

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

ABB Power Automation Ltd

ABB Power Automation Ltd

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

Note: Electrostatic discharge can destroy components in the equipment.

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

ABB Power Automation Ltd

ABB Power Automation Ltd

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

ABB Power Automation Ltd

Front view of a central unit

ABB Power Automation Ltd

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

Bay units for alternative types of semi-flush mounting

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

ABB Power Automation Ltd

Basic layout of a centralised REB500 protection system

ABB Power Automation Ltd

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

Centralised system with 1 to 12 BU02

Central unit (CU)

Equipment fitted from the front

Equipment fitted from the rear

Figure 3.5 3.1.2.2.

Example of the equipment cubicles in a centralised busbar protection system

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

ABB Power Automation Ltd

Control unit REC REB500 central unit REL

Control unit REC

REB500 bay unit Feeder protection

REB500 bay unit Feeder protection

Central unit Figure 3.7

ABB Power Automation Ltd

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

ABB Power Automation Ltd

ABB Power Automation Ltd

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A

REB500 1MRB520259-Uen / Rev. A